Philips Medical Systems North America WLANBV2 WLAN Module IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n User Manual ait fm manual en 2012 03 02

Philips Medical Systems North America Co. WLAN Module IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n ait fm manual en 2012 03 02

Contents

User Manual IntelliVue MP2

Instructions for Use
IntelliVue Patient Monitor
MP2
Release J with Software Revision J.xx.xx
Patient Monitoring
3
1Table of Contents
1Installation 11
Installation Checklist 11
Unpacking and Checking the Shipment 12
Mounting the Monitor 13
Mounting the External Power Supply (M8023A) 13
Connecting the Monitor to AC Mains 13
Checking Out the Monitor 15
Operating the Monitor 16
Setting the Date and Time 17
Checking Country-Specific Default Settings 17
Handing Over the Monitor 18
2Basic Operation 19
Introducing the IntelliVue MP2 19
Controls, Indicators and Connectors 20
Extending Measurements 22
Operating and Navigating 28
Operating Modes 33
Understanding Screens 34
Using the XDS Remote Display 34
Using the Visitor Screen 35
Understanding Profiles 35
Understanding Settings 36
Changing Measurement Settings 37
Switching a Measurement On and Off 37
Adjusting a Measurement Wave 37
Using Labels 38
Using IntelliVue Cableless Measurements 40
Changing Monitor Settings 41
Checking Your Monitor Revision 42
Getting Started 42
Disconnecting from AC Mains Power 43
Monitoring After a Power Failure 44
Networked Monitoring 44
Capturing Alarm Reports and Printing 44
3What's New? 45
What's New in Release J.0 45
What's New in Release H.0 46
What's New in Release G.0? 47
4
What's New in Release F.0? 48
4Alarms 51
Visual Alarm Indicators 52
Audible Alarm Indicators 53
Acknowledging Alarms 55
Pausing or Switching Off Alarms 56
Alarm Limits 58
Reviewing Alarms 61
Latching Alarms 62
Testing Alarms 63
Alarm Behavior at Power On 63
Alarm Recordings 64
5Patient Alarms and INOPs 65
Patient Alarm Messages 65
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 71
6Managing Patients and Equipment 89
Patient Concepts 89
Equipment Concepts 89
Managing Patients 90
Transferring Patients 94
Managing Equipment 98
Information Center Compatibility 106
7ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring 107
Skin Preparation for Electrode Placement 107
Connecting ECG Cables 107
Selecting the Primary and Secondary ECG Leads 108
Checking Paced Mode 108
Understanding the ECG Display 109
Monitoring Paced Patients 110
Changing the Size of the ECG Wave 111
Changing the Volume of the QRS Tone 112
Changing the ECG Filter Settings 112
Selecting Positions of Va and Vb Chest Leads (for 6-lead placement) 112
Choosing EASI or Standard Lead Placement 113
About ECG Leads 113
ECG Lead Fallback 114
ECG Lead Placements 114
Capture 12-Lead 119
EASI ECG Lead Placement 122
ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview 123
Using ECG Alarms 124
ECG Safety Information 125
5
About Arrhythmia Monitoring 127
Switching Arrhythmia Analysis On and Off 127
Choosing an ECG Lead for Arrhythmia Monitoring 127
Understanding the Arrhythmia Display 129
Arrhythmia Relearning 132
Arrhythmia Alarms 133
About ST Monitoring 137
Switching ST or STE On and Off 138
Understanding the ST Display and Windows 139
Updating ST Baseline Snippets 141
About the ST Measurement Points 142
ST Alarms 144
STE Alarms 144
Viewing ST Maps 145
About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring 148
QT Alarms 152
Switching QT Monitoring On and Off 153
8Monitoring Pulse Rate 155
Entering the Setup Pulse Menu 155
System Pulse Source 155
Switching Pulse On and Off 156
Using Pulse Alarms 156
9Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp) 159
Lead Placement for Monitoring Resp 159
Understanding the Resp Display 160
Changing Resp Detection Modes 160
Changing the Size of the Respiration Wave 161
Changing the Speed of the Respiration Wave 162
Using Resp Alarms 162
Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay 162
Resp Safety Information 162
10 Monitoring SpO2 165
SpO2 Sensors 165
Applying the Sensor 165
Connecting SpO2 Cables 166
Measuring SpO2 166
Understanding the SpO2 Numerics 168
Assessing a Suspicious SpO2 Reading 169
Changing the Averaging Time 169
Setting the Measurement Mode 169
Understanding SpO2 Alarms 170
Pleth Wave 175
Perfusion Numeric 175
6
Perfusion Change Indicator 175
Setting SpO2/Pleth as Pulse Source 175
Setting Up Tone Modulation 176
Setting the QRS Volume 176
11 Monitoring NBP 177
Introducing the Oscillometric NBP Measurement 177
Preparing to Measure NBP 179
Starting and Stopping Measurements 180
Enabling Automatic Mode and Setting Repetition Time 182
Enabling Sequence Mode and Setting Up The Sequence 182
Choosing the NBP Alarm Source 182
Switching Pulse from NBP On/Off 183
Assisting Venous Puncture 183
Calibrating NBP 183
12 Monitoring Temperature 185
Making a Temp Measurement 185
Calculating Temp Difference 186
13 Monitoring Invasive Pressure 187
Setting up the Pressure Measurement 187
Zeroing the Pressure Transducer 189
Adjusting the Calibration Factor 190
Displaying a Mean Pressure Value Only 191
Changing the Pressure Wave Scale 191
Optimizing the Waveform 191
Non-Physiological Artifact Suppression 191
Choosing the Pressure Alarm Source 191
Calibrating Reusable Transducer CPJ840J6 192
Calculating Cerebral Perfusion Pressure 194
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide 195
Measurement Principles 196
Measuring CO2 using the CO2 Option or M3014A 196
Measuring Mainstream CO2 using M3016A 200
Measuring Microstream CO2 using M3015A/B 203
Setting up all CO2 Measurements 204
Understanding the IPI Numeric 206
15 Using a Telemetry Device and a Monitor (PIIC only) 209
How Can You Combine Devices? 209
Unpairing the Monitor and Telemetry Device 211
Temporarily Stopping the Short Range Radio Connection 212
7
16 Enhancing Telemetry Monitoring with the Monitor 213
Monitor and Telemetry Transceiver Requirements 213
17 Trends 215
Viewing Trends 215
Setting Up Trends 218
Documenting Trends 221
Trends Databases 221
Screen Trends 222
18 Recording 227
Starting and Stopping Recordings 227
Overview of Recording Types 228
Creating and Changing Recordings Templates 228
Recorder Status Messages 229
19 Printing Patient Reports 231
Starting Report Printouts 231
Stopping Reports Printouts 232
Setting Up Reports 232
Setting Up Individual Print Jobs 234
Checking Printer Settings 234
Printing a Test Report 234
Switching Printers On or Off for Reports 235
Dashed Lines on Reports 235
Unavailable Printer: Re-routing Reports 235
Checking Report Status and Printing Manually 236
Printer Status Messages 237
Sample Report Printouts 238
20 Care and Cleaning 241
General Points 241
Cleaning the Monitor 242
Disinfecting the Monitor 242
Sterilizing the Monitor 243
Cleaning, Sterilizing and Disinfecting Monitoring Accessories 243
Cleaning Batteries and the Battery Compartment 243
21 Using Batteries 245
Battery Power Indicators 246
Checking Battery Charge 248
When Battery Lifetime is Expired 248
Replacing a Battery 249
Optimizing Battery Performance 250
Battery Safety Information 252
8
22 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 253
Inspecting the Equipment and Accessories 253
Inspecting the Cables and Cords 254
Maintenance Task and Test Schedule 254
Troubleshooting 254
Disposing of the Monitor 255
Disposing of Empty Calibration Gas Cylinders 255
23 Accessories 257
ECG/Resp Accessories 257
Invasive Pressure Accessories 261
5-Electrode One Piece Cables 261
Set Combiners and Organizers 261
NBP Accessories 262
SpO2 Accessories 264
Temperature Accessories 268
Mainstream CO2 Accessories 269
Sidestream CO2 Accessories 269
Mainstream CO2 Accessories (for M3016A) 270
Microstream CO2 Accessories 270
Battery Accessories 271
24 Specifications 273
Indications for Use 273
Use Environment 273
Restricted Availability 274
Manufacturer's Information 274
Symbols 275
Installation Safety Information 276
Monitor Mounting Precautions 277
Altitude Setting 277
Monitor Safety Specifications 277
EMC And Radio Regulatory Compliance 278
Out-Of-Hospital Transport - Standards Compliance 279
Physical Specifications 280
Environmental Specifications 281
Monitor Performance Specifications 282
Monitor Interface Specifications 284
865297 Battery Extension Specifications 285
M4607A Battery Specifications 286
M4605A Battery Specifications 286
Measurement Specifications 287
Safety and Performance Tests 299
25 Default Settings Appendix 305
Country-Specific Default Settings 305
9
Alarm and Measurement Default Settings 313
Alarm Default Settings 313
ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings 314
Pulse Default Settings 316
Respiration Default Settings 317
SpO2 Default Settings 317
NBP Default Settings 318
Temperature Default Settings 319
Invasive Pressure Default Settings 319
CO2 Default Settings 321
Index 323
10
1
11
1Installation
Installation should be carried out by qualified service personnel, either by the hospital's biomedical
department, or by Philips Support.
If you have purchased a "customer-installable bundle", it is assumed that your own hospital personnel
will install and, if necessary, configure the monitor. You can contact Philips Support for assistance if
required; any assistance will be associated with additional costs.
For mechanical and electrical installation, you need technically qualified personnel with a knowledge of
english. Additionally, for monitor configuration, you need clinically qualified personnel with a
knowledge of the use environment. For further information on Installation, refer to the Service Guide.
WARNING
• Monitor configuration settings must be specified by authorized hospital personnel.
• For installation of the device as part of a system, always refer to the Service Guide.
• As the first step in preparing the monitor for use, follow the installation instructions given in this
chapter.
Installation Checklist
Use this checklist to document your installation.
Step Task Check Box
when Task
Done
1 Perform initial inspection of delivery, unpack and check the shipment (see
“Unpacking and Checking the Shipment” on page 12).
2 Mount the monitor as appropriate for your installation (see “Mounting
the Monitor” on page 13).
3 Insert the battery into the battery compartment (the battery must always
be in the battery compartment during use). Connect the monitor to AC
mains via the external power supply using the supplied power cord (see
“Connecting the Monitor to AC Mains” on page 13).
4 Perform Visual, Power On and Functional test blocks (see “Checking
Out the Monitor” on page 15).
1 Installation
12
Unpacking and Checking the Shipment
The monitor and any supporting options ordered are supplied packed in protective shipping cartons.
Initial Inspection
Before unpacking, check the packaging and ensure that there are no signs of mishandling or damage.
Open the package carefully and remove the monitor and accessories.
Check that the contents are complete and that the correct options and accessories have been delivered.
Claims for Damage
If the shipping cartons are damaged, contact the carrier.
If any of the equipment is damaged, contact both the carrier and your local Philips service organization
for repair or replacement arrangements.
5 Perform Safety Tests, if required by local laws and regulations (see
“Checking Out the Monitor” on page 15).
6 Check/set the time and date (see “Setting the Date and Time” on
page 17).
7 Check that the country-specific default settings are appropriate (see
“Checking Country-Specific Default Settings” on page 17)
8 Perform System Test as necessary (see the Service Guide)
Step Task Check Box
when Task
Done
System Components, Accessories and Supplies Comments
Monitor with options as ordered 1
ECG accessories optional
NBP accessories optional
SpO2 accessories optional
Pressure accessories optional
Temperature accessories optional
CO2 Accessories optional
External Power Supply including AC power cord and MSL cable 1
Rechargeable battery 1
Instructions for Use 1
Quick Guide 1
Documentation DVD (includes Service Guide and Instructions for Use) 1
1 Installation
13
Repacking
Retain the original packing carton and material, in case you need to return equipment to Philips for
service. If you no longer have the original packing materials, Philips can advise you on alternatives.
Mounting the Monitor
The monitor can be rested on a flat, level surface, hung on the bed rail, or mounted on a wall or on a
rollstand. See the Service Guide for details.
Mounting the External Power Supply (M8023A)
The external power supply (M8023A) can be rested on its rubber feet on a flat, level surface, or
mounted as described in the Service Guide.
The following pictures show examples of correct and incorrect ways to mount the power
supply.
Connecting the Monitor to AC Mains
The monitor is an electrical Class II device in which the protection against electric shock does not rely
on basic insulation and a protective earth conductor but on double and/or reinforced insulation.
The monitor has a wide-range external power supply (M8023A) that allows you to operate the monitor
from an AC (alternating current) power source of 100 V to 240 V (± 10%) and 50/60 Hz (± 5%). The
external power supply also charges the monitor's battery.
1 Installation
14
1MSL Cable connects to power supply (M8023A)
1AC power cord. Connect to AC mains socket.
2Connect LAN cable here. For connection to a PC or Information Center.
3Measurement Link (MSL) cable. Supplies AC input power to the monitor for AC operation and for
battery charging. When there is a LAN connection to a PC or Information Center, the MSL cable
also carries this data to and from the monitor.
4Power-on LED. The green light is on when the external power supply is connected to AC mains.
WARNING
• Always use the supplied power cord with the earthed mains plug to connect the external power
supply (M8023A) to an earthed AC mains socket. Never adapt the mains plug from the power
supply to fit an unearthed AC mains socket.
• Do not use AC mains extension cords or multiple portable socket-outlets. If a multiple portable
socket-outlet without an approved isolation transformer is used, the interruption of its protective
1 Installation
15
earthing may result in enclosure leakage currents equal to the sum of the individual earth leakage
currents, so exceeding allowable limits.
• Do not connect any devices that are not supported as part of a system.
• Any non-medical device placed and operated in the patient's vicinity must be powered via an
approved isolation transformer that ensures mechanical fixing of the power cords and covering of
any unused power outlets.
Checking Out the Monitor
The following table defines which tests and inspections need to be performed, and when they are
required.
For test and inspection information regarding repairs, upgrades and all other service events, refer to
the Service Guide.
Test Test or Inspection to be Performed
Visual Inspect the monitor, measurement accessories and cables for any damage.
Are they free of damage?
Power On Power on the monitor. Does it start up successfully without errors? Do all
alarm lamps light up during power up?
After start up, the monitor sounds a tone, and you can see the monitoring
main screen (normally with measurement wave channels and numeric
positions).
Functionality Test After power up, touch the battery status indicator in the bottom right of
the screen. The Battery Status window should open. Press the blue Main
Screen key to close the window and return to the main screen.
Safety Tests (1) to (4) Perform safety tests (1) to (4), as described in the Service Guide, for
standalone devices if required by local laws and regulations, and each time
you combine equipment to form a system, or exchange system
components. Details of the safety tests and procedures are described in
the Service Guide. These safety tests are derived from international
standards but may not always be sufficient to meet local requirements.
System Perform the system test according to IEC 60601-1-1, if applicable, after
combining equipment to form a system (see the Service Guide).
1 Installation
16
Operating the Monitor
To complete installation you will need to operate the monitor to check basic functionality. Here is a
quick introduction to the monitor.
• Switch on the monitor. After start-up the
monitor display will become active. You
operate the monitor using the touch screen.
• Touch something on the screen (numerics,
waves, other screen items) to enter the
corresponding menu. Touching the NBP
numeric, for example, brings you to the
Setup NBP menu.
• Touch again to select an item on the menu and
work through the menu activities.
• To access SmartKeys, press the SmartKeys
key. Main Setup is one of the SmartKeys.
• If you cannot find a menu by touching the
screen you can always use the Main Setup
SmartKey which will get you to all menus on
the monitor.
• Press the Main Screen key to close all open
menus/windows and return to the main
screen. Press again to enter the Change
Screen menu, where you can choose from a
number of pre-configured screens.
1 Installation
17
Setting the Date and Time
To set the date and time:
1Press the SmartKeys key to enter the SmartKeys window.
2Select the Main Setup SmartKey to enter the Main Setup menu.
3Select Date, Time to enter the Date, Time menu.
4Select, in turn, the Year, Month, Day, Hour (in 24 hour format, only) and Minute as necessary.
Select the correct values from the pop-up list.
5Select Store Date, Time to change the date and time.
If your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the date and time are automatically taken from
this. Once it is set, the internal clock retains the setting even when you switch off the monitor.
Checking Country-Specific Default Settings
Some settings are made in the factory to match the typical requirements in a specific country. Line
frequency, units for weight and height, and ECG cable colors (AAMI or IEC) have been set to
appropriate values. If you suspect that these settings may not match your institution’s requirements,
check the settings and change them if necessary as described in the Configuration Guide.
WARNING
Before starting monitoring, check that the current configuration meets your requirements, especially
patient category, alarm limits and paced setting.
If you need to enter configuration mode:
1In the Main Setup menu, select Operating Modes.
2Select Config and enter the passcode.
The passcode for configuration mode is given in the Service Guide.
The monitor displays Config at the right hand side of the status line and in the center of the Screen
while you are in configuration mode.
Before you leave configuration mode, always be sure to store any changes you made. You must store
changes made to each Settings Block and to each Profile, individually. As it may be difficult to
remember whether the settings you changed belong to a Monitor Settings block or a Measurement
Settings block, we recommend that you store each block before you leave configuration mode.
To leave configuration mode:
•In the Main Setup menu, select Operating Modes and then select Monitoring.
1 Installation
18
Handing Over the Monitor
If you are handing over the monitor to the end-users directly after configuration, make sure that it is in
Monitoring mode.
WARNING
Users must be adequately trained to use the monitor before monitoring a patient. To achieve this, they
should have access to, and read, the following documentation delivered with the monitor:
• Instructions for Use (this book) - for full operating instructions
• Quick Guide - for quick reminders during use
Additionally, we recommend working through the Training Guide for self-training on the monitor
before use (not available in all languages). Both documents and the training guide are included on the
documentation DVD delivered with the monitor.
2
19
2Basic Operation
These Instructions for Use are for clinical professionals using the IntelliVue MP2 (M8102A) patient
monitor.
This basic operation section gives you an overview of the monitor and its functions. It tells you how to
perform tasks that are common to all measurements (such as entering data, switching a measurement
on and off, setting up and adjusting wave speeds, working with profiles). The alarms section gives an
overview of alarms. The remaining sections tell you how to perform individual measurements, and
how to care for and maintain the equipment.
Familiarize yourself with all instructions including warnings and cautions before starting to monitor
patients. Read and keep the Instructions for Use that come with any accessories, as these contain
important information about care and cleaning that is not repeated here.
This guide describes all features and options. Your monitor may not have all of them; they are not all
available in all geographies. Your monitor is highly configurable. What you see on the screen, how the
menus appear and so forth, depends on the way it has been tailored for your hospital and may not be
exactly as shown here.
In this guide:
•A warning alerts you to a potential serious outcome, adverse event or safety hazard. Failure to
observe a warning may result in death or serious injury to the user or patient.
•A caution alerts you to where special care is necessary for the safe and effective use of the
product. Failure to observe a caution may result in minor or moderate personal injury or damage
to the product or other property, and possibly in a remote risk of more serious injury.
•Monitor refers to the entire patient monitor. Display refers to the physical display unit. Screen
refers to everything you see on the monitor's display, such as measurements, alarms, patient data
and so forth.
Rx only: U.S. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
Introducing the IntelliVue MP2
The Philips IntelliVue MP2 monitor provides a comprehensive set of basic physiological
measurements: ECG (including ST analysis and optional 10-lead ECG), NBP, SpO2, and optionally
invasive blood pressure, temperature and CO2. Through networking it provides information
integration, documentation and information access. The MP2 can be used with adult, pediatric and
neonatal patients in a hospital environment and during patient transport both inside and outside
hospitals.
2 Basic Operation
20
The monitor stores data in trend databases. You can see tabular trends (vital signs) and document
them on a central printer. You can view measurement trend graphs, including horizon trends, to help
you identify changes in the patient's physiological condition.
The monitor can be powered by a rechargeable battery, or from AC mains using the external power
supply (M8023A). For battery charging, care and status information, refer to the chapter “Using
Batteries” on page 245.
Controls, Indicators and Connectors
MP2 Overview
1On/Standby Switch
2Power and battery indicators (see “” on
page 20)
33.5-inch TFT LCD touchscreen QVGA
display
4Alarm lamps (see “” on page 20)
5Built-in carrying handle
6Battery eject button
7Keys (see “” on page 20)
8Measurement connectors (see “MP2
Patient Connectors, Right Side” on
page 22)
9Battery
2 Basic Operation
21
MP2 Controls and Indicators
1On/Standby switch
2On/Standby LED. Green when monitor is on. Red indicates an error.
3Battery status LED. Yellow when charging. Flashing red when battery is empty, or a battery
malfunction is detected.
4External power LED. Green when monitor is powered from an external power source.
5Alarms off indicator. When alarms are suspended, the lamp is red, and the ALARMS OFF message
appears on the screen.
6Active INOP alarm lamp in light blue. Stays lit until active INOP is acknowledged.
7Active alarm lamp. Red or yellow, depending on alarm level. Stays lit until active alarm is
acknowledged.
8Silence key
9Alarms key: turns alarms On/Off, or pauses them
10 SmartKeys key: brings up SmartKeys on the screen
11 Main Screen key: closes all open menus/windows and returns to the main screen, or selects
current screen.
2 Basic Operation
22
MP2 Patient Connectors, Right Side
MP2 Left Side
Extending Measurements
Your monitor is compatible with Philips measurement extensions for use with other IntelliVue patient
monitoring devices. These allow you to add specific measurements to those already integrated into
your monitor. These measurement extensions are referred to as MMS extensions. During patient
transport, the monitor with the connected MMS extension can be powered by the Battery Extension
(see “Using the Battery Extension” on page 26).
1Pressure (option)
2Temperature (option)
3Noninvasive blood pressure
4SpO2
5ECG sync pulse output (See “Monitor Performance
Specifications” on page 282 for specifications)
6ECG/Respiration
7CO2 (option)
1Loudspeaker
2MSL Connector. Connects to the external power supply via
the MSL cable for AC mains operation, battery charging,
and communication with a network.
2 Basic Operation
23
MMS Extension M3014A attached to the MP2
The MMS extensions connect to the monitor and use the monitor's settings. Trend data and
measurement settings from the measurements in the extensions are stored in the monitor.
WARNING
• Measurements from an MMS extension are only available when the extension is connected to the
monitor, and the monitor is running on external power. This is the case when the monitor is
running on AC mains via the external power supply (M8023A) or is attached to the Battery
Extension (865297). Measurements from an MMS extension connected to the monitor are not
available when the monitor is running on its own battery power.
• Any measurements on an MMS extension that conflict with those in the monitor cannot be used.
For example, only one CO2 measurement is supported.
To separate an extension from the monitor, press the release lever and push the extension forward.
2 Basic Operation
24
M3014A, M3015A, M3015B and M3016A Capnography MMS
Extensions
The optional M3014A Capnography extension adds mainstream capnography or sidestream
capnography, and optionally one pressure plus either a pressure or a temperature, Cardiac Output and
Continuous Cardiac Output to the MMS.
The optional M3015A Microstream CO2 extension adds microstream capnography and optionally
either pressure or temperature to the MMS. The optional M3015B Microstream CO2 extension adds
microstream capnography, two pressures and a temperature to the MMS.
M3014A
1Pressure connectors (red)
2Temperature connector (brown)
3Mainstream/sidestream connector CO2
4Cardiac Output connector
M3015A M3015B
1Pressure connectors (red) - M3015A optional
2Temperature connector (brown) - M3015A optional
3Gas sample outlet
4Microstream connector CO2 and Inlet
2 Basic Operation
25
The optional M3016A Mainstream CO2 extension adds mainstream capnography and optionally either
pressure or temperature to the MMS.
M3012A Hemodynamic MMS Extension
When attached to the MP2 connected to the external power supply, the optional M3012A
Hemodynamic extension adds temperature, pressure, and an additional pressure or a temperature to
the monitor.
Cardiac Output and Continuous Cardiac Output are not available when used with the MP2.
M3016A
1Pressure connectors (red)
2Temperature connector (brown)
3Mainstream/sidestream connector CO2
(optional)
1Cardiac Output (orange; optional)
2Connection to MMS
3Pressure connectors (red)
4Temperature connectors (brown)
2 Basic Operation
26
Using the Battery Extension
To provide enough power for the use of an MMS Extension during transport, you can use the Battery
Extension (865297). The Battery Extension provides additional battery power for situations when no
mains power is available and can typically power the monitor with MMS Extension for at least 6 hours.
Connecting the Battery Extension
LED Indicators
The Battery Extension has two LED indicators. The power LED lights green when the Battery
Extension is connected to external power.
The battery charge led gives battery status information:
To connect to the Battery Extension, place the
monitor with MMS Extension onto the Battery
Extension, and then slide it across so that the
connection is made and it is firmly seated.
To remove the monitor with MMS Extension,
press the release lever and push the monitor
across to release the connection.
LED indication Status
External power available
green Battery fully charged.
yellow Battery charging.
2 Basic Operation
27
IntelliVue Cableless Measurements
The IntelliVue Cableless Measurements (IntelliVue CL SpO2 Pod and IntelliVue CL NBP Pod) are
patient-worn measurement devices which provide measurement values on their built-in screen and
communicate them to the monitor using a wireless short range radio (SRR) interface.
Measurement Device Main Parts and Keys
All IntelliVue Cableless Measurement devices have a display and 3 keys:
red flashing (short on phase) Battery maintenance required.
red flashing (long on phase) Battery Extension malfunction.
off No battery inserted in the Battery Extension.
External power not available
yellow flashing (short on phase) Battery Extension is charging the monitor battery (monitor
is switched off).
red flashing (short on-phase) If the monitor is running, this indicates very low battery
charge (<10 minutes running time left). If the monitor is
not running, this indicates that battery maintenance is
required.
red flashing (long on-phase) Battery Extension cannot provide power to the monitor.
Either the Battery Extension needs charging, or it has a
malfunction.
1Integrated monochrome LCD display
2Hardkeys
3Measurement identifier
2 Basic Operation
28
Operating and Navigating
The principle method of operating your monitor is via the touchscreen. Almost every element on the
screen is interactive. Screen elements include measurement numerics, information fields, alarms fields,
waveforms and menus. The typical operator's position is in front of the monitor.
There are also four keys to the right of the screen (see also “” on page 20).
A typical main screen looks like this:
These let you: Key with symbol
(international)
Text replaces
symbol (English
versions only)
• Silence alarms: the Silence key acknowledges all active
alarms by switching off audible alarm indicators and
lamps.
• Switch alarms on or off, or pause alarms.
• Call up SmartKeys on the screen (see below).
• Close all open menus/windows and return to the main
screen.
• If you are already in the main screen (no additional
menus/windows are open), then pressing this key opens
the Change Screen menu, where you can choose from a
number of pre-configured screens.
• To temporarily disable the touchscreen operation, press
and hold this key for 2 seconds. Press the key again to re-
enable the touchscreen operation.
2 Basic Operation
29
MP2 Screen Elements
Item Description Comments
1 Alarm volume off indicator
is displayed when the alarm volume
is set to zero (0).
2 Patient name / alarm message field Patient name can be covered by alarm
messages or alarms On/Off/Paused
message.
If red and yellow alarms are active at the
same time, they rotate in the alarm field.
3 Patient category and bed label / INOP
message field
Patient category and bed label can be
covered by INOP messages. If there are
multiple red/yellow/cyan INOPs active at
the same time, they rotate in the INOP field.
4 Network connection indicator Documented in Information Center
Instructions for Use.
5 Measurement label Touch the measurement to enter the
measurement setup menu.
6 Paced status Displayed below the HR label.
7 Measurement numeric/values Touch the numeric to enter the measurement
setup menu.
8 Measurement wave Touch the wave to enter the measurement
setup menu.
9 Status line Shows information and messages prompting
you for action.
10 Measurement Selection key Opens the Measurement Selection window
which shows all measurements and where
they are physically located. From here you
can also enter the measurement setups.
11 Battery status indicator Gives information about remaining battery
charge, estimated operating time,
maintenance requirements and malfunctions.
See the chapter “Using Batteries” on
page 245.
2 Basic Operation
30
Using the Touchscreen
Touch a screen element to get to the actions linked to that element. For example, touch a
measurement numeric and the setup menu for that measurement opens. Touch a wave to enter the
setup menu for that wave.
Measurement Setup Menus
Each measurement has a setup menu where you can change settings. Typically, the setup menu
window covers the whole screen, except the INOP and alarm message fields, which are always
displayed at the top. The following picture is an example, and may not show exactly what you see on
the screen. All measurement setup windows are similar and share the same basic layout.
Touch the measurement numeric on the screen to enter the setup menu.
Key to measurement setup menu:
Item Description Comment
1 INOP and alarm
message field.
These are always displayed at the top of the screen.
2 Wave/numerics
window.
The main measurement numeric and wave (if applicable) are
shown in this window so that you do not lose sight of the current
measurement while making changes in the menu.
3 Status/prompt
message.
Status/prompt messages related to the measurement menu are
displayed below the wave/numerics. General status/prompt
messages on the main screen are covered by the measurement
setup menu.
4 Next page arrows. The menu may have more than one page, as shown here. Move to
another page by touching these arrows.
5 Measurement menu
keys.
Each button has two lines of text. To perform an operation on a
measurement, press one of the keys. Some keys lead directly to a
task. For example, pressing the Start/ Stop key for noninvasive
blood pressure starts a measurement. Other keys open a pop-up
window, which can have more than one page, from which you
make a selection. Again, using noninvasive blood pressure as an
example, pressing the Repeat Time key for setting the repetition
time opens a pop-up window from which you pick a time,
scrolling if necessary.
2 Basic Operation
31
Main Setup Menu
There is usually more than one way to enter a setup menu for a measurement, to change a setting or to
execute a task. Some routes are more direct than others. You can use whichever method you find most
convenient. Which routes are available to you, however, can vary depending on your monitor’s
configuration.
For this reason, this book generally describes entry to a measurement’s setup menu via the Main Setup
menu, as this route is always available and is not subject to configuration dependencies. You can get to
all setup windows from the Main Setup menu. You enter the Main Setup menu by pressing the
SmartKeys key, then selecting the Main Setup SmartKey.
SmartKeys
A SmartKey is a configurable graphical key on the screen allowing fast access to frequently used
functions. Press the SmartKeys hard key to call up a set of SmartKeys on the screen. Although the
selection of SmartKeys available on your monitor depends on the monitor configuration and on the
options purchased, the SmartKeys window generally looks like this:
1Scroll to see more
SmartKeys
enter Main Setup menu - you can get
to all setup windows using this key
enter standby mode - suspends patient
monitoring. All waves and numerics
disappear from the display. All settings
and patient data information are
retained.
enter profile menu, or
revert to default profile
change Screen, or
revert to default screen
previous Screen quick admit a patient
enter patient identification menu to
admit/discharge/transfer
end case to discharge a patient
2 Basic Operation
32
Pop-Up Keys
Pop-up keys are task-related graphical keys that appear automatically on the monitor screen when
required. For example, the Confirm pop-up key appears only when you need to confirm a change.
lock touchscreen operation set alarm limits
change alarm volume change screen brightness (not for
independent displays)
change QRS volume change amplitude (size) of ECG wave
review beat labels (annotate
arrhythmia wave)
re-learn arrhythmia
- start/stop manual NBP
measurement
- start auto series
- stop current automatic
measurement within series
start NBP STAT measurement
stop automatic or STAT NBP
measurement and measurement
series
start NBP measurement and
measurement series
start veni puncture (inflate cuff to
subdiastolic pressure)
stop current NBP measurement
set the NBP repeat time access patient reports
switch CO2 pump off zero invasive pressure transducer
new lead setup set standard or EASI lead placement
review vital signs trend review graph trend
unpair equipment and continue
central monitoring with the monitor
unpair equipment and continue central
monitoring with the telemetry device
start 12-Lead Capture (only available
if Information Center is connected)
access ST Map application
select measurement device start an SpO2 measurement
access NBP mode selection and
setup, with direct start/stop
function
open the Equipment window
2 Basic Operation
33
Using the On-Screen Keyboard
Use this as you would a conventional keyboard. Enter the information by selecting one character after
another. Use the Shift and capital Lock keys to access uppercase letters. Use the Back key to delete
single characters, or use the Clr key to delete entire entries. Select Enter to confirm what you have
entered and close the on-screen keyboard.
Operating Modes
When you switch the monitor on, it starts up in monitoring mode. To change to a different mode:
1Select the Main Setup menu.
2Select Operating Modes and choose the mode you require.
Your monitor has four operating modes. Some are passcode protected.
•Monitoring Mode: This is the normal, every day working mode that you use for monitoring
patients. You can change elements such as alarm limits, patient category and so forth. When you
discharge the patient, these elements return to their default values. Changes can be stored
permanently only in Configuration Mode. You may see items, such as some menu options or the
altitude setting, that are visible but ‘grayed out’ so that you can neither select nor change them.
These are for your information and can be changed only in Configuration Mode.
•Demonstration Mode: Passcode protected, this is for demonstration purposes only. You must
not change into Demonstration Mode during monitoring. In Demonstration Mode, all stored
trend information is deleted from the monitor’s memory.
•Configuration Mode: Passcode protected, this mode is for personnel trained in configuration
tasks. These tasks are described in the Configuration Guide. During installation the monitor is
configured for use in your environment. This configuration defines the default settings you work
with when you switch on, the number of waves you see and so forth.
• Service Mode: Passcode protected, this is for trained service personnel.
When the monitor is in Demonstration Mode, Configuration Mode, or Service Mode, this is indicated
by a box with the mode name in the center of the Screen and a symbol in the bottom right-hand
corner. Select the mode box in the center of the screen to change to a different mode.
Standby Mode
Standby mode can be used when you want to temporarily interrupt monitoring.
To enter Standby mode,
1Press the SmartKeys key .
2Either select the Monitor Standby SmartKey
Or select the Main Setup SmartKey, then select Monitor Standby.
The Standby screen is a neutral screen with information about the monitor and instructions on how to
leave Standby mode.
The monitor enters Standby mode automatically after the End Case function is used to discharge a
patient. Standby suspends patient monitoring. All waves and numerics disappear from the display but
all settings and patient data information are retained. The Standby screen is displayed.
If a temporary patient location has been entered at the monitor or at the Information Center, this
location will also be displayed on the Standby screen.
2 Basic Operation
34
To resume monitoring,
• Select anything on the screen or press any key.
When monitoring is resumed, alarms are paused for 1 minute to allow time to finish plugging in the
measurement cables.
Understanding Screens
Your monitor comes with a set of pre-configured Screens, optimized for common monitoring
scenarios such as OR adult, or ICU neonatal. A Screen defines the overall selection, size and position
of waves, numerics and other elements on the monitor screen when you switch on. You can easily
switch between different Screens during monitoring. Screens do NOT affect alarm settings, patient
category and so forth.
Switching to a Different Screen
To switch to a different Screen:
1After closing any open menus or windows, press the Main Screen key to access the Change
Screen menu.
2Choose the new Screen from the Change Screen menu.
Changing a Screen’s Content
If you do not want to change the entire Screen content, but only some parts of it, you can substitute
individual waves, numerics, or trends. Be aware that these changes cannot be stored permanently in
Monitoring Mode.
To change the selection of elements on a Screen,
1Select the element you want to change. For example, touch the wave to enter the wave setup menu,
or touch the numeric to enter the numeric setup menu.
2From the menu that appears, select Change Wave or Change Numeric, and then select the wave
or numeric you want.
In the Change Screen menu, the changed Screen is shown linked to the original Screen and marked
with an asterisk.
Up to three modified Screens can be accessed via the Change Screen menu.
To recall Screens, select the name of the Screen in the Change Screen menu.
After a patient discharge, the monitor’s default Screen is shown. Modified Screens are still available in
the Change Screen menu.
If the monitor is switched off and then on again, modified Screens are erased from the monitor’s
memory and cannot be recalled. If a modified Screen was the last active Screen when the monitor was
switched off, it is retained unless the monitor is configured to revert to the default.
Using the XDS Remote Display
Using the IntelliVue XDS solution it is possible to view an independent monitor screen on an external
display. The XDS solution consists of a medical grade PC-based hardware platform, XDS application
software and the XDS connectivity option on the monitor. Depending on the configuration you can
2 Basic Operation
35
also operate the monitor from the external display. The XDS must be connected to the same Local
Area Network (LAN) as the monitor.
It is also possible to use an existing PC, connected to the same LAN, to host the XDS Application
software.
For more details, including limitations and restrictions, refer to the IntelliVue XDS Application
Instructions for Use.
Using the Visitor Screen
If a visitor Screen is configured for your monitor, you can use it to clear the screen of all waves and
numerics but continue to monitor the patient with active alarms and trend storage at the bedside and
Information Center. You can change the name of the visitor Screen in Configuration Mode.
To activate this Screen,
1Press the Main Screen key to open the Change Screen menu.
2Select the name of the visitor Screen configured for your monitor from the list of available
Screens.
To select a Screen with waves and numerics again,
• Touch the gray box in the center of the screen showing the visitor Screen's name, or press the
Main Screen key, to open the Change Screen menu and then select a Screen from the list.
Understanding Profiles
Profiles are predefined monitor configurations. They let you change the configuration of the whole
monitor so you can adapt it to different monitoring situations. The changes that occur when you
change a complete profile are more far reaching than those made when you change a Screen. Screens
affect only what is shown on the display. Profiles affect all monitor and measurement settings.
The settings that are defined by Profiles are grouped into three categories. Each category offers a
choice of 'settings blocks' customized for specific monitoring situations. These categories are:
•Display (screens)
Each profile can have a choice of many different predefined screens.
When you change the profile, the screen selection configured for the new profile becomes active.
•Measurement Settings
Each profile can have a choice of different predefined measurement settings. These relate directly
to individual measurements, for example, measurement on/off, measurement color, alarms limits,
NBP alarm source, NBP repeat time, temperature unit (°F or °C), pressure unit (mmHg or kPa).
•Monitor Settings
Each profile can have a choice of different predefined monitor settings. These relate to the
monitor as a whole; for example, display brightness, alarms off/paused, alarm volume, QRS tone
volume, tone modulation, prompt tone volume, wave speed, resp wave speed, pulse source.
You can change from one complete profile to another or swap individual settings blocks (display/
monitor settings/measurement settings) to change a subset of a profile. Changes you make to any
element within the settings blocks are not saved when you discharge the patient, unless you save them
in Configuration Mode.
Depending on your monitor configuration, when you switch on or discharge a patient the monitor
either continues with the previous profile, or resets to the default profile configured for that monitor.
2 Basic Operation
36
WARNING
If you switch to a different profile, the patient category and paced status normally change to the setting
specified in the new profile. However some profiles may be set up to leave the patient category and
paced status unchanged. Always check the patient category, paced status, and all alarms and settings,
when you change profiles.
When you leave Demonstration Mode, the monitor uses the default profile.
Swapping a Complete Profile
1Press the SmartKeys hard key and
–Either select Main Setup and then Profiles in the Main Setup menu.
–Or select the Profiles SmartKey
.
2In the Profiles menu, select Profile.
3Chose a profile from the pop-up list.
4Confirm your selection.
Swapping a Settings Block
1Select the Main Setup SmartKey and then Profiles in the Main Setup menu.
2Select the Profile Details key.
3In the Profile Details menu, select Display or Measmnt.Settings or Monitor Settings to call up a
list of the settings blocks in each category.
4Choose a settings block from the pop-up list.
5Confirm your selection.
Default Profile
Your monitor has a default profile that it uses when you leave Demonstration mode, or when you
discharge a patient. This profile is indicated by a diamond shaped symbol.
Understanding Settings
Each aspect of how the monitor works and looks is defined by a setting. There are a number of
different categories of settings, including,
Screen Settings, to define the selection and appearance of elements on each individual Screen
Measurement settings, to define settings unique to each measurement, for example, high and low
alarm limits
2 Basic Operation
37
Monitor settings, including settings that affect more than one measurement or Screen and define
general aspects of how the monitor works, for example, alarm volume, reports and recordings, and
display brightness.
You must be aware that, although many settings can be changed in Monitoring Mode, permanent
changes to settings can only be done in the monitor's Configuration Mode. All settings are reset to the
stored defaults:
• when you discharge a patient
• when you load a Profile
• when the monitor is switched off for more than one minute (if Automat. Default is set to Yes).
Changing Measurement Settings
Each measurement has a setup menu in which you can adjust all of its settings. You can enter a setup
menu:
• via the measurement numeric - select the measurement numeric to enter its setup menu. For
example, to enter the Setup ECG menu, select the HR (heart rate) numeric.
•via the Main Setup SmartKey - if you want to setup a measurement when the measurement is
switched off, use the Main Setup SmartKey and select Measurements. Then select the
measurement name from the pop-up list. With this permanent key you can access any setup menu
in the monitor.
• via the Measurement Selection key.
Switching a Measurement On and Off
When a measurement is off, its waves and numerics are removed from the monitor’s screen. The
monitor stops data acquisition and alarming for this measurement.
1Enter the measurement’s setup menu and select the measurement.
2Select the measurement name to toggle between on and off. The screen display indicates the active
setting.
If you disconnect a transducer, the monitor replaces the measurement numeric with question marks. If
you silence the resulting INOP, the measurement is switched off. Also if you pause or switch off
alarms, the measurement may be switched off completely, depending on monitor configuration.
Adjusting a Measurement Wave
To quickly adjust wave-related measurement settings (such as speed or size), select the measurement
wave itself. This displays the measurement wave menu, which has only wave-related measurement
settings.
Changing Wave Speeds
Lowering the wave speed compresses the wave and lets you view a longer time period. Increasing the
speed expands the waveform, giving you a more detailed view.
The monitor distinguishes two groups of wave speed settings,
•RespiratorySpeed, for CO2 waves.
2 Basic Operation
38
•Global Speed, for all waves not included in the other group.
Changing the Wave Group Speed
The wave speed group setting defines the speed of all the waves in the group.
To change the wave speed of a wave speed group,
1Select Main Setup and then select User Interface
2Select Global Speed or RespiratorySpeed, as required
3Select a value from the list of available speeds.
Changing Wave Speed for a Channel
To change the wave speed of an individual wave channel,
1Enter the wave menu for a measurement by selecting its wave.
2Select Change Speed.
3To set the speed to the wave group speed, select RespiratorySpeed or Global Speed.
To set an individual channel speed, select a numeric value from the list of available speeds. This
overrides the wave group speed setting and sets the speed for the individual wave channel on the
monitor Screen. The wave channel speed is independent of the wave (label) depicted in the
channel, if you change the wave, the new wave will retain the set channel speed.
Using Labels
You can measure up to three invasive pressures and temperatures simultaneously. The monitor uses
the labels to distinguish between them. The default settings defined in the profile (such as
measurement color, wave scale, and alarm settings) are stored within each label. When you assign a
label to a measurement, the monitor automatically applies these default settings to the measurement.
The labels assigned are used throughout the monitor, in reports, recordings, and in trends.
Changing Measurement Labels (e.g. Pressure)
To change a measurement label of a measurement with multiple labels (e.g. invasive pressure or
temperature),
1Enter the wave menu of the measurement.
2Select Label.
3Choose a label from the list.
The monitor automatically applies the scale, color, etc. settings stored in the Profile for the label you
select. You can change scale settings in Monitoring Mode, but color can only be changed in the
monitor's Configuration Mode.
Any labels already being used in the monitor are shown "grayed-out" in the list and cannot be selected.
Resolving Label Conflicts
Each label must be unique, that is, it can only be assigned once. If you have an MMS Extension
equipped with a pressure measurement connected to the monitor, there is a potential conflict with, for
example, the ABP label. If you manually enter measurement values these may also conflict with
existing labels on the monitor.
2 Basic Operation
39
Depending on your configuration, the monitor will either
•display the Measurement Selection window automatically for you to resolve the conflict
• take no action, you must enter the Measurement Selection window (using the measurement
selection key) and resolve the conflict
All the currently available measurements are depicted in the Measurement Selection window. Any
measurement labels causing a label conflict are shown in red. If a measurement is connected but
currently unavailable, for example, because it was deactivated due to a label conflict, that measurement
is shown "grayed-out". If an MMS Extension is not available, for example if monitor is running on
battery power and not an external power source, the MMS Extension is not displayed.
1Unavailable measurement shown grayed-out
An MMS Extension is only shown in the Measurement Selection window when the monitor is
connected to the external power supply (M8023A) and running on AC mains power, and not when
running on battery power.
To resolve a label conflict:
1Press the SmartKeys key and
–Either select Main Setup and then Meas. Selection
–Or select the Measmt. Select. SmartKey
to display the Measurement Selection window.
2Select the label to be corrected.
3Use the measurement selection keys to resolve the conflict. Select either:
–Change Label: to assign a different label to the conflicting label.
Measurement selection key
2 Basic Operation
40
–De- Activate: to disable the conflicting measurement. It retains its label for future use but
becomes invisible to the monitor, as though it had been unplugged.
–Setup <Measurement Label>: to enter the Setup menu for the measurement and change the
conflicting device’s label to a different label.
Label Compatibility
When a new measurement is introduced, or new labels for an existing measurement, these labels will
not be shown on older Information Centers, and consequently not on the Overview screen sourced
from the Information Center.
When a patient is transferred from a monitor with these new labels to one with an older software
revision, the labels will be replaced with a generic label for that measurement. The settings for that
generic label will then be used.
If it is critical that the measurement labels are available at the Information Center and after transfers,
the older monitors and the Information Center must be upgraded to the appropriate software revision.
Using IntelliVue Cableless Measurements
The IntelliVue CL SpO2 Pod or IntelliVue CL NBP Pod can be used together with a monitor with an
SRR interface for continuous monitoring. They communicate their measurement values via short
range radio to the monitor. The Cableless Measurements allow the patients more mobility without
giving up continuous vital signs monitoring.
Adding a Cableless Measurement Device
When using an IntelliVue CL SpO2 Pod or an IntelliVue CL NBP Pod for continuous monitoring, you
need to assign the cableless measurement device to the monitor.
1Select the Measurement Selection key
2Select the Add Cbleless pop-up key
This opens the Add Cableless window, which shows any available IntelliVue Cableless
Measurements and telemetry devices:
If the device you want to add is not visible, press one of the keys on the device to make the
connection and display the device in the window.
3Select the cableless measurement device to be added. The device confirms the successful addition
with a tone.
If the corresponding internal measurement in the patient monitor is active, you will be asked to
confirm that it should be deactivated in favor of the cableless measurement device.
Adding a device can also be done directly on the cableless measurement devices. See the IntelliVue
Cableless Measurements Instructions for Use for details.
2 Basic Operation
41
WARNING
Short Range Radio connections are subject to interruption due to interference from other radio
sources in the vicinity, including microwaves, bluetooth devices, WLAN devices (802.11b,g,n) and
cordless phones. Depending on the strength and duration of the interference, the interruption may
occur for an extended period. A loss of connection, due to moving out-of-range, interference, or for
other reasons, is indicated with a No Host Monitoring INOP on the NBP or SpO2 Pods, or a cl NBP
Disconnect or cl SpO₂ Disconnect INOP at the host monitor. Correct channel configuration is
important, refer to the Configuration Guide for details.
Removing a Cableless Measurement Device
To remove a cableless measurement device from a monitor and end the assignment:
1Select the Measurement Selection key.
2Select the cableless measurement device to be removed.
3Select the Remove pop-up key.
Changing Monitor Settings
To change monitor settings such as brightness, or QRS tone volume:
1Press the SmartKeys key .
2Either Select the appropriate SmartKey for the setting you want to change
Or Enter the Main Setup menu by selecting the Main Setup SmartKey; then select User Interface
to enter a submenu where you can change the settings.
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
1Select the Brightness SmartKey.
2Select the appropriate setting for the screen brightness. 10 is the brightest, 1 is the least bright.
Optimum is suitable for most monitoring locations and optimizes power usage for battery
powered monitors.
Your monitor may be configured with a lower brightness for Standby mode and also for transport to
conserve battery power. These settings can only be changed in the monitor’s Configuration Mode.
Setting the Date and Time
Enter the Main Setup menu by selecting the Main Setup SmartKey, then select Date, Time to enter
the Date, Time menu.
1Select, in turn, the Year, Month, Day, Hour (in 24 hour format, only) and Minute as necessary.
Select the correct values from the pop-up list.
2Select Store Date, Time to change the date and time.
2 Basic Operation
42
If your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the date and time are automatically taken from
this. Once it is set, the internal clock retains the setting even when you switch off the monitor.
Checking Your Monitor Revision
1Select Main Setup then select Revisions to open the Monitor Revision menu.
2Select the correct device from the device pop-up keys.
3From the Monitor Revision menu, select the monitor component for which you need revision
information.
Getting Started
Once you understand the basic operation principles and have completed the Training Program, you
can get ready for monitoring.
Inspecting the Monitor
WARNING
If the monitor is mechanically damaged, or if it is not working properly, do not use it for any
monitoring procedure on a patient. Contact your service personnel.
1Before you start to make measurements, carry out the following checks on the monitor.
– Check for any mechanical damage.
– Check all the external cables, plug-ins and accessories.
2Always ensure that the battery is loaded in the battery compartment when monitoring a patient,
even when the monitor is running on external power.
3If you are using battery power, ensure that the battery has sufficient power for monitoring. When
you use a battery for the first time, you must charge it, following the instructions given in the
section on charging batteries in the Using Batteries chapter.
4Check all the functions of that you need to monitor the patient, and ensure that the monitor is in
good working order.
NOTE
Measurements from an MMS extension are only available when the extension is connected to the
monitor, and the monitor is running on external power. This is the case when the monitor is running
on AC mains via the external power supply (M8023A) or is attached to the Battery Extension
(865297).
Switching On
Press the power on/standby switch on the monitor for one second. The monitor performs a self test
during which all lamps will light up and a tone will be sounded, and is then ready to use. If you see a
message such as CO₂ Sens Warmup wait until it disappears before starting to monitor that
measurement.
2 Basic Operation
43
Power On/Power Off Behavior
The general rules determining the behavior of the monitor when connected to, or disconnected from
power are as follows:
• A monitor that was switched on prior to a temporary power loss switches on again when power is
restored.
• A monitor that was switched off prior to a temporary power loss remains off when power is
restored.
• When AC mains power is lost, a battery powered monitor continues to run without interruption
on battery power.
Setting up the Measurements
1Decide which measurements you want to make.
2Connect the required patient cables and sensors. The connectors are color-coded to the patient
cables and sensors for easy identification.
WARNING
When connecting devices for acquiring measurements, always position cables and tubing carefully
to avoid entanglement or potential strangulation.
3If using IntelliVue Cableless Measurements,
–apply the SpO
2 sensors and/or NBP cuffs to the patient as described in the cableless
measurements Instructions for Use.
– assign the cableless measurements to the monitor:
- select the Measurement Selection key
- select the Add Cbleless pop-up key
- select the cableless measurement device to be assigned
If the internal measurement in the patient monitor is active, you will need to confirm that it should
be deactivated in favor of the assigned cableless measurement device.
Starting Monitoring
After you switch on the monitor,
1Admit your patient to the monitor.
2Check that the profile, alarm limits, alarm and QRS volumes, patient category and paced status and
so forth are appropriate for your patient. Change them if necessary.
3Refer to the appropriate measurement chapter for further details of how to perform the
measurements you require.
Disconnecting from AC Mains Power
To disconnect the monitor from AC mains power, unplug the power cord for the external power
supply (M8023A) from the mains socket.
2 Basic Operation
44
Monitoring After a Power Failure
If external power is disconnected or there is a power failure, the monitor continues to run on its
rechargeable battery.
If the monitor is without any power (no external power or the battery is empty) for less than one
minute, monitoring will resume with all active settings unchanged. If the monitor is without power for
more than one minute, the behavior depends on your configuration. If Automat. Default is set to
Yes, the default profile will be loaded when power is restored. If Automat. Default is set to No, all
active settings are retained, if power is restored within 48 hours. The Automat. Default setting is made
in Configuration Mode.
Networked Monitoring
You can connect your monitor to an Information Center on a network, using one of the optional
interfaces:
• Standard wired LAN
• Wireless LAN
• IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry System (IIT).
WARNING
Do not connect patient monitors to the standard hospital network.
If your monitor is connected to a network, a network symbol is displayed in the upper left corner next
to the bed label. To see details about the monitoring equipment and technical information about the
network, select the Main Setup SmartKey to enter the Main Setup menu, then select Bed
Information.
Be aware that some network-based functions may be limited for monitors on wireless networks in
comparison to those on wired networks.
Capturing Alarm Reports and Printing
You can print out standard reports, alarm reports and trends with the IntelliVue XDS Solution. This is
a software package which allows you to print to a standard, off-the-shelf printer or to an electronic file
such as PDF. You can download the IntelliVue XDS Solution free-of-charge from the Internet and
install it on an existing PC.
Capturing Alarm Reports
The monitor can be set up to automatically capture alarm reports, triggered by selected alarms. The
necessary settings must be made in Configuration mode.
When one of the selected alarms occurs, the monitor automatically captures the alarm and creates a
report which is stored in the database. As soon as the monitor is connected to a PC or network with
the IntelliVue XDS Solution software, it will automatically print the reports, or send them to a patient-
specific folder as an electronic file.
3
45
3What's New?
This section lists the most important new features and improvements to the monitor and its user
interface introduced with each release. Further information is provided in other sections of this book.
You may not have all of these features, depending on the monitor configuration purchased by your
hospital.
What's New in Release J.0
Flexible, Patient-oriented Workflow (with PIIC iX only)
With the IntelliVue Information Center iX, more flexible, patient-oriented workflows are supported
for admitting, tracking and transferring patients. This allows you to adapt monitor use to the patient
data flow models in your specific facility and department.
Managing Patients
When the patient monitor is connected to an IntelliVue Information Center iX, an extended
comparison of patient data allows more intelligent admission and transfer procedures. A Find Patient
key can be used to search through the patient lists at the Information Center and other connected
systems and take over the corresponding data found.
Flexible Transfer
A transfer can be initiated in the unit at the monitor, on patient arrival or patient departure, or centrally
at the Information Center.
Managing Equipment
When used together with an Information Center iX, extended equipment management functionality is
now available. Depending on how equipment is used in your facility, there are various ways to
associate devices with patients, beds or monitors.
Additionally there are mechanisms to automatically free up equipment that is no longer used. Using the
new Equipment window you have an overview of all equipment being used for a patient, together with
patient and caregiver data.
Alarm Functionality Enhancements
• Pause Yellow Alarms (with PIIC iX only) - up until now, the Pause Alarms / Alarms Off key
switched off or paused all red and yellow alarms. Now an alarm priority configuration setting is
available to have only yellow alarms affected.
•Pause Alarms / Alarms Off not allowed - when the alarm priority is set to Not Allowed, alarms
can no longer be switched off or paused. The Pause Alarms / Alarms Off key is disabled.
3What's New?
46
•Pause Alarms / Alarms Off key can be removed from the screen - a configuration setting removes
the permanent key from the screen to avoid unintentional switching off of alarms. Alarms can still
be switched off or paused, in the Alarms menu, under Main Setup.
• Alarms paused after Standby mode - alarms are automatically paused for 1 minute after Standby
mode to allow time for patient connection.
Capture 12-Lead ECG Enhancements (with PIIC iX only)
The existing 12-Lead ECG capture functionality has been extended to offer:
• Download of analysis results from the IntelliVue Information Center.
• Download of 12-Lead captures from the IntelliVue Information Center for review at the patient
monitor.
• Analysis results included in reports and additional report selections with ST Map.
• Remote operation of the 12-Lead Export function at the IntelliVue Information Center.
• Remote operation of the 12-Lead Lock/Unlock function at the IntelliVue Information Center.
• New filter settings that are used as a default for future 12-Lead captures.
New "End Afib" and "End Irregular HR" Alarms
The end of an atrial fibrillation or irregular HR phase is announced with an ** End AFIB or **End
Irregular HR alarm. The delay time before the alarm is announced can be configured.
Integrated Pulmonary Index for Microstream CO2
An Integrated Pulmonary Index (IPI) numeric is provided, that is an indication of the patient's overall
ventilatory status based on four measurement parameters: etCO2, awRR, pulse rate and SpO2.
Improved Visibility of Gridlines in Overlapping Waves
Visibility of the gridlines for overlapping waves has been improved, and you can now configure
gridlines to be shown in white, if you prefer, in a thin or thick style.
Timeout for "Aged" Numerics
NBP and SpO2 numerics from intermittent measurements can be configured to be grayed out or to
disappear from the screen after a set time. This avoids older numerics being misinterpreted as current
data. The time can be set individually for SpO2 and NBP in Configuration mode.
What's New in Release H.0
Battery Extension
The new Battery Extension provides additional battery power for situations when no mains power is
available, for example during transport, and can typically power the monitor with MMS Extension for
at least 6 hours.
New Design for the User Interface
The user interface for the patient monitors has been redesigned to bring the presented information
into the foreground, letting the structural elements such as keys and frames retreat into the
3What's New?
47
background. Additionally special regard was given to improved usability and compatibility with
standard software products.
12 Lead ECG Enhancements
You can now preview the 12-Lead ECG at the bedside before you send it to the Information Center.
A new dedicated 12-Lead ECG Report can be printed in diagnostic quality from the bedside.
Support For Use of IntelliVue Cableless Measurement Devices
The new Cableless Measurement Devices are patient-worn, battery powered measurement devices for
SpO2 and NBP. The devices provide measurement values on the built-in display and communicate
them to the monitor using a wireless short range radio (SRR) interface. They can also be controlled via
SRR from an assigned patient monitor.
Vital Signs Trend Based on NBP Measurement Times
You can now have the NBP measurement determine the interval between the columns on the Vital
Signs trend. Each NBP measurement will generate a column in the trend table. The values for the
other measurements are added to the column to provide a complete vital signs set for the NBP
measurement time.
What's New in Release G.0?
Short Range Radio Interface for MP2
A short range radio interface is now available for the MP2 monitor. This allows a telemetry transceiver
with a short range radio adapter to be assigned to the monitor, resulting in a direct connection. The
measurement data from the telemetry transceiver appear directly on the monitor screen with a minimal
delay and are combined with the monitor data in one sector at the Information Center.
IntelliVue XDS Solution
Using the IntelliVue XDS solution it is possible to view an independent monitor screen on an external
display. The XDS solution consists of a medical grade PC-based hardware platform, XDS application
software and the XDS connectivity option on the monitor. Depending on the configuration you can
also operate the monitor from the external display. The XDS must be connected to the same Local
Area Network (LAN) as the monitor.
It is also possible to use an existing PC, connected to the same LAN, to host the XDS Application
software.
New Fields in the Admission Form
A Middle Name field is now available in the admission form - whether it appears is configurable. Two
additional ID fields, Lifetime Id and Encounter Id, can also be configured to appear and their names
can be customized to fit hospital requirements.
SpO2 Enhancements
• Additional SpO2 Labels - SpO₂pr and SpO₂po labels have been added.
• New manual measurement mode when telemetry devices are connected via a short range radio
link.
• Signal Quality Indicator displayed with the SpO2 numerics.
ECG Enhancements
•New
* AFIB / ** AFIB yellow alarm when an atrial fibrillation waveform is detected.
3What's New?
48
•QT View window - shows current wave and baseline wave with Q and T points marked so that you
can verify that the QT algorithm detects correct Q and T points.
What's New in Release F.0?
QT/QTc Interval Monitoring
QT interval monitoring is used to assist in the detection of prolonged QT interval syndrome. The QT
interval is measured and the heart-rate corrected QT value, QTc, is calculated. The monitor also
provides a QTc value which tracks variation in the QT interval in relation to a baseline value. High
alarm limits can be set for QTc and QTc enabling alarm notification.
Manual Data Entry
Measurement values (for example lab data or manually measured temperatures) can be entered
manually into the monitor and stored in the database. They can then be used for trends, reports and
also be displayed as a numeric on screen, if required.
Horizon Trend Enhancements
The trend indicator arrow indicates how the patient trend has developed in a set time period. This
period is now configurable and can be set to 10 minutes, 5 minutes or 2 minutes. The horizon (or
baseline) can now be set to a range or to a specific value.
NBP - Programmable Measurement Sequence
Up to four measurement cycles can be set up which will run consecutively. For each cycle you can set
the number of measurements and the interval between them. By setting the last cycle to run
continuously you can have regular measurements continue after the sequence has run.
New Printing Options For Reports
Reports can now also be printed via an external PC-based print server or to an internal print database,
when no printer is available (for example, during transport). As soon as a printer becomes available,
the reports stored in the database will print automatically.
Manual Pairing At Monitor
Previously, devices could only be manually paired at the Information Center. You can now pair devices
at the monitor as long as the monitor is already connected to the Information Center.
Moving Windows And Menus
Windows and menus can now be moved on the monitor screen. Using touch or a mouse you can select
the title of a window and then "drag" it across the screen. Some positions on the screen are not
allowed, such as ones overlapping the alarm field or the monitor info line.
Invasive Pressure Changes
Wave cursor - A cursor is now available on the realtime pressure wave to allow you to define a
position and store the corresponding value.
Reduced alarm limit steps in lower ranges - The alarm limits setting in 2 mmHg steps is now
possible in ranges up to 50 mmHg (previously up to 30 mmHg).
New Patient Check
The monitor can be configured to ask you in certain situations: after a specified power-off period, after
a specified standby period and when no basic vitals (HR, RR, Pulse, SpO2, NBP) have been measured
for a specified period, whether a new patient is now being monitored. By selecting the Yes pop-up key
you can discharge the previous patient and reset settings.
3What's New?
49
New Smart Keys
A SmartKey is available for New Lead Setup when a new ECG lead set with fewer leads than
previously is being used.
Better Visibility Of Gridlines
The brightness of the gridlines on the realtime waves has been increased for better visibility.
3What's New?
50
4
51
4Alarms
The alarm information here applies to all measurements. Measurement-specific alarm information is
discussed in the sections on individual measurements.
The monitor has two different types of alarm: patient alarms and INOPs.
Patient Alarms
Patient Alarms are red and yellow alarms. A red alarm indicates a high priority patient alarm such as a
potentially life threatening situation (for example, asystole). A yellow alarm indicates a lower priority
patient alarm (for example, a respiration alarm limit violation). Additionally there are short yellow
alarms, most of which are specific to arrhythmia-related patient conditions (for example, ventricular
bigeminy).
INOPs
INOPs are technical alarms, they indicate that the monitor cannot measure or detect alarm conditions
reliably. If an INOP interrupts monitoring and alarm detection (for example, Leads Off), the monitor
places a question mark in place of the measurement numeric and an audible indicator tone will be
sounded. INOPs without this audible indicator indicate that there may be a problem with the reliability
of the data, but that monitoring is not interrupted.
Most INOPs are light blue, however there are a small number of INOPs which are always yellow or
red to indicate a severity corresponding to red and yellow alarms. The following INOPs can also be
configured as red or yellow INOPs to provide a severity indication:
•ECG Leads Off
•NBP Cuff Overpress
•Cuff Not Deflated
•Occlusion
•<SpO₂ Label> No Pulse
•<Press Label> No Pulse
•Tele Disconnected
•Battery Empty / Replace Battery
All monitors in a unit should have the same severity configured for these INOPs.
4 Alarms
52
Alarm Delays
There is a delay between a physiological event at the measurement site and the corresponding alarm
indication at the monitor. This delay has two components:
•The general measurement delay time is the time between the occurrence of the
physiological event and when this event is represented by the displayed numerical values.
This delay depends on the algorithmic processing and, for certain measurements (SpO2, EEG and
BIS), on the configured averaging time. The longer the averaging time configured, the longer the
time needed until the numerical values reflect the physiological event.
•The time between the displayed numerical values crossing an alarm limit and the alarm
indication on the monitor. This delay is the sum of the alarm delay configured for the specific
measurement plus the system alarm delay. The system alarm delay is the processing time the
system needs for any alarm on the monitor to be indicated after the measurement has triggered the
alarm. See the performance specifications in the Specifications chapter for the system alarm delay
specification.
The alarm delay configured for a specific measurement is normally a fixed time. For SpO2 it is also
possible to configure a Smart Alarm Delay that is calculated using an intelligent algorithm. See “Smart
Alarm Delays” on page 171 in the SpO2 chapter for more details.
Multiple Alarms
If more than one alarm is active, the alarm messages are shown in the alarm status area in succession.
An arrow symbol next to the alarm message informs you that more than one message is active.
The monitor sounds an audible indicator for the highest priority alarm. If more than one alarm
condition is active in the same measurement, the monitor announces the most severe. Your monitor
may be configured to increase alarm indicator volume automatically during the time when the alarm is
not acknowledged.
Visual Alarm Indicators
Alarm Message
An alarm message text appears in the alarm status area at the top of the screen indicating the source of
the alarm. There is a field for INOPs (light blue, red or yellow) and a field for patient alarms, which is
shared for red and yellow alarms. If more than one measurement is in an alarm condition, the message
changes every two seconds, and has an arrow at the side. If both red and yellow alarm conditions are
active simultaneously, they alternate every two seconds in the patient alarms field. The background
color of the alarm message matches the alarm priority: red for red alarms, yellow for yellow alarms,
light blue for standard INOPs, red for red INOPs and yellow for yellow INOPs. The asterisk symbols
(*) beside the alarm message match the alarm priority: *** for red alarms, ** for yellow alarms, * for
short yellow alarms. Standard INOPs do not have a symbol, red and yellow INOPs have exclamation
marks beside the alarm message: !!! for red INOPs and !! for yellow INOPs.
Depending on how your monitor is configured, it may display alarm limit violation messages
• in text form, for example ** SpO₂ Low or
• in numeric form, for example **Pulse xxx>yyy where the first number shows the maximum
deviation from the alarm limit, and the second number shows the currently set limit.
Flashing Numeric
The numeric of the measurement in alarm flashes.
4 Alarms
53
Bright Alarm Limits
If the alarm was triggered by an alarm limit violation, the corresponding alarm limit on the monitor
screen is shown more brightly if Show ALarmLimits is enabled and there is sufficient room on the
screen.
Alarm Lamp
A lamp on the monitor's front panel flashes. The alarm lamp is divided into two sections. The right
one flashes for a patient alarm, except for short yellow alarms where the lamp will light for
approximately six seconds. The color is yellow or red corresponding to the highest priority patient
alarm currently present. The left one lights continuously for a light blue INOP and flashes for yellow
or red INOPs as follows:
If only patient alarms are present, and no INOPs, the patient alarms will use both left and right
sections to flash (for red and yellow alarms) or light for approximately six seconds (for short yellow
alarms). If only INOPs are present, and no patient alarms, red and yellow INOPs will use both left and
right sections to flash but light blue INOPs will always light continuously in the left section only.
Audible Alarm Indicators
The audible alarm indicators configured for your monitor depend on which alarm standard applies in
your hospital. Audible alarm indicator patterns are repeated until you acknowledge the alarm by
switching it off or pausing it, or until the alarm condition ceases (if audible alarm indication is set to
non-latching).
WARNING
• Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring. Adjustment of alarm
volume to a low level or off during patient monitoring may result in patient danger. Remember
that the most reliable method of patient monitoring combines close personal surveillance with
correct operation of monitoring equipment.
Alarm Tone Configuration
The audible alarm indicators of your monitor are configurable. In the monitor's Configuration Mode,
you can:
• increase the alarm volume of unacknowledged alarms at regular intervals
• change the interval between alarm sounds (ISO/IEC Standard alarms only)
• change the base volume of the red and yellow alarm tones and the INOP tones
• change the alarm sound to suit the different alarm standards valid in different countries.
INOP Lamp Color On Off
Yellow 1.0 seconds 1.0 seconds
Red 0.25 seconds 0.25 seconds
4 Alarms
54
Traditional Audible Alarms (HP/Agilent/Philips/Carenet)
• Red alarms and red INOPs: A high pitched sound is repeated once a second.
• Two-star yellow alarms and yellow INOPs: A lower pitched sound is repeated every two seconds.
• One-star yellow alarms (short yellow alarms): The audible indicator is the same as for yellow
alarms, but of shorter duration.
• Standard INOPs: an INOP tone is repeated every two seconds.
ISO/IEC Standard Audible Alarms
• Red alarms and red INOPs: A high pitched tone is repeated five times, followed by a configurable
pause.
• Two-star yellow alarms and yellow INOPs: A lower pitched tone is repeated three times, followed
by a configurable pause.
• One-star yellow alarms (short yellow alarms): The audible indicator is the same as for yellow
alarms, but of shorter duration.
• Standard INOPs: a lower pitched tone is repeated twice, followed by a pause.
Changing the Alarm Tone Volume
If you want to change the alarm volume setting, or see where the current setting is on a scale from zero
to 10, select the Alarm Volume SmartKey. The volume scale pops up. The current setting is indented.
To change the setting, select the required number on the scale. Any settings that are inactive ("grayed
out") have been disabled in the monitor's Configuration Mode.
When the alarm volume is set to zero (off), the alarm volume symbol reflects this. If you switch the
alarm volume off, you will not get any audible indication of alarm conditions.
Minimum Volume for No Central Monitoring INOP
If your monitor is connected to an Information Center, and the connection is interrupted, the INOP
message No Central Monit. will appear within 30 seconds, accompanied by an INOP tone. To help
ensure that this INOP, and any other active alarm, is not overlooked, the INOP and alarm tones may
be configured to have a minimum volume. In this case, INOP and alarm tones will sound even if the
monitor alarm volume is set to zero.
Minimum Volume for Severe Yellow or Red INOPs
Severe yellow or red INOPs require action to ensure the well-being of the patient. Therefore the
minimum volume for the INOP tone is set to at least alarm volume 8, irrespective of the current alarm
volume setting. The INOP tone will sound even if the monitor alarm volume is set to zero.
The severe INOPs for which this applies are:
Cuff Not Deflated (configurable to yellow or red)
NBP Cuff Overpress (configurable to yellow or red)
!! Insert Battery (yellow)
Battery Empty / Replace Battery (configurable to light blue, yellow or red)
4 Alarms
55
Acknowledging Alarms
To acknowledge all active alarms and INOPs, press the Silence key. This switches off the audible alarm
indicators and alarm lamps.
A check mark beside the alarm message indicates that the alarm has been acknowledged . If the
monitor is configured to re-alarm, a dashed check mark will be shown .
If the condition that triggered the alarm is still present after the alarm has been acknowledged, the
alarm message stays on the screen with a check mark symbol beside it, except for NBP alarms and
alarms from other intermittent measurements. When such an alarm is acknowledged the alarm
message disappears.
If the alarm condition is no longer present, all alarm indicators stop and the alarm is reset.
Switching off the alarms for the measurement in alarm, or switching off the measurement itself, also
stops alarm indication.
Acknowledging Disconnect INOPs
Acknowledging an INOP that results from a disconnected transducer switches off the associated
measurement. The only exception is ECG/Resp: acknowledging a disconnect INOP for ECG leads
does not switch off the ECG and Resp measurements. Acknowledging a disconnect INOP at the
Information Center switches off the audible INOP indicator but does not switch off the measurement.
Alarm Reminder
If Alarm Reminder is configured on for your monitor, you will get an audible reminder of alarm
conditions that remain active after you have acknowledged the alarm. This reminder may take the form
of a repetition of the alarm tone for a limited time, or an unlimited repetition of the alarm tone (this is
the same as a new alarm). Alarm Reminder is not available for standard, light blue INOPs but for
yellow and red INOPs.
In Configuration Mode, you can set the interval between silencing the alarm and sounding the
reminder tone to one, two, or three minutes.
The alarm reminder behavior at the Information Center is different to that at the monitor. Refer to the
Information Center Instructions for Use for further information.
4 Alarms
56
Pausing or Switching Off Alarms
If you want to temporarily prevent alarms from sounding, for example while you are moving a patient,
you can pause alarms. Depending on your monitor configuration, alarms are paused for one, two, or
three minutes, or infinitely. Infinite alarm pause is equivalent to switching the alarms off.
To view the alarm pause setting chosen for your unit,
1Select Main Setup, Alarms, then Alarm Settings
2Check the Alarms Off setting.
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
There are some settings made in Configuration Mode that can affect the availability of the pause
alarms functionality.
• The Alarms key can be disabled to avoid unintentional switching off of alarms. In this case you can
only pause alarms or switch alarms off permanently in the Alarms menu, under Main Setup.
• The Alarms key can be configured to pause or switch off red and yellow alarms, yellow alarms
only, or not to function at all. If it is configured not to function, you cannot pause alarms or switch
alarms off permanently.
To Pause All Alarms
• Press the Alarms key.
• If your monitor is configured to infinite pause time, the lamp next to the alarms off symbol is red
or yellow, depending on the configuration, and pressing this key switches alarms off.
Depending on the configuration, you may need to select Confirm to complete the change.
To Switch All Alarms Off
You can only switch alarms off permanently if your monitor is configured to allow infinite alarms
pause.
• Press the Alarms key.
Pausing alarms infinitely is the same as switching them off.
To Switch Individual Measurement Alarms On or Off
1Select the measurement numeric to enter its setup menu.
2Select Alarms to switch between on and off.
4 Alarms
57
The alarms off symbol is shown beside the measurement numeric.
While Alarms are Paused or Off
When red alarms are paused or off:
• The red Alarms Paused lamp on the monitor front panel is lit.
In the alarm field, the monitor displays the message Al. Paused x:yy or Alarms Off, together with
the alarms paused symbol or the alarms off symbol.
When yellow alarms are paused or off:
• The yellow Alarms Paused lamp on the monitor front panel is lit.
In the alarm field, the monitor displays the message YellowPaused x:yy or Yellow Alarms Off,
together with the alarms paused symbol or the alarms off symbol.
For red and yellow alarms:
• No alarms are sounded and no alarm messages are shown.
• INOP messages are shown but no INOP tones are sounded.
The only exceptions are the INOPs Cuff Not Deflated, NBP Cuff Overpress and INOPs relating
to empty, missing and malfunctioning batteries.
These INOPs switch the alarms on, and the INOP tones are sounded, even if alarms are paused or off.
You need to remove the INOP condition first before you can switch the alarm tones off again.
If a disconnect INOP is present and alarms are paused or switched off, the measurement in question
may be switched off, depending on monitor configuration.
Restarting Paused Alarms
To manually switch on alarm indication again after a pause, press the Alarms key again.
Alarm indication starts again automatically after the pause period expires. If the monitor is configured
to stay paused infinitely, you must select Alarms Off again to restart alarm indication.
Resetting Arrhythmia Alarm Timeouts
To reset the arrhythmia alarm timeout period, press the Alarms key and then press it again.
Extending the Alarm Pause Time
If your monitor has extended alarm pause enabled, you can extend the alarm pause time. Use this to
prevent alarms being indicated, for example, while you are washing a patient or carrying out a
procedure. Only extend the alarm pause time when you are sure that clinical personnel are available to
monitor the patient's condition closely.
To extend the alarm pause time to five or 10 minutes,
1Select one of the alarm fields. This calls up the Alarm Messages window.
2Select either the pop-up key PauseAl. 5 Min or the pop-up key PauseAl. 10 Min. Each time you
select one of these pop-up keys, the Alarm Pause Time is reset to five (or 10) minutes.
Alarms Paused Alarms Off
4 Alarms
58
Alarm Limits
The alarm limits you set determine the conditions that trigger yellow and red limit alarms. For some
measurements (for example, SpO2), where the value ranges from 100 to 0, setting the high alarm limit
to 100 switches the high alarm off. In these cases, the alarms off symbol is not displayed.
WARNING
Be aware that the monitors in your care area may each have different alarm settings, to suit different
patients. Always check that the alarm settings are appropriate for your patient before you start
monitoring.
Viewing Individual Alarm Limits
You can usually see the alarm limits set for each measurement next to the measurement numeric on
the main screen.
If your monitor is not configured to show the alarm limits next to the numeric, or if the numeric is so
small that the limits cannot be displayed, you can see them in the appropriate measurement setup
menu. Select the measurement numeric to enter the menu and check the limits.
Viewing All Alarm Limits
The Alarm Limits overview window lists the currently set alarm limits for all measurements. If an
Apnea alarm delay time is set, this is also shown. The alarms off symbol is shown beside the
measurement label of any measurement whose alarm switched off.
4 Alarms
59
To open the Alarm Limits window, either select one of the alarm fields then select the Alarm Limits
pop-up key, or select the Alarm Limits SmartKey, if configured.
Select Show ST Limits to expand the list of ST leads and view the currently set alarm limits. Selecting
Hide ST Limits hides the list again.
You can use the pop-up keys that open with the Alarm Limits window to perform common tasks:
–All Lim. Narrow/All Lim. Wide to set narrow or wide alarm AutoLimits for all measurements.
These pop-up keys are not available in the window for changing individual alarm limits which you
access by selecting the measurement label in the Alarm Limits window.
Changing Alarm Limits
To change individual measurement alarm limits using the measurement's Setup Menu,
1In the measurement's setup menu, select the alarm limit you want to change. This calls up a list of
available values for the alarm limit.
2Select a value from the list to adjust the alarm limit.
For example, to change the alarm limits for SpO2:
• Touch the high limit on the alarm limits menu button.
• Choose the high alarm limit from the pop-up list that opens.
• Touch the low limit on the alarm limits menu button.
• Choose the low alarm limit from the pop-up list that opens.
1 Graphic view of current yellow
and red alarm limits and
currently monitored
measurement value. Off
indicates the measurement is
switched off
2 Measurement labels, with alarms
off symbol where appropriate
3 Set narrow or wide alarm
AutoLimits for all
measurements
4 Alarms
60
Alternatively, you can use the keys in the measurement alarm limits window, which you access by
selecting the measurement label in the Alarm Limits window.
To change alarm limits,
1Enter the Alarm Limits window.
2To set the high alarm limit, select the high yellow alarm field to open a pop-up list of high alarm
limits. Select a limit from the list. Repeat to set the low yellow alarm field.
If you set the yellow alarm limit outside the red alarm limit, the monitor will automatically set the red
alarm to the yellow alarm limit.
When an ST measurement is in the alarm limits window there are also two pop-up keys available
labeled All ST Narrow/All ST Wide. With these keys you can set Auto Limits for all ST Leads.
About Automatic Alarm Limits
The monitor can automatically set alarm limits suited to your individual patient, using the Automatic
Alarm Limits function (AutoLimits). This tells the monitor to adapt the alarm limits of selected
measurements to the measured vital signs within a defined safe limit. The monitor calculates safe
AutoLimits for each patient based on the measured values from the last 12 seconds.
The wide and narrow limits have a fixed relationship to the measured value within the non-
pathological range. Outside of this range, no auto limits are calculated. To set values outside of the
1Parameter label
2High red alarm (view only)
3High yellow alarm field. Select to
open a pop-up list of high alarm
limits
4Alarms On/Off key - select to
toggle between alarms on or off
5Preview Alarm AutoLimits for a
measurement before applying
6Select to apply wide AutoLimits
7Select to apply narrow AutoLimits
8Low yellow alarm field. Select to
open a pop-up list of low alarm
limits
9Low red alarm (view only)
10 Graphic view of alarm limits with
currently measured value
4 Alarms
61
non-pathological range, limits must be changed manually, based on the clinician's judgment about the
specific patient.
Limits Narrow sets limits close to the currently measured values for situations where it is critical for
you to be informed about small changes in your patient's vital signs.
Limits Wide sets limits further away from the currently measured values for situations where small
changes are not so critical.
Use the keys in the measurement alarm limits window to apply AutoLimits for individual
measurements. These keys are not available if AutoLimits have been disabled for the measurement in
the monitor's Configuration Mode.
AutoLimits are not available for all measurements. The list of measurements for which AutoLimits can
be used is defined in the monitor's Configuration mode.
Use the measurement alarm limits window to check AutoLimits before you apply them to ensure that
they are appropriate for your individual patient and their clinical condition. Once applied, AutoLimits
are shown on the monitor screen just like manually-set alarm limits. If the AutoLimits are not
appropriate for your patient, you must set alarm limits manually. The limits remain unchanged until
you set them again or change them manually.
Documenting Alarm Limits
To print a list of all current alarm limit settings on an available printer:
1Select the Main Setup SmartKey.
2Select Reports from the Main Setup menu.
3Select Alarm Limits.
Reviewing Alarms
You can see which alarms and INOPs are currently active in the respective alarms and INOPs fields at
the top of the screen.
To review the history of alarms and INOPs, select the alarms or INOPs field to open the Review
Alarms window.
All alarms and INOPs are erased from the Review Alarms window when you discharge a patient, or if
you change to Demonstration Mode.
1Wide alarm limits
2Narrow alarm limits
3Alarm Limits
4Measurement value
4 Alarms
62
Review Alarms Window
The Review Alarms window contains a list of the most recent alarms and INOPs with date and time
information.
If configured to do so, each alarm is shown with the alarm limit active when the alarm was triggered
and the maximum value measured beyond this limit. The Review Alarms window also shows when the
monitor was switched on (after being switched off for longer than 1 minute) and any actions related to
switching alarms on and off, entering or leaving Standby mode, silencing alarms or changing the ECG
source.
When you select an item from the list, you can get additional information about that item. If you select
a high or low limit alarm in the list, the Graphical Trends window will open to provide further data. If
you select an alert other than a high or low alarm, a help text window opens with more information.
Some items in the list are simply log items not related to a patient alert as such (for example, Alarms
On or Alarms Off). You cannot see any further information if you select one of these items. When you
close these windows you will return to the Review Alarms window.
The information in the Review Alarms window is deleted when a patient is discharged, and when you
leave Demonstration Mode.
The Review Alarms window pop-up keys appear when the window is opened. If alarm pause
extension is disabled, the pause pop-up keys are inactive.
Latching Alarms
The alarm latching setting for your monitor defines how the alarm indicators behave when you do not
acknowledge them. When alarms are set to non-latching, their indicators end when the alarm condition
ends. Switching alarm latching on means that visual and/or audible alarm indications are still displayed
or announced by the monitor after the alarm condition ends. The indication lasts until you
acknowledge the alarm.
Viewing the Alarm Latching Settings
To see the alarm latching setting for your monitor
1In the monitor's Main Setup menu, select Alarms.
2Select Alarm Settings, and see the Visual Latching and Audible Latching settings.
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode. You should be aware of the settings chosen
for your unit. There are three possible choices each for visual and audible latching, red only, red and
yellow, and off. These choices can be combined to give the following settings:
Visual Latching Audible Latching
Red&Yellow Red&Yellow
Red&Yellow Red Only
Red&Yellow Off
Red Only Red Only
Red Only Off
Off Off
4 Alarms
63
Alarm Latching Behavior
All INOPs are non-latching. See “Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms” on page 133 for information on one-
star yellow alarms latching behavior.
Testing Alarms
When you switch the monitor on, a selftest is started. You must check that the alarms lamps light, one
after the other, and that you hear a single tone. This indicates that the visible and audible alarm
indicators are functioning correctly. For further testing of individual measurement alarms, perform the
measurement on yourself (for example SpO2 or CO2) or use a simulator. Adjust alarm limits and check
that appropriate alarm behavior is observed.
Alarm Behavior at Power On
If the monitor is switched off for longer than one minute and then switched on again (or after a loss of
power lasting longer than one minute, or when a patient is discharged), the monitor can be configured
to:
• restore the alarm settings from the monitor's configured default Profile,
• restore the most recently used alarm settings, or
• switch the alarms off.
After any of these situations, you should check that the alarm settings are appropriate for your patient
and monitoring situation, and if necessary, select the correct Profile and patient category.
If power is lost for less than one minute, the alarm on/off condition prior to the power loss is
restored.
Red & Yellow Measurement
Alarms
Non-latching alarms Visual and audible latching Visual latching, audible
non-latching
Alarm has not
been
acknowledged.
Alarm condition
still present.
Alarm tone on. Alarm lamp on.
Alarm message. Flashing
numerics.
Alarm tone on. Alarm lamp
on. Alarm message. Flashing
numerics.
Alarm tone on. Alarm lamp
on. Alarm message. Flashing
numerics.
Alarm condition
no longer present.
All audible and visual alarm
indicators automatically stop.
Alarm tone on.
Alarm lamp on.
Alarm message.
Flashing numerics.
Alarm message. Flashing
numerics.
Audible alarm indicators
automatically stop.
Alarm has been
acknowledged.
Alarm condition
still present.
Alarm tone off. Alarm lamp off.
Alarm message. Flashing
numerics. Audible alarm
reminder (if configured).
Alarm tone off. Alarm lamp
off. Alarm message. Flashing
numerics. Audible alarm
reminder (if configured).
Alarm tone off. Alarm lamp
off. Alarm message. Flashing
numerics. Audible alarm
reminder (if configured).
Alarm condition
no longer present.
Audible and visual alarm
indicators automatically stop.
Audible and visual alarm
indicators automatically stop.
Audible and visual alarm
indicators automatically stop.
4 Alarms
64
Alarm Recordings
You can set up your monitor so that it automatically triggers alarm recordings locally or at the
Information Center, or if configured, to a printer as a realtime report.
1Press the Main Setup SmartKey.
2Select Alarms from the Main Setup menu.
3Select Alarm Recording from the Alarms menu to open the Alarm Recordings menu.
4Select a measurement from those listed for which you want to change the alarm condition that
triggers an alarm recording. This opens a pop-up list.
5For the desired measurement(s), choose the alarm condition to trigger an alarm recording:
Red Only: an alarm recording will automatically be triggered when the measurement enters a red
alarm condition.
Red&Yellow: both yellow and red alarms will trigger an alarm recording.
Off: disables automatic alarm recording.
Refer to the "Recording" chapter for details of how to set up a recording.
5
65
5Patient Alarms and INOPs
This chapter lists patient alarms alphabetically, and technical alarms (INOPs) arranged by the source of
the INOP and then alphabetically, irrespective of their priority. All alarms and INOPs are listed here;
the ones which can appear on your monitor will depend on the model and the individual options.
Patient Alarm Messages
The measurement labels and abbreviations for pressure, temperature, SpO2, and anesthetic agent
alarms are explained in the individual chapters.
Some alarms may be shown at the Information Center in shortened form, when transferred through
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry. These shortened alarm texts are included in the list and identified
with the note "at Information Center".
Alarm Message From Condition Indication
* AFIB ECG/Arrhythmia Atrial fibrillation waveform detected yellow alarm lamp, short yellow
alarm tone
*** Apnea
*** Apnea x:yy
*** Apnea >10 min
CO2, Resp,
Spirometry
Respiration has stopped for longer than the
preset apnea time. "x:yy" denotes the Apnea
duration in minutes and seconds
numeric flashes, red alarm lamp,
alarm tone
*** Asystole ECG No QRS detected for a period greater than the
asystole threshold (in the absence of Vfib or
chaotic ECG)
numeric flashes, red alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** awRR High CO2, Resp, AGM The airway respiration rate has exceeded the
high alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** awRR Low CO2, Resp, AGM The airway respiration rate has dropped below
the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** BIS High BIS The Bispectral Index value has exceeded the
high alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** BIS Low BIS The Bispectral Index value has dropped below
the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
*** Brady/P xxx<yyy
*** Brady xxx < yyy
Press, SpO2The heart rate from the Pulse signal has fallen
below the bradycardia limit. xxx denotes the
lowest measured value; yyy is the bradycardia
limit.
numeric flashes and alarm limit is
highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm
tone
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
66
** CCO High
** CCI High
CCO Continuous Cardiac Output or CC Index is
above the high alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high alarm
limit is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone
** CCO Low
** CCI Low
CCO Continuous Cardiac Output or CC Index is
below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low alarm limit
is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** CPP High CPP The CPP value has exceeded the high alarm
limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** CPP Low CPP The CPP value has fallen below the low alarm
limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
*** Desat
*** Desat xx < yy
SpO2The SpO2 value has fallen below the
desaturation alarm limit. xx denotes the lowest
measured value, and yy is the desaturation limit.
numeric flashes, red alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** EC10 Alarm
*** EC10 Alarm
at Information Center
EC10 Intellibridge A yellow (**) or red (***) patient alarm is
present on the IntelliBridge module. Check the
monitor display for more detailed alarm
information.
(on monitor) yellow or red alarm
lamp; the alarm text is defined by
the Intellibridge device driver
* End AFIB ECG/Arrhythmia No Atrial fibrillation waveform was detected
for the configured Afib End delay time
yellow alarm lamp, short yellow
alarm tone
* End Irregular HR ECG/Arrhythmia No irregular HR was detected for the
configured irregular HR End delay time
yellow alarm lamp, short yellow
alarm tone
** etCO₂ High CO2, AGM The end tidal CO2 high alarm limit has been
exceeded.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** etCO₂ Low CO2, AGM The end tidal CO2 value has fallen below the
low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** etO₂ High O2, AGM The end tidal O2 high alarm limit has been
exceeded.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** etO₂ Low O2, AGM The end tidal O2 value has fallen below the low
alarm limit.
numeric flashes, and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
* Event
** Event
*** Event
at Information center
Event surveillance An event has occurred and the event
notification is configured to alarm. Check on
the monitor for more details on event group.
(on monitor) event group name
flashes, yellow or red alarm lamp
and alarm tone
* Event:<Event Group>
** Event:<Event
Group>
*** Event:<Event
Group>
Event surveillance An event has occurred and the event
notification is configured to alarm.
event group name flashes, yellow or
red alarm lamp and alarm tone
*** Extreme Brady ECG The bradycardia limit has been exceeded. numeric flashes and alarm limit is
highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm
tone
Alarm Message From Condition Indication
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
67
* HR High
** HR High
ECG The heart rate has risen above the high alarm
limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone. If configured to short
yellow, the sound switches off after
5 seconds if Arrhythmia is switched
on.
* HR Low
** HR Low
ECG The heart rate has fallen below the low alarm
limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone. If configured to short
yellow, the sound switches off after
5 seconds if Arrhythmia is switched
on.
** IPI Low CO2The IPI value has fallen below the low alarm
limit.
numeric flashes, and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
* Irregular HR ECG/Arrhythmia Consistently irregular heart rhythm. numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
* Missed Beat ECG/Arrhythmia No beat detected for 1.75*R-R interval, or if
HR>120 bpm no beat detected for one second
(non-paced patients only).
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
* More Alarms
** More Alarms
*** More Alarms
other assigned
devices
There is more than one physiological alarm of
the corresponding severity active on the devices
that monitor this patient. For details, check the
information displayed at the Information
Center.
yellow or red alarm lamp and alarm
tone
* Multiform PVCs ECG/Arrhythmia Two differently shaped Vs detected, each
occurring at least twice within the last 300 beats
and at least once within the last 60 beats.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
** NBP High NBP The measured NBP value is above the high
alarm limit.
s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the
systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed
the limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** NBP Low NBP The measured NBP value is below the low
alarm limit.
s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the
systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed
the limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
* Non-Sustain VT ECG/Arrhythmia A run of Vs having a ventricular HR>V-Tach
HR limit, but lasting for less than the V-Tach
Run limit has been detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
*OtherMonAlarm
** OtherMon Alarm
*** OtherMon Alarm
another assigned
monitor
Another monitor used for the patient is in an
alarm condition. Check the detailed alarm
information at the Information Center.
yellow or red alarm lamp and alarm
tone
* Pacer Not Capt ECG/Arrhythmia
(paced patients
only)
A missed beat with a pace pulse was detected. numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
* Pacer Not Pacing ECG/Arrhythmia
(paced patients
only)
A missed beat without a pace pulse was
detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
Alarm Message From Condition Indication
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
68
* Pair PVCs ECG/Arrhythmia A non-ventricular contraction, followed by two
ventricular contractions, followed by a non-
ventricular contraction has been detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
* Pause ECG/Arrhythmia No beat detected for a period greater than the
pause threshold.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
*** <Press Label>
Disconnect
PRESS The pressure is non-pulsatile and the mean
pressure is continuously less than 10 mmHg
(1.3 kPa). This alarm occurs only with arterial
pres su re s (P, AB P, ART, A o, BA P, FA P, PA P,
UAP, P1, P2, P3, P4).
numeric flashes, red alarm lamp,
alarm tone
*** <Press Label> High PRESS The measured pressure value is above the
extreme high alarm limit.
s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the
systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed
the limit.
numeric flashes, high limit is
highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm
tone
** <Press Label> High PRESS The measured pressure value is above the high
alarm limit.
s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the
systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed
the limit.
numeric flashes, high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
*** <Press Label> Low PRESS The measured pressure value is below the
extreme low alarm limit.
s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the
systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed
the limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm
tone
** <Press Label> Low PRESS The measured pressure value is below the low
alarm limit.
s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the
systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed
the limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** Pulse High PRESS, SpO2The pulse rate has exceeded the high alarm
limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** Pulse Low PRESS, SpO2The pulse rate has dropped below the low
alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
* PVCs/min High ECG/Arrhythmia More premature ventricular contractions have
been detected in a minute than the limit.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
** QTc High ECG/QT QTc value has exceeded the QTc high limit for
more than 5 minutes
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** ΔQTc High ECG/QT QTc value has exceeded the QTc high limit
for more than 5 minutes
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
* R-ON-T PVCs ECG/Arrhythmia For HR <100, a PVC with R-R interval < 1/3
the average interval followed by a
compensatory pause of 1.25 x average R-R
interval or two such Vs without compensatory
pause occurring within 5 minutes of each other.
(When HR >100, 1/3 R-R interval is too short
for detection.).
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
** RR High RESP The respiration rate has exceeded the high
alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
Alarm Message From Condition Indication
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
69
** RR Low RESP The respiration rate has dropped below the low
alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
* Run PVCs High ECG/Arrhythmia A run of PVCs greater than 2 was detected. numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
** <SO₂ Label> High SvO2/SO2The the measured intravascular oxygen
saturation has exceeded the high limit.
numeric flashes and high alarm
limit is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone
** <SO₂ Label> Low SvO2/SO2The measured intravascular oxygen saturation
has fallen below the low limit.
numeric flashes and low alarm limit
is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** <SpO₂ Label> High SpO2The arterial oxygen saturation has exceeded the
high alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** <SpO₂ Label> Low SpO2The arterial oxygen saturation has fallen below
the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** ST Multi <n>,<n> ECG/ST Two contiguous ST leads <n> and <n> have
exceeded elevation or depression limits for
more than 60 seconds. The limit violations for
both leads must be with respect to same limit;
either both above the high limit or both below
the low limit.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** ST Multi
at Information Center
ECG/ST The ST depression or elevation is outside of
the limit in two or more leads. Check on the
monitor
(on monitor) numeric flashes,
yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone
** STE <n>,<n> ECG/ST Two contiguous leads <n> and <n> are above
their respective STE limits
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** ST-<n> High ECG/ST The ST elevation in lead <n> is higher than the
limit. Lead is not contiguous with any other
lead.
numeric flashes and high alarm
limit is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone
** ST-<n> Low ECG/ST The ST depression in lead <n> is lower than
the limit. Lead is not contiguous with any other
lead.
numeric flashes and low alarm limit
is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
* SVT ECG/Arrhythmia A run of supraventricular beats greater than the
SVT run limit has been detected and the HR
has exceeded the SVT HR limit.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
*** Tachy xxx > yy ECG The tachycardia limit has been exceeded numeric flashes and alarm limit is
highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm
tone
*** Tachy/P xxx>yy
or
*** Tachy xxx > yy
Press, SpO2, ECG The tachycardia limit has been exceeded. xxx
denotes the highest measured value; yy is the
tachycardia limit.
numeric flashes, alarm limit is
highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm
tone
** Tblood High C.O. The blood temperature value has exceeded the
high alarm limit.
numeric flashes, high alarm limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** Tblood Low C.O. The blood temperature value has fallen below
the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes, low alarm limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
Alarm Message From Condition Indication
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
70
** tcpO₂ High
** tcpCO₂ High
tcGas The tcpO2 or tcpCO2 value has exceeded the
high alarm limit.
numeric flashes, high alarm limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** tcpO₂ Low
** tcpCO₂ Low
tcGas The tcpO2 or tcpCO2 value has fallen below
the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes, low alarm limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
* Tele Alarm
** Tele Alarm
*** Tele Alarm
an assigned
telemetry device
A telemetry device used for the patient is in an
alarm condition. Check the detailed alarm
information at the Information Center.
yellow or red alarm lamp and alarm
tone
** <Temp Label> High TEMP The temperature has exceeded the high alarm
limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** <Temp Label> Low TEMP The temperature has fallen below the low alarm
limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
*T-Mon Alarm
** T-Mon Alarm
*** T-Mon Alarm
an assigned
transport monitor
A transport monitor used for the patient is in
an alarm condition. Check the detailed alarm
information at the Information Center.
yellow or red alarm lamp and alarm
tone
** TOFcnt High NMT TOFcnt value has exceeded the high alarm
limit
numeric flashes and high limit is
highlighted, yellow alarm lamp,
alarm tone
* Vent Bigeminy ECG/Arrhythmia A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V (N =
supraventricular beat, V = ventricular beat) was
detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
*** Vent Fib/Tach ECG A fibrillatory waveform for 4 consecutive
seconds was detected.
numeric flashes, red alarm lamp,
alarm tone
* Vent Rhythm
** Vent Rhythm
ECG/Arrhythmia A dominant rhythm of adjacent Vs > vent
rhythm limit and ventricular HR < VTach HR
limit was detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
* Vent Trigeminy ECG/Arrhythmia A dominant rhythm of N, N, V, N, N, V (N =
supraventricular beat, V = ventricular beat) was
detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp,
short yellow audible alarm
*** VTach ECG, Arrhythmia Ventricular tachycardia has been detected
(Consecutive PVCs exceed V-Tach Run limit
and HR exceeds V-Tach HR limit).
numeric flashes, red alarm lamp,
alarm tone
** VueLink Alarm
*** VueLink Alarm
at Information Center
VueLink A yellow (**) or red (***) patient alarm is
present on the VueLink module. Check the
monitor display for more detailed alarm
information.
(on monitor) yellow or red alarm
lamp; the alarm text is defined by
the VueLink device driver
Alarm Message From Condition Indication
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
71
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
If an INOP interrupts monitoring and alarm detection, the measurement numeric will be replaced
by -?-. If an INOP may lead to unreliable measurement values, a ?appears next to the numeric.
The measurement labels and abbreviations for pressure, temperature and SpO2 INOP messages are
explained in the individual measurement chapters.
Monitor INOPs
INOP Message, Indication What to do
Bad MSL
INOP tone
1) An MMS with an incompatible software revision is connected to the monitor. This combination
does not allow monitoring, OR
2) You cannot use this combination of monitor, MMS and cable. Switch off the monitor and contact
your service personnel.
Central: Tele Only
INOP tone
System connectivity via telemetry device is limited (No alarms, only local numerics) when in
companion mode and host monitor does not have system connectivity. Only telemetry device
parameters can be displayed at central station.
Check Alarm Lamps
INOP tone
Perform a visual check of the alarm lamp to establish whether there is a problem. Contact your service
personnel to check the internal connections to the alarm lamps.
Check DrugSettings
INOP tone
There was a problem loading the drug settings. Check that the settings are complete and correct.
!!Check ECG Source
Yellow tone
The telemetry device and the monitor both have valid ECG signals. Unpair the telemetry device and
the monitor if they are no longer used for the same patient.
!! Check Equipment
INOP tone/Yellow tone
There is an equipment status dispute relating to one or more of the devices assigned to this patient. See
the Equipment window for details.
Check Flex Texts
INOP tone
Check the names of the monitor menus, for example the labels for screens, profiles, event or trend
group names, before you resume monitoring. If they are unexpected, there may be a problem with the
monitor software. Contact your service personnel.
Check Keyboard
INOP tone
Perform a visual and functional check of the keyboard. Contact your service personnel.
Check Main Board 2
INOP tone
There is a problem with the second main board in the monitor. Contact your service personnel.
Check Monitor Func
INOP tone
Potential problem with alarm lamps, display or interfaces detected. Contact your service personnel.
Check Monitor Temp
INOP tone
The temperature inside the monitor is too high. Check that the monitor ventilation is not obstructed.
If the situation continues, contact your service personnel.
Check Mouse
INOP tone
Perform a visual and functional check of the mouse input device. Contact your service personnel.
Check MSL Voltage
INOP tone
There is a problem with the voltage of the Measurement Link (MSL). Contact your service personnel.
Check Network Conf
INOP tone
The monitor is receiving network topology information from more than one source, e.g. the Database
Server and an Application Server. Contact your service personnel.
!! Check Pairing
Yellow tone
There is a problem with device pairing. Check that the monitor and telemetry device are correctly
paired.
!!Check Patient ID
Yellow tone
There is a mismatch between patient data in two connected devices. Resolve the mismatch to allow
settings and data synchronization.
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
72
Check Screen Res.
INOP tone
The Screen you have selected uses a resolution which is not supported by the display. The monitor will
show a generic Screen instead until you select a different Screen.
Contact your service personnel if you want the Screen deleted from the Profile(s) to avoid this in
future.
Check Settings
INOP tone
If this INOP appears, check the monitor and patient settings before you resume monitoring. If the
settings are unexpected, there may be a problem with the monitor software. Contact your service
personnel.
Check SpeedPoint
INOP tone
Perform a visual and functional check of the SpeedPoint input device. Contact your service personnel.
Check Touch Input
INOP tone
Perform a visual and functional check of the touch input device. Contact your service personnel.
Check Waves
INOP tone
The options purchased with this monitor may not support the number of waves required to show the
selected Screen, so some waves or high resolution trends are missing from the Screen. Select a
different Screen with fewer waves.
Contact your service personnel if you want the Screen deleted from the Profile(s) to avoid this in
future.
Chk ECG Sync Cable
INOP tone
The ECG Sync is detecting an invalid signal, or the ECG Sync cable is disconnected.
Chk IndepDsp Cable The monitor cannot communicate with the D80 Intelligent Display. Check the MSL coupling cable.
The end with the gray connector must be connected to the Intelligent Display.
Chk <Measurement
Label>Settings
Synchronization of the settings for the measurement cited, has failed. Check that settings are
appropriate for your patient.
Chk MSL Connection
INOP tone
Check that the MSL cable is properly connected. If this is the case, try using another MSL cable, to
check if your cable is defective. If this does not help, the device connected via the MSL cable may be
defective, contact your service personnel.
Internal.Comm.Malf
INOP tone
There is a problem with I2C Bus communication in the monitor. Contact your service personnel.
MCC Reversed
INOP tone
The MSL coupling cable is reversed. Connect the end with the gray connector to the Intelligent
Display.
MCC Unsupported
INOP tone
An MSL coupling cable has been connected to a device which does not support MSL coupling.
Meas. Deactivated An X2 or MP5 has been connected to a host monitor (companion mode) and all derived
measurements have been deactivated and/or measurements with a label conflict. The measurements
can only be reactivated by disconnecting the measurement device from the host monitor.
!!More Bed Alarms
!!!More Bed Alarms
at Information Center
The monitor is associated with a telemetry device and is sending data to the Information Center via
the telemetry device. There are currently more alarms at the bedside than can be transmitted to the
Information Center.
More INOPs
!! More INOPs
!!! More INOPs
There is more than one technical alarm of the corresponding severity active on the devices that
monitor this patient. For details check the information displayed at the Information Center.
MSL Power High The power consumption of the devices connected to the Measurement Link (MSL) cable is too high.
If this situation continues, the MSL will be switched off. Contact your service personnel.
MSL Power Off
INOP tone
The power consumption of the devices connected to the Measurement Link (MSL) cable was too high
for too long and the MSL has been switched off. Contact your service personnel.
MSL Power Overload
INOP tone
The power consumption of the devices connected to the Measurement Link (MSL) cable is much too
high or there has been a short circuit. The MSL has been switched off. Contact your service personnel.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
73
No Central Monit.
INOP tone
There is a problem with the communication to the network. Central monitoring is currently not
possible (no patient alarms or information). Check the connection. In case the connection is via a
telemetry device, the current telemetry use model does not support central monitoring. Contact your
service personnel.
No ECG at Central The ECG measured with the monitor ECG is not being sent to the Information Center via the
telemetry device.
OtherMon INOP
!! OtherMon INOP
!!! OtherMon INOP
Another monitor assigned to the patient (e.g. a transport monitor) is in an INOP condition. Check the
detailed INOP information at the Information Center and resolve the INOP condition(s) at the other
monitor.
Rem.AlarmDev.Malf.
INOP tone
There is a problem with the connection to the remote alert device. Contact your service personnel to
check the remote alert device and its connections.
Settings Malfunc.
INOP tone
The monitor cannot use the predefined settings for monitoring. Contact your service personnel.
Speaker Malfunct.
INOP tone
Contact your service personnel to check the speaker and the connection to the speaker.
SRR Incompatible
INOP tone
The short range radio component has compatibility problems. Contact your service personnel.
SRR Interference
INOP tone
The short range radio connection has interference from another device. Try using another channel.
SRR Invalid Chan
INOP tone
The channel configuration of the Short Range Radio is invalid. Check channel and channel mask
configuration.
SRR Malfunction
INOP tone
Malfunction in the short range radio device. If the INOP persists contact your service personnel.
TAAP Disabled
INOP tone
The currently selected telemetry configuration on the monitor does not allow connection of telemetry
devices to the monitor.
Tele Config Unsupp
INOP tone
Telemetry Workflow configuration not supported. Check revision and configuration of monitor and
central.
Tele ECG Malfunct.
Numeric is displayed with a -?-
INOP tone
Contact your service personnel.
The ECG in the Telemetry device is faulty.
Tele Equip Malf
INOP tone
The telemetry device has a malfunction. Disconnect and reconnect the telemetry device. If the INOP
reappears, replace the telemetry device.
Tele Incompatible SRR-enabled telemetry device is not supported by this central software revision. Please check
configuration.
Tele INOP
!! Tele INOP
!!! Tele INOP
A telemetry device assigned to the patient is in an INOP condition. Check the detailed INOP
information at the Information Center and resolve the INOP condition(s) at the telemetry device.
Tele Unsupported
INOP tone
This telemetry device is not supported for direct connection to the monitor.
TimeExpired:<Timer
Label>
INOP tone
The time has expired for the timer indicated in the INOP text. Clearing the timer clears the INOP.
T-Mon INOP
!! T-Mon INOP
!!! T-Mon INOP
INOP tone
A transport monitor assigned to the patient is in an INOP condition. Check the detailed INOP
information at the Information Center and resolve the INOP condition(s) at the transport monitor.
TransportEquipment The equipment is ready for transport. See the Equipment window for details.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
74
Battery INOPs
Unsupported LAN
INOP tone
There is a problem with the communication to the network and central monitoring is currently not
possible. Check the connection. If the INOP persists, switch off the monitor and contact your service
personnel.
Unsupported WLAN There is a problem with the communication to the network and central monitoring is currently not
possible. Check the wireless connection. If the INOP persists, switch off the monitor and contact your
service personnel.
User I/F Malfunct.
INOP tone
Perform a visual and functional check of all the monitor input devices. Contact your service personnel.
WLAN OutOf Range The monitor has been moved out of WLAN range. The connection to the Information Center has
been lost. Move the monitor back into the WLAN coverage area.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
INOP Message, Indication What to do
Batt 1 Missing
Batt 2 Missing
INOP tone
During this INOP, alarms cannot
be paused or switched off.
The monitor requires two batteries but can detect only one battery. Insert the missing battery
immediately.
Batt Empty
!!Batt Empty
!!!Batt Empty
INOP tone, battery LED flashes
During this INOP, alarms cannot
be paused or switched off.
The estimated remaining battery-powered operating time is less than 10 minutes. Replace the battery
immediately.
If the condition persists and the monitor is not connected to mains power, this INOP is re-issued two
minutes after you acknowledge it.
Batt Extensn Malf
INOP tone
There is a hardware error in the Battery Extension. Contact your service personnel.
Batt Incompat.
INOP tone
The battery cannot be used with this monitor. Replace with the correct battery (M4607A).
Batt Low
INOP tone
The estimated battery-powered operating time remaining is less than 20 minutes.
Batt Malfunction
INOP tone, battery LED flashes
During this INOP, alarms cannot
be paused or switched off unless
the monitor is connected to
mains power.
The monitor cannot determine the battery status. If this INOP persists, replace the faulty battery. If
the condition persists and the monitor is not connected to mains power, this INOP is re-issued two
minutes after you acknowledge it.
Place the battery in a different monitor or in a battery charger. If the same INOP is shown, contact
your service personnel.
Batteries Empty
!!Batteries Empty
!!!Batteries Empty
Batt 1 Empty
!!Batt 1 Empty
!!!Batt 1 Empty
Batt 2 Empty
!!Batt 2 Empty
!!!Batt 2 Empty
INOP tone, battery LED flashes
During this INOP, alarms cannot
be paused or switched off.
The estimated remaining battery-powered operating time of the indicated battery or batteries is less
than 10 minutes. Replace the batteries immediately.
If the condition persists and the monitor is not connected to mains power, this INOP is re-issued two
minutes after you acknowledge it.
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
75
Batteries Incompat
Batt 1 Incompat.
Batt 2 Incompat.
INOP tone
The indicated battery or batteries cannot be used with this monitor. Replace with the correct battery or
batteries as specified in this book.
Batteries Low
Batt 1 Low
Batt 2 Low
INOP tone
The estimated battery-powered operating time remaining is less than 20 minutes.
Batteries Malfunct
Batt 1 Malfunction
Batt 2 Malfunction
INOP tone, battery LED flashes
During this INOP, alarms cannot
be paused or switched off unless
the monitor is connected to
mains power.
The monitor cannot determine the battery status. If this INOP persists, replace the faulty battery or
batteries. If the condition persists and the monitor is not connected to mains power, this INOP is re-
issued two minutes after you acknowledge it.
Place the batteries in a different monitor or in a battery charger. If the same INOP is shown, contact
your service personnel.
Charge Batt 1 now
Charge Batt 2 now
INOP tone
Battery must be charged. Connect the monitor to mains power or exchange the battery.
Charger Malfunct
INOP tone, battery LED may
flash
There is a problem with the battery charger in the monitor. Connect the monitor to mains power and
contact your service personnel.
Check Batt Temp
INOP tone
The temperature of one or both batteries is too high. Check that ventilation openings (if applicable)
are not blocked and monitor is not exposed to heat.
Chk MSL Connection Check the MSL connection between X2/MP2 and the battery extension for damage or loose
connections. Check also if a second X1 or X2 has been connected accidentally (e.g. in companion
mode).
ExtBat Empty
!!ExtBat Empty
!!!ExtBat Empty
The estimated battery-powered operating remaining time is less than 10 minutes. Replace the battery in
the battery extension immediately.
ExtBat Incompat. The battery in the battery extension cannot be used.
ExtBat Low The estimated battery-powered operating time remaining is less than 20 minutes.
ExtBat Malfunction The monitor cannot determine the status of the battery in the battery extension. If this INOP persists,
replace the faulty battery in the battery extension. If the condition persists and the monitor is not
connected to mains power or a host monitor, this INOP is re-issued two minutes after you
acknowledge it.
ExtBat Missing There is no battery in the Battery Extension
!! Insert Battery
Severe yellow INOP tone
During this INOP, alarms cannot
be paused or switched off.
X2/MP2 only: There is no battery in the battery compartment. You cannot operate the monitor on
AC mains while the battery compartment is open (not sealed with a battery). Load a battery
immediately.
MSL Power High The power consumption of the devices connected to the Battery Extension is too high. If this
situation continues, the Battery Extension will be switched off. Contact your service personnel.
MSL Power Off The power consumption of the devices connected to the Battery Extension was too high for too long.
The Battery Extension has been switched off. Contact your service personnel.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
76
MMS, MMS Extensions and FMS INOPs
Display INOPs
ECG, Arrhythmia, QT and ST INOPs
INOP Message, Indication What to do
MMS Ext. Unplugged
INOP tone
The MMS extension has been disconnected from the Multi-Measurement Module.
MMS Ext. Unpowered
INOP tone
The MMS extension cannot operate while the Multi-Measurement Module is running on battery
power.
MMS Ext. Unsupp
INOP tone
The MMS extension is not supported by your monitor. Contact your service personnel.
MMS Ext.Equip Malf
INOP tone
Loss of communication between the Multi-Measurement Module and the MMS extension. Contact
your service personnel.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
Indep.Dsp Malfunc. There is a problem with the Independent Display. Check the MSL coupling cable then contact your
service personnel.
Indep.Dsp NotSupp. The monitor does not support a second main display. The monitor software is incompatible. Contact
your service personnel.
Intell.Dsp Malf. There is a problem with the Intelligent Display. Check the MSL coupling cable then contact your
service personnel.
Intell.Dsp Missing The monitor has lost contact with the connected Intelligent Display. Contact your service personnel.
Intell.Dsp Unsupp. The monitor does not support the connected Intelligent Display. The monitor software is
incompatible.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
C Lead Off
HR Numeric is replaced by -?-
for 10 seconds.
INOP tone
The C electrode (AAMI: V electrode) has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been
changed. Reattach the electrode or select New Lead Setup in the Setup ECG menu to confirm the
new lead set.
Cannot Analyze ECG The arrhythmia algorithm cannot reliably analyze the ECG data. Check the ECG signal quality of the
selected primary and secondary leads. If necessary, improve lead position or reduce patient motion.
If you have arrhythmia analysis on, and you are not getting a reliable HR because the signal is below a
minimum amplitude, unstable, or contains artifact, and you have tried to improve the system
performance by choosing another lead and changing electrodes, you should consider turning
arrhythmia analysis off.
Cannot Analyze QT The QT algorithm cannot generate a valid QT value for more than 10 minutes, or 1 minute in the
initial phase.
Cannot Analyze ST The ST algorithm cannot generate a valid ST value. Possible causes are large variations in the measured
ST values for consecutive beats, or ventricular paced beats. Review the ECG signal quality and the ST
measurement points.
If the patient has a ventricular pacemaker, ST analysis is not possible.
Cannot Analyze STE The STE algorithm cannot generate valid ST elevation values. Possible causes are large variations in
the measured ST values for consecutive beats, or ventricular paced beats. Review the ECG signal
quality and the ST measurement points.
ECG Equip Malf
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Contact your service personnel.
The ECG hardware is faulty.
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
77
<ECG Lead> Lead Off
!! <ECG Lead> Lead Off
!!! <ECG Lead> Lead Off
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Not all the required leads for ECG monitoring are connected. Check the ECG connections and make
sure that the electrode indicated by <ECG lead> [RA, LA, LL, RL, V or C] electrodes is attached. In
EASI mode, all 5 electrodes must be connected.
ECG Leads Off
!! ECG Leads Off
!!!ECG Leads Off
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Check that all of the required ECG leads are attached, and that none of the electrodes have been
displaced. The INOP may also be caused by a saturated or overloaded ECG amplifier.
ECG Noisy Elec <ECG
Lead>
The ECG signal from the named ECG electrodes [RA, LA, LL, RL, V (or C)] is noisy. Check the ECG
connections and make sure that the electrode indicated is attached.
ECG Noisy Signal
INOP tone
The ECG signal is too noisy. Check that the electrodes are properly placed and have not dried out.
Remove any possible sources of signal noise (such as power cords) from the area around the cable and
the patient.
The ECG signal may be saturated or overloaded.
!!ECG/AR AlarmsOff All ECG alarms have been switched off, or the HR alarm source is not ECG. To resume ECG alarm
generation, switch ECG alarms on or select ECG as the alarm source.
ECG/Arrh AlarmsOff
!!ECG/AR AlarmsOff
All ECG alarms have been switched off, or the HR alarm source is not ECG. To resume ECG alarm
generation, switch ECG alarms on or select ECG as the alarm source.
EcgOut Equip Malf
INOP tone
There is a problem with the device connected to the ECG Out connector. Contact your service
personnel.
LA Lead Off
Numeric is replaced by -?- for
10 seconds.
INOP tone
The LA electrode has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach
the electrode or select New Lead Setup in the Setup ECG menu to confirm the new lead set.
LL Lead Off
Numeric is replaced by -?- for
10 seconds.
INOP tone
The LL electrode has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach the
electrode or select New Lead Setup in the Setup ECG menu to confirm the new lead set.
RA Lead Off
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The RA electrode has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach
the electrode or select New Lead Setup in the Setup ECG menu to confirm the new lead set.
RL Lead Off
Numeric is replaced by -?- for
10 seconds.
INOP tone
The RL electrode has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach
the electrode or select New Lead Setup in the Setup ECG menu to confirm the new lead set.
Some ECG AlarmsOff This message appears (if configured to do so) when the on/off settings of the yellow arrhythmia
alarms differ from the current Profile.
V Lead Off
Numeric is replaced by -?- for
10 seconds.
INOP tone
The V electrode (IEC: C electrode) has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been
changed. Reattach the electrode or select New Lead Setup in the Setup ECG menu to confirm the
new lead set.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
78
Resp INOPs
NBP INOPs
INOP Message, Indication What to do
Resp Equip Malf
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Contact your service personnel. The RESP hardware is faulty.
Resp Erratic
Numeric is replaced by -?-
The monitor has detected too many artifacts in the measured Resp signal. Check that the RA and LL
electrodes are correctly attached and have not dried out.
Resp Leads Off
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Not all the required leads for Resp monitoring are attached. Make sure that the RA and LL leads are
attached.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
!! Cuff Not Deflat
!!!Cuff Not Deflat
Numeric is displayed with a -?-
Severe yellow/red INOP tone
During this INOP, alarms cannot
be paused or switched off.
Remove the cuff from the patient. Make sure that the tubing is not kinked or twisted and that the
correct patient category is selected. Try repeating the measurement.
You can silence the INOP, but the INOP message remains visible until the next NBP measurement is
started or the Stop All SmartKey is selected.
[Adult or pediatric patients: The NBP cuff pressure has exceeded 15 mmHg (2 kPa) for more than
3minutes.
Neonatal patients: The NBP cuff pressure has exceeded 5 mmHg (0.7 kPa) for more than 90 seconds.]
!! Cuff Overpress
!!!Cuff Overpress
Numeric displayed with a -?-
Severe yellow/red INOP tone
During this INOP, alarms cannot
be paused or switched off.
The NBP cuff pressure exceeds the overpressure safety limits. Remove the cuff from the patient. Make
sure that the tubing is not kinked or twisted and that the correct patient category is selected. Try
restarting the measurement.
You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains visible until the next measurement is
started or the Stop All SmartKey is selected.
NBP Deactivated
INOP tone
The NBP measurement label in the measurement device has been deactivated by deactivating the label
in the Measurement Selection window. The measurement automatically disappears from the
display. To switch the measurement on again, reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement
Selection window.
NBP Equip Malf
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Remove the cuff from the patient. The NBP hardware is faulty. Contact your service personnel.
You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains visible until the next measurement is
started or the Stop All SmartKey is selected.
NBP Interrupted
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Check the tubing and cuff for leakages or kinks. Check that you are using the correct cuff size and
placement, and that the correct patient category is selected. Try restarting the measurement.
If the INOP occurs repeatedly, contact your service personnel.
You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains visible until the next measurement is
started or the Stop All SmartKey is selected.
This INOP arises when the measurement needed longer than the maximum time for inflation,
deflation or the total measurement.
NBP Measure Failed
Numeric may be displayed with
a-?-
INOP tone
Check that you are using the correct cuff size and placement, and that the correct patient category is
selected. Try restarting the measurement.
You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains visible until the next measurement is
started or the Stop All SmartKey is selected.
Check the condition and suitability of the patient for NBP monitoring. Use another cuff to continue
measuring.
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
79
Temperature INOPs
INOP Message, Indication What to do
T1, T2, T3, T4 INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
Tamb INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
Tart INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
Tcereb INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
Tcore INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
<Temp Label>
Deactivated
INOP tone
A Temp measurement label in the measurement device has been deactivated, either by connecting a
Pressure transducer in the shared Press/Temp socket, or by deactivating the label in the
Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either reconnect a Temp transducer or reactivate the
measurement label in the Measurement Selection window.
<Temp Label> Equip Malf
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Contact your service personnel.
The temperature hardware is faulty.
<Temp Label> Overrange
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Try changing the application site of the transducer.
[The temperature is less than -1°C, or greater than 45°C.]
<Temp Label> Unplugged
INOP tone
A Temp measurement label has been deactivated, either by unplugging a module, or by deactivating
the label in the Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either replug the module or reactivate the measurement label in
the Measurement Selection window.
<Temp
Label>NoTransducer
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Make sure the TEMP probe is connected to the MMS or module.
If you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
Tesoph INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
Tnaso INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
Trect INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
Tskin INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
Ttymp INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
Tven INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
Tvesic INOPs See <Temp Label> INOPs
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
80
SpO2 INOPs
INOP Message, Indication What to do
<SpO₂ Label> Chk Sensor The condition of the signal at the SpO2 sensor is not as expected. Accuracy may be compromised.
Check proper application of the sensor in accordance with the Instructions for Use. If the INOP
persists, consider exchanging the sensor.
<SpO₂ Label> Deactivated
INOP tone
The SpO2 measurement label in the measurement device has been deactivated by deactivating the label
in the Measurement Selection window. The measurement automatically disappears from the
display. To switch the measurement on again, reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement
Selection window.
<SpO₂ Label> Equip Malf
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The MMS or module is faulty. Unplug and replug the MMS or module. If the INOP persists, contact
your service personnel.
<SpO₂ Label> Erratic
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Check the sensor placement. Try another adapter cable and sensor. If the INOP persists, contact your
service personnel.
<SpO₂ Label>
Extd.Update
Numeric is replaced by -?-
(questionable numeric)
The update period of displayed values is extended due to an NBP measurement on the same limb or
an excessively noisy signal.
<SpO₂ Label> Low Perf
Numeric is replaced by -?-
(questionable numeric)
Accuracy may be compromised due to very low perfusion. Stimulate circulation at sensor site. If INOP
persists, change the measurement site.
<SpO₂ Label> No Pulse
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Check the perfusion at measurement site. If necessary, stimulate circulation or change measurement
site. If the INOP is due to NBP measurement on the same limb, wait until the NBP measurement is
finished.
<SpO₂ Label> No Sensor
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Make sure the SpO2 sensor is connected. If the INOP persists, try another adapter cable and sensor. If
you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
<SpO₂ Label> NoisySignal
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Excessive patient movement or electrical interference is causing irregular pulse patterns. Try to reduce
patient movement or to relieve the cable strain on the sensor.
<SpO₂ Label> Poor Signal
Numeric is replaced by -?-
(questionable numeric)
The signal condition of the SpO2 measurement is poor and measurement accuracy may be
compromised. If the INOP persists, consider changing the application site or using another sensor.
<SpO₂ Label> Pulse?
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The detectable pulsations of the SpO2 signal are outside the specified pulse rate range.
<SpO₂ Label> Searching
Numeric unavailable
SpO2 is analyzing the patient signal to derive Pulse, SpO2 and Perf values. Please wait until the search
analysis is complete.
<SpO₂ Label> Sensor Malf
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The SpO2 sensor or adapter cable is faulty. Try another adapter cable and sensor. If the INOP persists,
contact your service personnel.
<SpO₂ Label> Sensor Off
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The SpO2 sensor is not properly applied to the patient. Apply the sensor following the instructions
supplied by the manufacturer.
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
81
Pressure INOPs
<SpO₂ Label>
Unkn.Sensor
Numeric is replaced by -?-
The connected sensor or adapter cable is not supported by the SpO2 measurement. Use only specified
sensors and cables.
<SpO₂ Label> Unplugged
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
An SpO2 measurement label has been deactivated, either by unplugging a module, or by deactivating
the label in the Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either replug the module or reactivate the measurement label in
the Measurement Selection window.
<SpO₂ Label> Upgrade
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Numeric is unavailable
The SpO2 measurement is currently in upgrade mode. Monitoring is not possible in this mode.
<SpO₂ Label>Interference
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
There is too much interference, caused by a high level of ambient light and/or electrical interference.
Cover the sensor to minimize ambient light. If the INOP persists, make sure that the sensor cable is
not damaged or positioned too close to power cables.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
INOP Message, Indication What to do
ABP INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
Ao INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
ART INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
BAP INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
CPP Chk Sources
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Not all measurements or values required to perform the calculation are available. Check the
measurement sources.
CPP Chk Units
Numeric is replaced by -?-
The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this calculation. Check the unit settings.
CPP Disabled CPP has been disabled, either in the setup in Configuration mode, or by loading settings with CPP
disabled. This can happen when changing from a pediatric or neonatal profile to an adult profile, as the
default profile settings have the CPP measurement disabled in the adult profile and enabled in the
pediatric and neonatal profiles. Enable CPP in the current profile to clear the INOP.
CVP INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
FAP INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
IC1 / IC2 INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
ICP INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
LAP INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
P / P1 / P2 / P3 / P4 INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
PAP INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
PPV Bad <Press Label>
Signal
The arterial pressure source selected for PPV is not providing a pulsatile signal.
PPV Bad Signal
at Information Center
The arterial pressure source selected for PPV is not providing a pulsatile signal.
PPV Chk Sources The arterial pressure source selected for PPV is unplugged or switched off. When this INOP has
displayed for 1 minute PPV will be switched off.
<Press Label> Artifact
Numeric questionable
A non-physiological event (flush or blood sample) is detected. A resulting limit alarm or non-pulsatile
INOP will be suppressed.
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
82
<Press Label> Deactivated
INOP tone
A Pressure measurement label in the measurement device or extension has been deactivated, either by
connecting a Temp transducer in the shared Press/Temp socket, or by deactivating the label in the
Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either reconnect a Pressure transducer or reactivate the
measurement label in the Measurement Selection window.
<Press Label> Equip Malf
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Contact your service personnel.
The pressure hardware is faulty.
<Press Label> No Pulse
Pulse numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
This INOP can only arise when a pressure is selected as the pulse source. It occurs when the pulse rate
being measured is less than 25 beats per minute or the amplitude is less than three mmHg.
Check the catheter and connections to the patient.
<Press Label> No
Transducer
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Make sure that the pressure transducer is connected to the measurement device or module.
If you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
<Press Label> Noisy
Signal
Pulse numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
This INOP can only arise when a pressure is selected as the pulse source. It occurs when the pulse
detector finds a pulse rate above 350 bpm. This is usually caused by movement artifact or electrical
interference.
<Press Label> Overrange
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Make sure that the measurement has been properly prepared and zeroed, and that the transducer is
level with the heart. If this INOP persists, try another transducer.
Possible causes are a measured pressure outside the allowed pressure range, or a broken wire to the
transducer.
<Press Label> Reduce
Size
Increase the scale for the pressure wave.
<Press Label> Unplugged
INOP tone
A Pressure measurement label has been deactivated, either by unplugging a module, or by deactivating
the label in the Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either replug the module or reactivate the measurement label in
the Measurement Selection window.
<Press Label>
Zero+Check Cal
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Perform a zero and check the calibration of the transducer.
RAP INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
UAP INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
UVP INOPs See <Press Label> INOPs
INOP Message, Indication What to do
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
83
CO2 INOPs
INOP Message, Indication What to do
CO₂ Auto Zero
Numeric is replaced by -?-
if the Autozero lasts >15 sec,
INOP tone sounds.
The automatic zero calibration is in progress. This typically takes 10 seconds. During this time the CO2
values may not be updated, or they may be replaced by -?-. Wait until the zero calibration is complete
to resume monitoring.
CO₂ Cal Failed
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Make sure that the Cal cell was changed between CAL1 and CAL2. Repeat the calibration. If the
INOP reappears, try another transducer. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
CO₂ Cal Mode
CO2 numeric displays current
CO2 value for accuracy check
Currently no calibration is running. Accuracy can be checked by placing the transducer on the two cells
of the calstick and starting calibration. To start monitoring, leave Cal. Mode.
CO₂ Cal Running
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Wait until calibration is finished.
CO₂ Check Cal
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The CO2 value is outside the measurement range. Perform an accuracy check for both calstick cells
and, if necessary, recalibrate the transducer.
CO₂ Chk Adapter
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Check that the sensor is connected to the airway adapter, clean the airway adapter, if necessary.
Perform a zero calibration. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
CO₂ Deactivated
INOP tone
The CO2 measurement label in the measurement device has been deactivated by deactivating the label
in the Measurement Selection window. The measurement automatically disappears from the
display. To switch the measurement on again, reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement
Selection window.
CO₂ Equip Malf
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The Measurement Extension is faulty. Unplug and replug the Multi-Measurement Module with
Extension. If you are using the mainstream method, unplug and replug the transducer or try another
transducer. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
CO₂ No Sensor
from M3014A
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
There is no CO2 sensor connected. If you silence this INOP the CO2 measurement will be switched
off.
CO₂ No Tubing
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Either the sample line is disconnected, or an incorrect line is attached. Check the connection. If
necessary, connect another sample line (Use only the approved accessories).
If you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
!! CO₂ Occlusion
!!! CO₂ Occlusion
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The sample line or exhaust tube is blocked. Check the tubing, then disconnect and reconnect the
sample line. If the INOP persists, connect a new sample line.
CO₂ Overrange
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The CO2 value is higher than the measurement range. If you suspect a false high value, contact your
service personnel.
CO₂ Pump Off
Numeric is replaced by -?-.
The pump has been switched off for fifteen minutes. To switch it on again, select Pump On in the
Setup CO₂ menu.
CO₂ Purging
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The Filterline is being purged to remove an occlusion in the line or airway adapter. If the occlusion is
removed, the INOP will disappear. If not, the INOP CO₂ Occlusion is displayed.
CO₂ Sens Warmup
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Microstream CO2: INOP tone
Mainstream CO2: no INOP tone
Wait until the sensor reaches operating temperature and the INOP disappears.
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
84
C.O. INOPs
CO₂ Upgrade FW
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The software in the Measurement Extension does not match the software in the MMS. Contact your
service personnel.
CO₂ Wait Cal2
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Calibration on the first calstick cell is complete. Place the transducer on the other calstick cell and start
the CAL2 calibration cycle.
CO₂ Zero Failed
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
An error occurred during the last zero calibration. Check the airway adapter and clean, if necessary.
Perform another zero calibration. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
CO₂Change Scale The CO2 wave is clipped. Select a more appropriate wave scale to display the whole wave.
CO₂NoTransducer
from mainstream CO2 (except
M3014A)
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
There is no CO2 transducer connected. If you replace the transducer, the new transducer must be
calibrated. If you silence this INOP the CO2 measurement will be switched off.
CO₂Zero Running Wait until zero calibration is finished.
CO₂ZeroRequired
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Perform zero calibration for the CO2 sensor. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
IPI Check Pat. Age For Adult patients: a date of birth has been entered that results in a calculated patient age of less than
12 years. Enter correct date of birth or, if patient is pediatric, correct patient category.
For pediatric patients: either no date of birth has been entered (it is required for calculation of IPI for
pediatric patients) or the calculated age is below 1 year or above 12 years. Check that correct date of
birth is entered.
IPI Check Sources The IPI numeric cannot be provided as one or more of the measurement sources required for IPI is
not available. Check availability of etCO2, awRR, SpO2, and pulse rate.
IPI Neo Patient ? Check patient category. The IPI numeric is not available for neonatal patients.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
INOP Message, Indication What to do
C.O. Deactivated
INOP tone
The Cardiac Output measurement label in the measurement device has been deactivated by
deactivating the label in the Measurement Selection window. The measurement automatically
disappears from the display. To switch the measurement on again, reactivate the measurement label in
the Measurement Selection window.
C.O. Equip Malf
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
There is a problem with the C.O. hardware. Contact your service personnel.
C.O. Unplugged
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Plug in the C.O. module. Silencing this INOP switches off the measurement.
CCI No BSA
CCI numeric unavailable
INOP tone
CCI cannot be calculated because the patient's body surface area is unknown. Enter the patient weight
and height to provide the BSA for CCI calculation.
CCO BadPressSignal
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The arterial pressure wave can currently not be used for pulse contour calculation for CCO or CCI
measurement. Possible causes are air bubbles in the tubing or a physiological condition, for example
severe arrhythmia.
CCO No Calibration
Numeric is replaced by -?-
The CCO measurement is currently not calibrated.
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
85
Telemetry INOPs
CCO No <Press Label>
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone may sound
CCO/CCI cannot be calculated. Make sure that the pressure chosen in the Setup CCO menu under
CCO From matches the pressure measured with the arterial catheter for CCO measurement. A
pressure from an external device cannot be used. Select another pressure label, either ABP, Ao, ART,
BA P, FA P, or UAP.
CCO No Press
at Information Center
CCO/CCI cannot be calculated. Make sure that the pressure chosen in the Setup CCO menu under
CCO From matches the pressure measured with the arterial catheter for CCO measurement. A
pressure from an external device cannot be used. Select another pressure label, either ABP, Ao, ART,
BA P, FA P, or UAP.
CCO Not Supported
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
A catheter for transpulmonary C.O. measurements has been unplugged and replaced with a Right
Heart C.O. catheter, or the measurement mode has been changed manually. Silencing this INOP
switches the measurement off.
CCO Overrange
CCI Overrange
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The measured CCO or CCI value is not within the specified range for CCO/CCI measurement.
CCO Press Invalid
at Information Center
The arterial pressure selected for pulse contour calculation for CCO is available but currently invalid.
Make sure the pressure transducer is connected and the zero calibration is valid.
CCO <Press Label> Invalid
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone may sound
The arterial pressure selected for pulse contour calculation for CCO is available but currently invalid.
Make sure the pressure transducer is connected and the zero calibration is valid.
CCO PressOverrange
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The mean value of the arterial pressure values used for pulse contour calculation for CCO is below
0mmHg or above 300mmHg.
CCO PulseOverrange
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
The pulse rate of the pressure used for pulse contour calculation for CCO is below 30 bpm or above
240 bpm.
CCO Recalibrate
Numeric is replaced by -?-
The most recent CCO or CCI calibration was made over 8 hours ago or the arterial pressure
measurement used for CCO calculation has been zeroed after the CCO calibration was performed.
You should recalibrate CCO or CCI with transpulmonary C.O. measurements at least every 8 hours or
when the hemodynamic condition of the patient has changed. The pressure measurement must be
zeroed before a CCO calibration.
CCO/Tbl NoTransduc
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
No transducer attached to the module or catheter disconnected.
Tblood Overrange
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Tblood out of range 17°C - 43°C.
TbloodNoTransducer
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
No transducer attached to the module or catheter disconnected.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
INOP Message, Indication What to do
Check ECG Settings
INOP tone
Synchronization of ECG settings between the monitor and Information Center has failed. Check that
the ECG settings in use are appropriate.
!!Check ECG Source Both the telemetry device and the monitor have valid ECG signals
Chk SpO₂T Settings
INOP tone
Synchronization of SpO2T settings between the monitor and Information Center has failed. Check
that the SpO2T settings in use are appropriate.
Invalid Leadset The leadset plugged in cannot be used with the telemetry device.
Leadset Unplugged The leadset has been unplugged from the telemetry device.
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
86
Cableless Measurement Device INOPs
No ECG Source A telemetry device is paired with the monitor but the Information Center is not detecting a valid ECG
signal from either of them.
!! Repl. Tele Batt
!!!Repl. Tele Batt
Severe yellow/red INOP tone
During this INOP, alarms cannot
be paused or switched off.
The battery in the telemetry device is almost empty and must be replaced.
Tele Battery Low The battery in the Telemetry device is low and must be replaced soon.
!!Tele Disconnect
!!!Tele Disconnect
Severe yellow/red INOP tone
Telemetry transceiver was disconnected or short range radio link was lost.
For cable connections; check Telemetry interface, cable connection and setup.
For short range radio connections: if the telemetry transceiver has not moved out-of-range, check for
interference sources close to the monitor (bluetooth devices, DECT phones, cellular phones,
microwaves, etc.). If this INOP persists, ask your service personnel to survey the interference sources.
!! Tele INOP
!!! Tele INOP
Severe yellow/red INOP tone
Check for further details at the Information Center or in the Telemetry Data window on the monitor.
Tele Sync Unsupp.
INOP tone
The MMS in use does not support synchronization of ECG and SpO2 settings between the monitor
and central station after a telemetry device has been paired. Use an MMS with revision E.0 or above.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
INOP Message, Indication What to do
cl NBP Batt Empty
!!cl NBP BattEmpty
!!!cl NBP BatEmpty
Corresponding INOP tone
The remaining battery time of the NBP Pod is below 30 minutes. Change the battery.
cl NBP Batt Incomp
INOP tone
The battery in use with the NBP Pod is incompatible. Replace it with one approved for use with the
NBP Pod.
cl NBP Batt Low
INOP tone
The remaining battery time of the NBP Pod is below 2 hours.
cl NBP Batt Malf
INOP tone
There is a malfunction in the NBP Pod's battery system. Contact your service personnel.
cl NBP Batt Temp
INOP tone
The temperature of the battery in the NBP Pod is critically high. Check that the Pod is not covered or
exposed to a heat source. If the INOP persists, remove the Pod from the patient and contact your
service personnel.
cl NBP Check Batt
INOP tone
The battery in the NBP Pod is nearing the end of its useful life. Only 50 charge/discharge cycles
remain. Contact your service personnel to replace the battery.
cl NBP Disconnect
INOP tone
The NBP Pod has lost the connection to the monitor.
cl NBP No Cradle
INOP tone
The NBP Pod is not in its cradle.
cl NBP Remove
INOP tone
The temperature of the battery in the NBP Pod is too high. Remove the Cableless Measurement
Device from the patient and contact service personnel.
cl NBP Serv Batt
INOP tone
The battery in the NBP Pod has reached the end of its useful life. It can no longer be charged. Contact
your service personnel to replace the battery.
cl SpO₂ Batt Empty
!!cl SpO₂ BatEmpty
!!!cl SpO₂ BtEmpty
Corresponding INOP tone
The remaining battery time of the SpO2 Pod is below 30 minutes. Change the battery.
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
87
cl SpO₂ Batt Incmp
INOP tone
The battery in use with the SpO2 Pod is incompatible. Replace it with one approved for use with the
SpO2 Pod.
cl SpO₂ Batt Low
INOP tone
The remaining battery time of the SpO2 Pod is below 2 hours.
cl SpO₂ Batt Malf
INOP tone
There is a malfunction in the SpO2 Pod's battery system. Contact your service personnel.
cl SpO₂ Batt Temp
INOP tone
The temperature of the battery in the SpO2 Pod is critically high. Check that the Pod is not covered or
exposed to a heat source. If the INOP persists, remove the Pod from the patient and contact your
service personnel.
cl SpO₂ Check Batt
INOP tone
The battery in the SpO2 Pod is nearing the end of its useful life. Only 50 charge/discharge cycles
remain. Contact your service personnel to replace the battery.
cl SpO₂ Disconnect
INOP tone
The SpO2 Pod has lost the connection to the monitor.
cl SpO₂ No Cradle
INOP tone
The SpO2 Pod is not in its cradle.
cl SpO₂ Remove
INOP tone
The temperature of the battery in the SpO2 Pod is too high. Remove the SpO2 Pod from the patient
and contact service personnel.
cl SpO₂ Serv Batt
INOP tone
The battery in the SpO2 Pod has reached the end of its useful life. It can no longer be charged. Contact
your service personnel to replace the battery.
INOP Message, Indication What to do
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs
88
6
89
6Managing Patients and
Equipment
When the monitor is used together with an IntelliVue Information Center, a variety of services are
provided to manage the interconnections between patients, equipment, hospital beds, caregivers, and
so on.
Many services can be used both at the monitor and at the Information Center, resulting in a more
efficient workflow.
Which services are available will depend on which Information Center you have. The Philips
IntelliVue Information Center iX (PIIC iX) provides more services and functionality than the
Philips IntelliVue Information Center (PIIC). In these Instructions for Use, information that is
only valid for one of the Information Centers will be marked with a corresponding side heading, for
example
PIIC iX For a list of the differences between the two Information Centers, see “Information Center
Compatibility” on page 106.
Patient Concepts
For a patient to be part of the system their identification data must be entered into the system. A
patient can then be assigned to a bed, have equipment assigned directly to him, and have a location set
when he is not currently in the bed.
Equipment Concepts
Depending on how equipment is used in your facility, there are various ways to associate devices with
patients, beds or monitors. Equipment usage must be configured appropriately at the Information
Center and the monitoring equipment.
PIIC iX By configuration, equipment can be assigned:
• permanently to a bed,
• on demand to a bed or host monitor, or
• directly to a patient.
The foundation for a particular equipment use model is laid in the configuration settings in the
monitor and the Information Center. Refer to the corresponding configuration guides for further
details.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
90
Additionally there are mechanisms to automatically free up equipment that is no longer used. This
prevents unnecessary patient mismatches when the equipment is used for the next patient and avoids
data of different patients getting mixed.
PIIC iX When connected to PIIC iX, equipment states are tracked by the system. When the equipment is not
assigned to a patient or no patient is admitted at a monitor, the equipment is considered as free
equipment in the system. Equipment that is assigned or has a patient admitted is tracked as used (i.e.
not free) equipment.
The Information Center uses the equipment state (free/not free) to maintain and support workflow
and equipment lists.
Managing Patients
In order to attribute collected measurement data to a specific patient, or assign equipment or a bed to
a specific patient, each patient in the system must be identified. By admitting a patient, you identify
them for the system.
When equipment is freed up (for example by discharging the patient, removing a monitor from a
patient or using End Case) the collection of data is officially ended for this patient and important
settings on the monitor are reset to the defaults.
Admitting a Patient
The monitor displays physiological data and stores it in the trends as soon as a patient is connected.
This lets you monitor a patient who is not yet admitted. It is however important to admit patients
properly so that you can identify your patient on recordings, reports, and networked devices.
During admission you enter data that the monitor needs for safe and accurate operation. For example,
the patient category setting determines the algorithm the monitor uses to process and calculate some
measurements, the safety limits that apply for some measurements, and the alarm limit ranges.
NOTE
It is strongly recommended that the same patient data fields be configured to be mandatory at the
monitor and the Information Center.
When No Patient is Admitted
To admit a patient:
1Select the patient name field or select the Patient Demogr. SmartKey to open the Patient
Demographics window.
2Select Admit Patient.
The Enter Demographics window appears. You can enter data as normal, using the keyboard or a
barcode scanner, or, with PIIC iX, use the Find Patient key to search for patient data in connected
systems as described in “Using "Find Patient" to Search for Patient Data” on page 91.
3Enter the patient information: select each field and use the keyboard or barcode scanner or choose
from the pop-up list of alternatives to input information.
PIIC iX When you enter data, the Information Center will automatically check for corresponding data and
will suggest an appropriate action based on what it finds. You can select Confirm to accept the
suggestion or Cancel to reject it.
–Last Name: Enter the patient's last name (family name).
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
91
–First Name: Enter the patient's first name.
–Middle Name (if configured to appear): Enter the patient's middle name.
–Lifetime ID, Encounter ID: Whether these fields appear and how they are labeled can be
configured for your hospital. One or both fields may be displayed and the labels may read:
MRN, Case ID, Visit Number, or other alternatives. Enter the appropriate data for the fields
displayed.
–Patient Cat.: Choose the patient category, either Adult, Pedi, or Neo.
–Paced Mode: Choose On or Off (You must use On if your patient has a pacemaker). With
PIIC iX there is a third choice: Unconfirmed. When the paced mode is Unconfirmed, the
algorithm for paced patients will be used.
–Height: Enter the patient's height.
–Weight: Enter the patient's weight.
–BSA: The monitor calculates the body surface area automatically.
–Date Of Birth: Enter the patient's date of birth. Enter this in the form dd/mm/yyyy.
–Age: The monitor calculates the patient age automatically.
–Gender: Choose Male or Female.
–Notes (1) / Notes (2): Enter any extra information about the patient or treatment.
When admission is complete, the patient's name appears on the monitor info line at the top of the
screen.
When a Patient is Already Admitted
If the patient monitor already has a patient admitted, the Admit Patient key is replaced by the New
Patient key.
When you select New Patient, the monitor is freed. All settings are reset to the defaults, all patient data
and trend data are deleted, and monitoring at the Information Center may stop for monitors
designated as transport monitors. Depending on your equipment configuration, selecting New Patient
may transfer the currently admitted patient out of the bed. A message will appear requiring your
confirmation of these actions.
After selecting New Patient, you can admit your patient as described in “When No Patient is
Admitted” above.
Using "Find Patient" to Search for Patient Data
PIIC iX You can use the Find Patient key to search for patient data in the Information Center and any
connected hospital information systems. The search will look for currently admitted or previously
admitted patients matching the search data you enter.
To search for patient data:
1Select the Find Patient key.
A window opens with an on-screen keyboard.
2Type in the last name or an ID, or a part of it, and select Enter on the keyboard.
The search results will be displayed in a Select Patient window. The system provides a list of all
matching patients.
3Highlight the patient you want to admit to this bed.
4Depending on their current status, you will be asked whether you want to readmit them, or
transfer them to this bed.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
92
5Select Confirm to complete the admission or transfer.
Patient Category and Paced Mode
The patient category setting determines the algorithm the monitor uses to process and calculate some
measurements, the safety limits that apply for some measurements, and the alarm limit ranges.
The paced mode setting determines whether the monitor shows pacemaker pulses or not. When Paced
Mode is set to Off, pace pulses are filtered and therefore do not show in the ECG wave.
WARNING
Patient Cat. and Paced Mode will always contain a value, regardless of whether the patient is fully
admitted or not. If you do not specify settings for these fields, the monitor uses the default settings
from the current profile, which might not be correct for your patient.
Patient category
Changing the patient category may change the arrhythmia and NBP alarm limits. If possible, always
load a suitable profile after changing patient category, and always check alarm limits to make sure that
they are appropriate for your patient.
Paced mode
For paced patients, you must set Paced Mode to On. If it is incorrectly set to Off, the monitor could
mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm during asystole. With PIIC iX, the paced mode may be
Unconfirmed which will assume a pacemaker is present. You should still set the Paced Mode to On
for paced patients to make the status clear.
Admitting a Centrally-Monitored Patient
You can admit a patient at either the bedside or the Information Center. When you admit a patient, the
patient's name appears on the bedside monitor and the Information Center.
If you do not fill in all patient information required by the Information Center, the Information Center
may reject the admission. Complete all the required fields and try again to admit the patient.
Quick Admitting a Patient
Use Quick Admit to quickly admit a patient using only a limited set of demographic data.
1Select the Quick Admit SmartKey.
2Enter the required data (ID fields or last name depending on configuration) with the keyboard or a
barcode scanner.
3Select Enter.
4In the confirmation window, select Confirm to stop monitoring for the previous patient or free up
the monitor (if confirmation is configured).
5Check that patient category and paced status are correct for the new patient.
6Check the current profile and, if necessary, load an appropriate profile.
If the monitor is connected to an Information Center and only the ID field is entered, the patient name
may be set to - - - at the Information Center, depending on the configuration. With a PIIC iX, the
Information Center can look-up patient information in a hospital information system (if available) and
complete the patient demographics automatically. Otherwise, complete the rest of the demographic
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
93
details as soon as possible to fully identify the patient on the network, on the monitor and on printed
reports. To complete the details, open the Patient Demographics window and complete all required
fields.
Editing Patient Information
To edit the patient information after a patient has been admitted, select the patient name field on the
Main Screen to open the Patient Demographics window, and make the required changes.
PIIC iX If data has been provided by a hospital information system, you will not be able to edit it on the
monitor.
Ending Monitoring for a Patient
There are several ways to end monitoring for a patient, depending on whether there is an Information
Center connection, and on the configuration of the Information Center and the monitor. Discharging
a patient and removing the monitor from a patient are described here. You can also end monitoring by
admitting a new patient, as described in “When a Patient is Already Admitted” on page 91.
Discharging a Patient
The discharge function is only available when the patient is monitored centrally at an Information
Center. A discharge transfers the patient out of the bed and frees all devices used for the patient. The
discharge function may be disabled at a monitor designated as a transport monitor, to ensure that a
patient cannot be accidentally discharged from the system when the transport monitor is used for
another patient.
A discharge:
– clears the patient demographics
– erases all patient measurement data (such as trend, event, and calculation data) from the
monitor, measurement modules and Information Center. This ensures that data from a
previous patient are not mixed with data from a new patient.
– resets patient category and paced settings to the settings defined in the default Profile
– resets all monitor and measurement settings as well as the active Screen to the settings defined
in the default Profile
– discharges the patient from the Information Center.
Make sure that you have printed out any required reports before discharging. Check that a functioning
local or central printer is available before you use End Case.
To Discharge a Patient
1Select the patient name field or select the Patient Demogr. SmartKey to open the Patient
Demographics window and associated pop-up keys.
2Select the pop-up key for either:
–End Case - to print any configured end case reports or vital signs recording, discharge the
patient and clear the patient database, then enter standby mode. If an End Case SmartKey is
configured for your monitor, you can also select this instead and then confirm.
To see which end case reports are set up for your monitor, select Main Setup, Reports, then
Auto Reports. For each auto report, if End Case Report is set to On, this report will be
printed when you select End Case. See “Setting Up Auto Reports” on page 233 for
information on setting up end case reports.
–Dischrge Patient - to discharge the patient without printing any reports.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
94
Removing the Monitor
Removing a monitor stops using the monitor for the current patient and frees up the monitor and all
devices assigned to that monitor.
Removing the monitor:
– clears the patient demographics in the monitor.
– erases all patient measurement data (such as trend, event, and calculation data) from the
monitor and devices assigned to the monitor. This ensures that data from a previous patient
are not mixed with data from a new patient.
– resets patient category and paced settings to the settings defined in the default Profile.
– resets all monitor and measurement settings as well as the active Screen to the settings defined
in the default Profile.
If the monitor is locked to the bed and is connected to an Information Center, the remove function is
not available and you will have to discharge the patient.
To Remove a Monitor
1Open the Equipment window - either directly in Main Setup or by selecting the bed label in the
information line.
2Select the monitor.
3Select the Remove Monitor pop-up key.
New Patient Check
The monitor can be configured to ask you whether a new patient is now being monitored in certain
situations:
• after a specified power-off period
• after a specified standby period
• when no basic vitals (HR, RR, Pulse, SpO2, NBP) have been measured for a specified period
The pop-up window is entitled Is This A New Patient?. The monitor offers a Yes key to stop
monitoring for the previous patient and begin monitoring a new patient and a No key to continue
monitoring with the current patient data and settings.
The time periods for the three conditions can be configured independently.
Transferring Patients
To save you from having to enter the same patient data multiple times and enable patient transfer
without loss of data, patient demographic information is shared between patient monitors and
Information Centers.
Data Exchange Between Information Centers
You can transfer demographic data and trend data from one IIC to another by selecting Transfer on
the patient monitor. Trend data is not shared between Information Centers and monitors.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
95
Transferring Patients with IntelliVue Information Center iX
PIIC iX There are several ways to transfer a patient from or to another bed. When a patient is transferred to the
destination bed, Information Center monitoring continues in the destination bed and equipment that is
not transferred with the patient is freed up.
Using the Transfer Function
PIIC iX To transfer a patient using the transfer function provided on the patient monitor by the Information
Center:
1Select the patient name or the Not Admitted text at the top of the monitor screen to open the
Patient Demographics window.
2Select the Transfer pop-up key.
The Transfer window opens. If a patient is currently admitted, the window offers the possibility to
transfer that patient to another bed (To Other Bed). If no patient is currently admitted, the
window offers the possibility to transfer a patient from another bed using the patient search as
described in “Using "Find Patient" to Search for Patient Data” on page 91.
3With To Other Bed, if more than one unit is configured, a list of units will appear. When you have
selected a unit, or if only one unit is configured, a list of free beds will appear.
4Select a bed from the list.
You will be asked to confirm the transfer of the patient to this bed.
5Select Confirm to complete the transfer.
WARNING
Before doing a transfer ensure that no other patient is using the destination bed and/or equipment
from the destination bed.
When a patient is transferred you need to check that the patient has all the required monitoring
equipment at the destination bed.
Using the New Patient Key
PIIC iX If the monitor at the destination bed is not free:
1Select the patient name field at the top of the monitor to open the Patient Demographics
window.
2Select New Patient to free up the monitor.
3Select Find Patient and enter your patient's name to get the patient data from the system.
When you select your patient from the list, you will be asked to confirm that the patient should be
transferred into this bed. After confirmation the transfer is complete.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
96
Transferring Patients with IntelliVue Information Center
Transferring a Centrally-Monitored Patient with the Monitor
Scenario: A centrally-monitored patient is moved with the monitor to another monitoring location on
the same Information Center database server without interrupting the collection of patient trend
information.
1Select the patient name field or select the Patient Demogr. SmartKey to open the Patient
Demographics window, then select the Transfer pop-up key. If the patient is not admitted or not
monitored by an Information Center, the Transfer key is inactive ("grayed-out").
This step preserves the patient's demographic data during the transfer.
2At the new location, connect the monitor to the network (only needed for wired networks). If the
monitor detects a patient mismatch, a window will open showing your patient's data and asking
Complete Transfer Of This Patient?.
3Select Yes to complete the transfer.
4Verify that the settings for patient category and paced mode are correct.
If you accidentally transfer a patient, use Re-Admit to restore this patient's data to the Information
Center. If you are not connected to the network, select Clear Transfer to leave transfer mode. The
patient data remains in the monitor.
Resolving Patient Information Mismatch
When you connect together devices which store patient demographic data, for example, a monitor and
an Information Center, the system compares patient category, paced status, and unique patient
identification in order to synchronize this information. If configured to do so, the monitor indicates a
mismatch if the information is not identical.
WARNING
• It is important to resolve the mismatches as soon as they are identified. Failure to do so could
result in using incorrect/confusing data to make clinical decisions. Certain settings, for example
Paced Mode and Patient Cat., may not match between the Information Center and the monitor.
If the Paced Mode is set incorrectly, the system could mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail to
alarm in the case of asystole. It is important that the patient category is set correctly so the ECG
can be analyzed correctly and initial arrhythmia alarm limits set. A Check Patient ID INOP will
appear when a mismatch has not been resolved.
• As long as patient mismatch has not been resolved, data integration in the Information Center and
the own patient overview functionality might not work as equipment is not assigned correctly to
the patient.
PIIC • When a monitor is connected to an Information Center by the wireless IntelliVue Instrument
Telemetry interface, the patient data will automatically be merged in the case of a transfer. This
means there is no patient discharge at the monitor and settings and trend data will be retained. You
will see a message on the monitor and the Patient Demographics window will automatically
appear so that you can check the data and change it if necessary.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
97
Manually Resolving Patient Mismatch
The source of the patient mismatch is indicated by question marks (???) and displayed in the status line
at the bottom of the screen (Patient ???,Patient Category ??? or Paced Mode ???).
The Select Patient window automatically opens so you can decide which patient data to use. You do
not have to resolve the mismatch immediately, but the indicators remain until you do. After 5 minutes
a Check Patient ID INOP will appear to remind you to resolve the mismatch.
For some common mismatch situations, the monitor will simplify the resolution by suggesting a
solution for the mismatch. For example, when a patient arrives after transport and the Transfer key
has been selected, the monitor will show this patient's data and ask Complete Transfer Of This
Patient?. You can then select Yes to complete the transfer. If you select No you will go to the Select
Patient window.
After you resolve the mismatch, the monitor displays a confirmation window that shows the patient
that has been selected and where data will be erased, if applicable. Confirm your choice. The monitor
automatically displays the Patient Demographics window after confirmation. Verify that the settings
shown are correct for the patient.
Gender, date of birth, height, weight, and nursing notes do not generate a mismatch. If these fields are
different on different devices, the monitor resolves them itself. For example, it may take date of birth
from the Information Center, whilst taking gender from the monitor. Always check the patient
demographics after combining patients, to ensure that you are satisfied with the results. Change them
if necessary.
WARNING
After resolving a patient mismatch, check that the monitor settings (especially patient category, paced
status and alarm limits) are correct for the patient.
Patient Mismatch - If One Set of Patient Data is Correct
If there is a mismatch between an Information Center and a monitor, choose the data set you want to
continue using for this patient by selecting one of the sectors in the Select Patient window.
After you resolve the mismatch, the monitor displays a confirmation window that shows the patient
that has been selected and where data will be erased, if applicable. Confirm your choice. The monitor
automatically displays the Patient Demographics window after confirmation. Verify that the settings
shown are correct for the patient.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
98
Patient Mismatch - If Neither Patient Data Set is Correct
A patient mismatch where neither set of patient data is correct might occur if you connect a new MMS
to a monitor in order to prepare for a new patient, before you actually start measuring.
Select New Patient if you are sure that none of the information is correct. This uses the bed, monitor
and MMS for a new patient, erases all data in both the monitor and MMS, resets all settings to the
default Profile, and lets you admit a new patient.
Managing Equipment
Multiple pieces of monitoring equipment can be used for a patient. The association between a patient
and a device can be made by:
• identifying the patient at the device (by entering patient data or using Find Patient to get patient
data)
• "adding" equipment for an existing patient
The association between a patient and a device can be ended by:
• discharging the patient, or selecting End Case.
• "removing" the device from the patient.
• transferring the patient without the device.
• admitting a new patient to the device.
• automatic freeing of the device.
WARNING
In all cases listed above, when equipment is freed, all patient identification and measurement data are
deleted, all settings are reset to the defaults, and monitoring at the Information Center (if active) is
stopped. Any associated devices, e.g. multi measurement modules connected to a monitor, or cableless
measurement devices assigned to a monitor, may also be freed, depending on the configuration.
Adding Equipment (PIIC iX)
By selecting the Add Equipm. key you can display a list of all free equipment (not currently assigned to
a patient) and select a device for use with this patient. If you add another monitor, you need to confirm
this at the selected monitor.
Removing Equipment
The association between a monitor and the patient can be ended by selecting Remove Monitor. With
PIIC iX, the Remove Monitor key is not available when the monitor is locked to a bed.
Other equipment such as telemetry devices or IntelliVue Cableless Measurements can be removed by
selecting the device then selecting Remove in the menu displayed.
Equipment Status Disputes
Equipment can come into situations where its status does not match its location. There are three
typical situations where this may occur:
• PIIC iX only - equipment is locked to a bed, but has been removed and used at another bed.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
99
• PIIC iX only - equipment has been configured for use in a specific unit, but is now being used in a
different unit.
• Equipment has an equipment label but has not been configured at the Information Center and
therefore cannot be managed.
If a monitor or a companion device is in one of these situations, a Check Equipment INOP will
appear and the equipment status will be shown in the Equipment window.
The following symbols (in red) are used to show the status in the Equipment window:
Using the Equipment Window
In the Equipment window you have access to patient management, workflow functions (set location,
transfer), equipment management functions (add/remove equipment) and caregiver-related functions.
You can open the Equipment window directly in Main Setup or by selecting the bed label in the
information line.
1This bed is Bed 8, the connection to the Information Center is active.
2Caregiver area - depending on your network connection, the name of assigned caregiver may be
shown.
3Patient name, category and paced mode.
4This monitor is assigned to the patient and is the one on which you are viewing the window.
The top part of the window contains the patient data, with the assigned caregiver and the status of the
connection to the Information Center, and the bed label. In the lower part of the window, all
equipment for this patient is shown, with the corresponding assignments and connections.
The device you are currently viewing the window on is shown with a dark background (in the above
example, the monitor with the label wm8).
equipment is locked to another bed
equipment is not configured for use in this unit
equipment label is not in system configuration, or duplicate equipment labels
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
100
Changing Caregiver Assignment
When a caregiver is assigned, the caregiver name may appear next to the caregiver symbol in the
Equipment window (depending on your network connection). Whether the name is shown or not,
when you select this area of the window, a menu opens offering the following functions:
PIIC iX •Select Caregiver - you can select a different caregiver from a list. When a new caregiver is
assigned, the patient will be automatically added to that caregiver's Care Group. The availability of
the function and the caregiver list depends on the Information Center configuration.
•My Patients - opens the My Patients window showing all patients in your Care Group.
Using the Patient Area
The patient name, patient category and paced status are normally shown in the Equipment window.
When a patient has been prepared for transfer, the transfer symbol will be shown:
When you select this area in the Equipment window, a menu opens giving access to the Enter
Demographics window, the Transfer function (see “Transferring Patients” on page 94) and the End
Case function.
Changing the Location
If the monitor is currently assigned to a bed, but the patient is in another department for treatment or
a diagnostic procedure, you can show a temporary location for the patient.
1Select the Information Center area on the Equipment window.
2Select the current location from the list.
Or alternatively use the Select Location pop-up key.
The temporary location is then shown in the Equipment window, on the Standby screen on the
monitor, and in the sector at the Information Center. When the patient returns, you can set the
location back to the bed number in the same way as described above.
When Multiple Equipment is Used for One Patient
It is possible to assign additional monitoring equipment and a telemetry device to the same patient,
resulting in the information from multiple devices being combined in one sector at the Information
Center. The measurement data from the other devices will be displayed on the monitor screen in the
own patient overview window.
WARNING
When new equipment has been added for a patient, you will be asked to confirm that the device be
used for the patient. Always do this as soon as possible to avoid patient data mismatch.
If multiple equipment is assigned to the patient, resolving a patient mismatch at the monitor may
resolve other pending patient mismatches or remove other associated equipment.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
101
Own Patient Overview Window
The measurements from other monitoring devices and telemetry devices are shown combined in the
own patient overview window on the monitor, together with related information derived by the
Information Center, such as alarms.
1Current alarm and INOP generated by another device.
2Own patient overview window
3Delayed - indication that data in the window is delayed.
WARNING
All data presented in the own patient overview window are delayed for several seconds.
If you need realtime data, for example for defibrillation, always use the host monitor ECG instead of
telemetry or ECG from another monitoring device. As long as the ECG is being measured with
another device there will be no ECG signal available at the ECG analog output.
Visual Alarm Status Information in the Own Patient Overview Window
• If individual measurement alarms are switched off at any of the devices in use for
the patient, a crossed alarm symbol on a white background is shown beside the
measurement numeric
• If all alarms are switched off or paused for one of the devices in use for the patient,
a crossed alarm symbol on a dark gray background is shown beside all affected
measurement numerics (if so configured). If all red and yellow alarms are switched
off/paused, the crossed alarm symbol is red. If only yellow alarms are switched off/
paused, the crossed alarm symbol is yellow.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
102
Assigning a Telemetry Transceiver with an SRR Adapter to a Monitor
Monitors which have this capability have a short range radio symbol on the model label.
A telemetry device with a short range radio adapter can be assigned to a monitor directly. To assign a
telemetry device to a monitor:
1Press the Check button on the telemetry device.
The measurement selection key on the monitor will change to show the "add cableless" symbol
2Select the symbol.
3In the Add Cableless window, select the correct equipment label for the telemetry device.
4Check that the assignment is successful and that transmission has begun:
•A
Tele Device assigned message appears on the monitor
• A tone sounds at the telemetry device and the Leads Off indicators light
• The ECG wave appears on the monitor
To confirm that the correct telemetry device has been assigned, open the ECG Setup menu. The title
of the menu contains the equipment label of the telemetry device; check that this is the correct label.
If a telemetry device is already assigned to a monitor, you cannot assign a further telemetry device to
that monitor.
If the telemetry device goes out-of-range or loses the short range radio connection, it will switch over
to standard telemetry transmission to the Information Center. In this case, the telemetry data is
displayed in the Own Patient Overview Window as described above.
When a telemetry device with a short range radio adapter is assigned to the patient, the short range
radio connection to the monitor is made automatically.
If a telemetry device disappears from the list in the Add Cableless menu, press the Check button on
the telemetry device again. If the monitor is not configured to be used with a telemetry device, the add
cableless symbol will appear crossed out .
If the telemetry device is removed (unassigned), the short range radio connection will be ended.
WARNING
Short range radio connections are subject to interruption due to interference from other radio sources
in the vicinity, including microwaves, bluetooth devices and DECT phones. Outside the operating
frequency band and 5% above and below, i.e. the exclusion band according IEC 60601-1-2, section
36.202.3a)4), the short range radio connection is immune up to 3V/m in the frequency range from 80
MHz to 2.0 GHz and up to 1V/m in the frequency range from 2.0 to 2.3 GHz. Depending on the
strength and duration of the interference, the interruption may occur for an extended period. A loss of
connection, due to moving out-of-range, interference, or for other reasons, is indicated with a Tele
Disconnected INOP.
Correct channel configuration is important, refer to the Configuration Guide for details.
If a Tele Disconnected INOP occurs when the telemetry device goes out-of-range, the INOP will
disappear (without being silenced) as soon as the ECG signal from the telemetry device is available at
the Information Center via standard telemetry transmission.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
103
Controlling Other Devices from the Bedside
You can change ECG settings for the current ECG source from the patient monitor.
1Select the own patient overview window.
2Select the Setup Equip pop-up key.
A setup menu will appear with the settings available for the current ECG source. If it is a telemetry
transmitter or patient monitor connected to the Information Center via LAN or WLAN, the following
settings are available: adjust HR alarms, relearn arrhythmia, select primary/secondary ECG lead, select
arrhythmia analysis mode, change primary/secondary ECG lead size. PIIC iX only: if the current ECG
source is a patient monitor connected to the Information Center via IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry
(IIT), only the adjust HR alarms setting is available.
Viewing and Silencing Other Device Alarms at the Bedside
When other devices are assigned to the patient, alarms from those devices will also be indicated on the
monitor, in addition to the main indication at the Information Center.
If configured, a generic alarm message will appear in the alarm status area with standard alarm tones.
The alarm message will have the color and * or ! coding corresponding to the severity of the alarm.
The specific alarm message (for example ** HR Low) will appear in the own patient overview window.
If configured, alarms generated from another device can be silenced at the bedside. Either the monitor
Silence key is configured to silence both monitor and other device alarms (must be configured at the
Information Center) or the Silence Bed pop-up key will be available:
1Select the own patient overview window.
2Select the Silence Bed pop-up key.
Depending on your Information Center configuration, the Silence Bed key may silence both other
device alarms and bedside alarms.
WARNING
Even when the other device data is not visible on the screen, you may be silencing monitor alarms and
other device alarms, if the Information Center and monitor are so configured.
Switching Off or Pausing Alarms From Other Devices
When you select Pause Alarms or Alarms Off at the monitor, the alarms are off or paused for the
bedside measurements. When you switch alarms off or pause alarms at the Information Center, both
monitor alarms and alarms from other assigned devices are affected.
Refer to the Information Center Instructions for Use for more details on the Suspend/Pause alarms
behavior of the Information Center.
Using Standby
When you select Standby mode at the monitor, the bedside goes into Standby mode but other assigned
devices may continue monitoring.
Refer to the Information Center Instructions for Use for details on how selecting Standby at the
Information Center affects the monitor and other devices.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
104
ECG Source Tracking at the Information Center
The Information Center continuously checks whether a valid ECG signal is coming from the monitor
or from another assigned device. If you unplug the ECG patient cable from the monitor and plug it
into another device, the Information Center will automatically switch to monitoring the ECG from the
other device. At the monitor, its own ECG measurement will be deactivated and the Setup ECG menu
will no longer be accessible.
When you unplug the patient cable from the other device and plug it back into the monitor again, the
Information Center will switch back to monitoring the ECG from the monitor. The ECG
measurement will be activated again at the monitor. [Note that in this case, as the screen switches back
to the monitor's own measurements, the SpO2T measurement (if present) will no longer be displayed].
In the same way the source is tracked when a telemetry device is directly connected to a monitor, then
disconnected and vice versa.
In case of ambiguity, a yellow INOP message !!Check ECG Source indicates that more than one valid
ECG source is active.
Synchronized Settings
For some measurements, settings can be synchronized between the monitor and another measurement
device. For example, if ECG is measured at the monitor, and then the patient is connected to a
telemetry device for monitoring, the Information Center will use the monitor settings for the telemetry
device. In general, the following settings will be synchronized:
Heart Rate HR/Pulse Alarm On/Off, Heart Rate High/Low Limit,
ECG ECG On/Off, Primary Lead, Secondary Lead, Va Lead1, Vb Lead1, Lead
Placement
Arrhythmia Analysis Mode, Arrhythmia On/Off, Asystole Threshold, Pause Threshold,
VTach HR, VTach Run, PVCs/min, Vent. Rhythm, SVT HR, SVT Run,
PVCs/min On/Off, Pacer not capture On/Off, Pacer not pace On/Off,
Non-Sustain On/Off, Vent. Rhythm On/Off, Run PVCs On/Off, Pair
PVCs On/Off, Missed Beat On/Off, Pause On/Off, R-on-T PVCs On/
Off, Vent. Bigeminy On/Off, Vent. Trigeminy On/Off, Multiform PVCs
On/Off, Irregular HR On/Off, SVT On/Off, Afib On/Off, Afib/IrrHR
Timeout, Afib/IrrHR End Threshold
ST ST Analysis On/Off, ST Alarm On/Off, ISO Point, J point, ST point, ST
Priority List, Single ST Alarm Limit, Multi ST Alarm Limit, ST-Index On/
Off, ST Alarm Mode, ISO/J-Point Detection, ST Lead On/Off, ST
Baseline
QT QT analysis On/Off, QT Lead, QTc High Alarm On/Off, QTc Alarm
On/Off, QTc High Limit, QTc High Limit, QTc Formula2, QT Baseline3
SpO2TSpO
2 Alarms on/off, SpO2 Alarm limits, SpO2 Low Alarm Delay, SpO2
High Alarm Limit, Desat Alarm Limit
NBP Alarm Suppression On/Off, Pulse(SpO2) On/Off
1Va and Vb leads are reset to default (V2, V5) if the configured Va or Vb lead for the telemetry device is not one of V1
through V6.
2This setting will only be synchronized when the Information Center supports QT Analysis for Telemetry
3With PIIC, QT baseline is synchronized, but not QT snippets.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
105
PIIC iX With the IntelliVue Information Center iX, the following additional measurement settings can be
synchronized:
WARNING
• Not all settings are synchronized; after changing the measurement source, always check that the
settings are appropriate.
•ECG: Va and Vb leads are reset to default (V2, V5) if the configured Va or Vb lead for the
telemetry device is not one of V1 through V6.
If later the patient is disconnected from the other device, and reconnected to the monitor again, any
changes in the settings made in the meantime will be passed on to the monitor. In this way, settings
continuity is preserved when the measurement source changes.
NOTE
Settings synchronization can be switched off at the monitor in Configuration mode.
In certain situations, you will be asked to confirm that synchronization of settings is appropriate.
Settings synchronization can only take place when there is no patient information mismatch between
the monitor and the Information Center.
PIIC If a Check ECG Settings or !! Check Pairing INOP appears always check that the ECG settings,
especially the paced setting, are appropriate for your patient.
PIIC iX If a Check ECG Settings, Chk SpO₂T Settings, or another check settings INOP appears, always check
that the settings, especially the paced setting for ECG, are appropriate for your patient.
ECG/Arrhythmia Hexad Reconstruction Mode, Some ECG Alarms INOP On/Off
ST STE On/Off, STE Alarm On/Off
NBP Sys/Dia/Mean Alarm Limits, Alarms On/ Off, Alarm Source
Resp Apnea Time, Alarm Limits, Detection Mode, Alarm On/Off, Resp On/Off
SpO2SpO2 Alarms on/off, SpO2 Alarm limits, SpO2 Low Alarm delay, SpO2
High Alarm delay, Desat Alarm Limit, NBP Alarm Suppression On/Off,
Pulse(SpO2) On/Off, Measurement Mode1, Repetition Time1
1Measurement Mode and Repetition Time can only be synchronized if SpO2 comes from a Cableless SpO2 Pod or a
telemetry device.
6 Managing Patients and Equipment
106
Information Center Compatibility
The functionality available for managing patients and equipment depends on the IntelliVue
Information Center being used. In the following table the main differences between the PIIC and PIIC
iX are shown.
PIIC PIIC iX
Not available Find Patient - searching for a patient in the
Information Center or other connected hospital
systems. (With LAN and WLAN connection only)
Transfer Patient - patient is moved to transfer
list.
Transfer Patient - can transfer patient directly to
another bed/unit and from another bed/unit.
(With LAN and WLAN connection only)
Not available A unique patient list provides information about
the current status of a patient allowing intelligent
prompts and preventing the same patient being
admitted twice.
Add Equipment - allows only assignment of
telemetry devices via manual pairing.
Add Equipment - allows assignment of other
monitors, telemetry devices and X2 MMS. (With
LAN and WLAN connection only)
Remove equipment - allows only removal of
telemetry devices via Unpair To Mon. and
Unpair To Tele.
Remove equipment - allows removal of other
monitors, telemetry devices and X2 MMS.
Not available Select Location - allows a temporary location to
be shown when a patient is not in the unit. (With
LAN and WLAN connection only)
Not available Select Caregiver - allows a Caregiver to be
assigned to a patient
Not available Paced status Unconfirmed is the initial setting
before a paced status has been entered.
Unconfirmed will switch pace pulse rejection on
but makes the user aware that no paced status has
been selected.
7
107
7ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT
Monitoring
The electrocardiogram (ECG) measures the electrical activity of the heart and displays it on the
monitor as a waveform and a numeric. This section also tells you about arrhythmia monitoring (see
“About Arrhythmia Monitoring” on page 127), ST monitoring (see “About ST Monitoring” on
page 137) and QT monitoring (see “About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring” on page 148).
Skin Preparation for Electrode Placement
Good electrode-to-skin contact is important for a good, noise-free ECG signal, as the skin is a poor
conductor of electricity.
1Select sites with intact skin, without impairment of any kind.
2Clip or shave hair from sites as necessary.
3Wash sites thoroughly with soap and water, leaving no soap residue.
We do not recommend using ether or pure alcohol, because this dries the skin and increases the
resistance.
4Dry skin thoroughly.
Connecting ECG Cables
1Attach the clips or snaps to the electrodes before placing them. If you are not using pre-gelled
electrodes, apply electrode gel to the electrodes before placement.
2Place the electrodes on the patient according to the lead placement you have chosen.
3Attach the electrode cable to the patient cable.
4Plug the patient cable into the white ECG connector. An ECG waveform and numeric appears on
the monitor display.
CAUTION
To protect the monitor from damage during defibrillation, for accurate ECG information and to
protect against noise and other interference, use only ECG electrodes and cables specified by Philips.
Some non-authorized electrodes may be subject to large offset potentials due to polarization.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
108
Selecting the Primary and Secondary ECG Leads
The monitor uses the primary and secondary lead to compute HR and to analyze and detect cardiac
arrhythmias. They are also available for recordings and for display on the Information Center.
The secondary lead is only used if your monitor is configured for multi-lead (instead of single-lead)
arrhythmia analysis.
You should choose a lead as primary or secondary lead that has the following characteristics:
To select a lead as primary or secondary lead:
•In the Setup ECG menu, select Primary or Secondary, then select the appropriate lead. You can
assign any available lead whether it is currently displayed or not.
Checking Paced Mode
It is important to set the paced mode correctly when you start monitoring ECG.
• To change the paced mode in the Setup ECG menu, select Paced Mode to switch between On, Off
or Unconfirm.
WARNING
Pace pulse rejection must be switched on for paced patients by setting Paced Mode to On. Switching
pace pulse rejection off for paced patients may result in pace pulses being counted as regular QRS
complexes, which could prevent an asystole event from being detected. When changing profiles, and at
admission/discharge, always check that paced mode is correct for the patient.
Some pace pulses can be difficult to reject. When this happens, the pulses are counted as a QRS
complex, and could result in an incorrect HR and failure to detect cardiac arrest or some arrhythmias.
Make sure that pace pulses are detected correctly by checking the pace pulse markers on the display.
Keep pacemaker patients under close observation.
• the QRS complex should be either completely above or
below the baseline and it should not be biphasic
• the QRS complex should be tall and narrow
• the P-waves and T-waves should be less than 0.2 mV
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
109
Understanding the ECG Display
Your display may be configured to look slightly different.
1Lead label of the displayed wave
21 mV calibration bar
3Pacer spikes
4Pace pulse markers
5Current heart rate
6Current heart rate alarm limits and paced mode symbol
7EASI lead placement label (located here when present)
8ECG Filter label
ECG HR numeric: This is the heart rate derived from the monitored ECG.
Pace pulse markers: These are shown if the Paced Mode status has been set to On, the pacer spikes
are not configured to have a fixed size, and the patient has a paced signal.
Pacer Spikes: The pacer spikes are shown in white, unless the ECG wave is white, then they will be
green. If the pacer spikes have been configured to have a fixed size, they will be displayed in the
background as a dotted line.
Defibrillator synchronization marks: If an HP/Agilent/Philips defibrillator is connected, the
synchronization marks (vertical lines on the ECG wave) are shown on the ECG wave. The
synchronization marks will be shown in yellow, unless the ECG wave is yellow, then they will be green.
If so configured, the monitor can supply its own synchronization marks; in this case the
synchronization marks from a defibrillator will not be shown.
ST numerics in ECG wave: ST numerics can be configured to show underneath the ECG wave on
the left side.
1Pacer spikes configured to have a fixed size
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
110
Monitoring Paced Patients
An ECG optimized for monitoring a paced patient should look like this:
You should choose a lead as primary or secondary lead that has these characteristics:
• the normal QRS complex should be either completely above or below the baseline and it should
not be biphasic. For paced patients, the QRS complexes should be at least twice the height of pace
pulses.
• the QRS complex should be tall and narrow
• the P-waves and the T-waves should be less than 0.2 mV.
For ease of identification on the screen, the pacer spikes can be configured to have a fixed size. They
are then shown in the background as a dotted lines. The length of the dotted line is fixed to the wave
channel height and is independent of the actual pacer amplitude.
Setting the Paced Status
In the Setup ECG menu, select Paced Mode to switch between On, Off or Unconfirm.
You can also change the paced mode in the Patient Demographics window.
1Normal Beats
2Pace Pulses/Pace Beats
When Paced Mode is set to On:
– Pace Pulse Rejection is switched on. This means that pacemaker pulses
are not counted as extra QRS complexes.
– pace pulse marks are shown on the ECG wave as a small dash (only
when the pacer spikes are not configured to have a fixed size).
– the paced symbol is displayed under the HR label.
When Paced Mode is set to Off, pacer spikes are not shown in the ECG wave.
Be aware that switching pace pulse rejection off for paced patients may result in
pace pulses being counted as regular QRS complexes, which could prevent an
asystole event from being detected.
When the paced mode has not yet been set for a patient, the paced symbol will
have a question mark indicating the Unconfirm mode. When the paced mode is
Unconfirm, pace pulse rejection is switched on.
Paced Mode On
Paced Mode Off
Paced Mode
Unconfirmed
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
111
Avoiding Pace Pulse Repolarization Tails
Some unipolar pacemakers display pace pulses with repolarization tails. These tails may be counted as
QRSs in the event of cardiac arrest or other arrhythmias.
If you note a visible repolarization tail, choose a lead that decreases the size of the repolarization tail.
Changing the Size of the ECG Wave
If any of the displayed ECG waves is too small or clipped, you can change the size of one or all of the
ECG waves on the screen.
Changing the adjustment factor only changes the visual appearance of the ECG wave on the screen. It
does not affect the ECG signal analyzed by the monitor.
Comparing the wave size to the 1 mV calibration bar on the ECG wave segment can help you to get an
idea of the true ECG signal strength. If you choose a fixed adjustment factor, the 1 mV calibration bar
will be the same size for all the displayed ECG waves. If you choose Auto Size, or an individual size
using the Size Up/Size Down keys, the calibration bar may be a different size for each wave.
To Change the Size of an Individual ECG Wave
1Select the wave segment you want to change. This calls up the lead menu for this segment.
2In the lead menu, select Size Up to increase wave size or Size Down to decrease the size.
Selecting Auto Size lets the monitor choose the optimal adjustment factor for all available ECG
waves.
To Change the Size of all the ECG Waves
To change the size of all the ECG waves on the screen by a fixed adjustment factor,
1In the Setup ECG menu, select Adjust Size.
2Select the required adjustment factor from the line of pop-up keys.
–Size X0.5 to halve the wave size
–Size X1 to display the wave without zoom
–Size X2 to double the wave size
–Size X4 to multiply the wave size by four
1Repolarization tail (note width)
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
112
Changing the Volume of the QRS Tone
The QRS tone is derived from either the HR or Pulse, depending on which is currently selected as the
alarm source. The QRS volume can be set from 0 to 10 (0 means off).
To change the QRS volume, in the Setup ECG menu select QRS Volume and then select the
appropriate volume from the pop-up list.
Changing the ECG Filter Settings
The ECG filter setting defines how ECG waves are smoothed. An abbreviation indicating the filter
type is shown underneath the lead label on the monitor display. Filter settings do not affect ST
measurement.
To change the filter setting, in the Setup ECG menu, select Filter and then select the appropriate
setting.
–Monitor: Use under normal measurement conditions.
–Ext. Monitor: Use when diagnostic quality is required but low frequency interference or a
wandering baseline may be expected. The upper edge frequency is the same as the Diag setting
and the lower edge frequency is the same as the Monitor setting.
–Filter: The filter reduces interference to the signal. It should be used if the signal is distorted
by high frequency or low frequency interference. High frequency interference usually results in
large amplitude spikes making the ECG signal look irregular. Low frequency interference
usually leads to a wandering or rough baseline. In the operating room, the Filter reduces
artifacts and interference from electrosurgical units. Under normal measurement conditions,
selecting Filter may suppress the QRS complexes too much and thus interfere with the clinical
evaluation of the ECG displayed on the monitor. This does not affect the ECG analysis
performed by the monitor.
If AutoFilter is set to On in Configuration Mode, the filter setting will automatically be set to
Filter if electromagnetic interference is detected.
–Diag: Use when diagnostic quality is required. The unfiltered ECG wave is displayed so that
changes such as R-wave notching or discrete elevation or depression of the ST segments are
visible.
The setting Diag selects the highest available ECG bandwidth which is 0.05 to 150 Hz for the
Adult, Pedi and Neo patient category. The term "diagnostic" relates only to the ECG
bandwidth requirements for diagnostic electrocardiographic devices as outlined in the ANSI/
AAMI standard EC11-1991.
When you are using a telemetry transmitter connected via short range radio to the monitor,
the upper bandwidth for all filter settings is limited to 40 Hz.
Selecting Positions of Va and Vb Chest Leads (for
6-lead placement)
The two chest leads for the 6-lead placement can be positioned at any two of the V1 to V6 positions.
Select the positions you have used in the Setup ECG menu, so that the chest leads will be correctly
labeled.
1In the Setup ECG menu, select Va Lead.
2Select the position used from the list.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
113
3Select Vb Lead and select the position used from the list.
Choosing EASI or Standard Lead Placement
You must enable either standard lead placement or EASI lead placement.
•In the Setup ECG menu, select Placement and then Standard or EASI.
EASI is shown beside the 1mV calibration bar on the ECG wave on the display, and EASI is marked on
any printouts.
See the section on “EASI ECG Lead Placement” on page 122 for electrode placement diagrams.
About ECG Leads
To make it possible to compare measured ECG signals, the electrodes (or lead sets) are placed in
standardized positions, forming so-called "leads". To obtain ECG signals optimized for use in
diagnosis and patient management in different care environments, different lead sets in varying lead
placements can be used. You can use either standard lead placements or EASI lead placements with
this monitor.
When placing electrodes, choose a flat, non-muscular site where the signal will not be interfered with
by either movement or bones. Correct lead placement is always important for accurate diagnosis.
Especially in the precordial leads, which are close to the heart, QRS morphology can be greatly altered
if an electrode is moved away from its correct location.
ECG Leads Monitored
Changing Lead Sets
To change the ECG lead set,
•When adding leads: place the additional electrodes as required - the monitor automatically
recognizes the new lead placement.
•When removing leads: there are two possibilities - removing the complete chest leads block or
removing individual leads. If you unplug the chest lead block from the trunk cable connector, the
monitor will automatically recognize the new lead placement. Remove individual leads by
removing the electrodes. The monitor will issue a Lead Off INOP message; select New Lead
Setup in the Setup ECG menu and the INOP message will disappear.
If you are using these leads are available: Resp is measured
between electrodes:
a 3-electrode set I, II, III RA and LL
a 5-electrode set I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V and MCL RA and LL
a 6-electrode set I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, Va, Vb RA and LL
a 10-electrode set I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6 RA and LL
an EASI 5-electrode set I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6 I and A
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
114
ECG Lead Fallback
If fallback is configured on and there is a leads off INOP in the primary lead (and in the secondary
lead, if you are using multi-lead monitoring) for longer than 10 seconds, and if another lead is available,
this available lead automatically becomes the primary lead. This is known as lead fallback. When the
Leads Off condition is corrected, the leads are automatically switched back.
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
ECG Lead Placements
The labels and colors of the ECG electrodes differ according to the standards that apply for your
hospital. The electrode placement illustrations in this chapter use the AAMI labels and colors.
Electrode labels Electrode colors
AAMI EASI IEC AAMI IEC
RA I R White Red
LA S L Black Yellow
LL A F Red Green
RL N N Green Black
VECBrown White
V1 C1 Brown/Red White/Red
V2 C2 Brown/Yellow White/Yellow
V3 C3 Brown/Green White/Green
V4 C4 Brown/Blue White/Brown
V5 C5 Brown/Orange White/Black
V6 C6 Brown/Violet White/Violet
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
115
Standard 3-Lead Placement
Standard 5-Lead Placement
6-Lead Placement
For a 6-lead placement use the positions from the 5-lead diagram above but with two chest leads. The
two chest leads, Va and Vb, can be positioned at any two of the V1 to V6 positions shown in the chest
electrode diagram below. The Va and Vb lead positions chosen must be selected in the Setup ECG
Menu to ensure correct labeling.
1RA placement: directly below the clavicle and
near the right shoulder
2LA placement: directly below the clavicle and
near the left shoulder
3LL placement: on the left lower abdomen
1RA placement: directly below the clavicle and
near the right shoulder
2LA placement: directly below the clavicle and
near the left shoulder
3RL placement: on the right lower abdomen
4LL placement: on the left lower abdomen
5V placement: on the chest, the position
depends on your required lead selection
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
116
Chest Electrode Placement
For accurate chest electrode placement and measurement, it is important to locate the fourth
intercostal space.
1Locate the second intercostal space by first palpating the Angle of Lewis (the little bony
protuberance where the body of the sternum joins the manubrium). This rise in the sternum is
where the second rib is attached, and the space just below this is the second intercostal space.
2Palpate and count down the chest until you locate the fourth intercostal space.
10-Lead Placement
When monitoring 12-leads of ECG, using a 10-Electrode Lead Placement, it is important to correctly
place electrodes and to label all 12-lead ECG reports with the correct lead placement.
V1 on the fourth intercostal space at the right
sternal border
V2 on the fourth intercostal space at the left
sternal border
V3 midway between the V2 and V4 electrode
positions
V4 on the fifth intercostal space at the left
midclavicular line
V5 on the left anterior axillary line, horizontal
with the V4 electrode position
V6 on the left midaxillary line, horizontal with the
V4 electrode position
V3R -V6R on the right side of the chest in
positions corresponding to those on the left
VE over the xiphoid process
V7 on posterior chest at the left posterior axillary
line in the fifth intercostal space
V7R on posterior chest at the right posterior
axillary line in the fifth intercostal space
A - Angle of Lewis
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
117
Conventional 12-Lead ECG
In conventional 12-Lead ECG using 10 electrodes, an electrode is placed on the right arm, left arm,
right leg, and left leg. Six V- electrodes are placed on the chest. The right leg electrode is the reference
electrode.
Limb electrodes:
– Place arm electrodes on the inside of each arm, between the wrist and the elbow.
– Place leg electrodes inside of each calf, between the knee and the ankle.
Chest electrodes:
V1 - on the 4th intercostal space at the right sternal border
V2 - on the 4th intercostal space at the left sternal border
V3 - midway between the V2 and V4 electrode positions
V4 - on the 5th intercostal space at the left midclavicular line
V5 - on the left anterior axillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position
V6 - on the left midaxillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position
1V1 - V6
2LA
3RA
4RL
5LL
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
118
Modified 12-Lead ECG
If your institution uses modified 10 Lead ECG electrode placement (the Mason-Likar Lead System),
place the four limb electrodes close to the shoulders and lower abdomen.
The six V electrodes are placed on the chest in the same position as the conventional 12-lead
placement.
Choosing Standard or Modified Electrode Placement
If your institution uses modified 10 Lead ECG electrode placement (the Mason-Likar Lead System),
you must switch ModLdPlcmt to On in the monitor.
To do this, in the Setup ECG menu, select ModLdPlcmt to toggle between On and Off.
– When ModLdPlcmt is set to On, 12 Lead ECG Reports will be labeled 12 Lead ECG Report
(Mason-Likar), and captured 12-lead ECGs will be labeled Mason-Likar to the right of the
bandwidth annotation at the Information Center.
– When ModLdPlcmt is set to Off, 12 Lead ECG Reports will be labeled 12 Lead ECG Report
(Standard), and captured 12-lead ECGs will not be annotated at the Information Center.
WARNING
Do not use ECG analysis interpretation statements and measurements for 12-lead ECGs obtained
using the modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement. This may lead to misdiagnosis since the
modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement does not look the same as the conventional 12-lead
ECG and may mask inferior infarction due to calculated axis, R, P and T wave magnitudes shifts and
ST slope.
Do not export 12-lead ECGs obtained using the modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement.
Captured 12-Lead ECGs using the modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement exported from
the Information Center are not annotated with the Mason-Likar label.
1LA
2V1-V6
3LL
4RL
5RA
6Angle of Lewis
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
119
Capture 12-Lead
You can view a 12-Lead ECG on the screen, capture a 12-Lead ECG episode, preview the captured
ECG data and then store it and send it to a connected Information Center for analysis. You can
download the resulting analysis from the Information Center and also other 12-Lead captures for
review at the monitor. A 12-Lead report can be printed that also includes the downloaded analysis
results and an ST Map. You can operate the 12-Lead Export function and the 12-Lead Lock/Unlock
function at the Information Center remotely from the monitor.
The monitor can store one 12-Lead ECG episode at any time.
Viewing the Realtime 12-Lead ECG
To open the 12-Lead ECG window and view the realtime ECG waves,
• Select the Capture 12 Lead SmartKey, or
• Select the Main Setup SmartKey then select Capture 12 Lead.
If a previously viewed 12-Lead ECG was not stored, a window will pop up asking whether you want to
keep it or not. The title bar of the window shows the date and time when this 12-Lead ECG was
captured. If you do not need the ECG, select No to discard it, otherwise, select Yes and then select
Store & Send to store that 12-Lead ECG and send it to an Information Center (if one is connected).
If your patient is not admitted, you will be prompted to enter at least the age and gender of the patient.
This information is needed for analysis of the 12-Lead ECG at the Information Center but is not
essential if you only want to capture the 12-Lead ECG without sending it for analysis. To enter this
information:
1Select the Admit Patient pop-up key, then
2Enter the information in the Patient Demographics window.
3Open the 12-Lead ECG window again as described above.
The age and gender will now be displayed in the title bar of the pop-up keys.
To change the way the realtime waves are displayed, select the Change View pop-up key or select the
wave area. You can switch between a one or two column display. The two column display lets you see
a larger representation of the waves.
While the realtime 12-Lead waves are being viewed in the window, the ECG filter mode (see
“Changing the ECG Filter Settings” on page 112) is changed to the 12-Lead filter setting (see
“Changing Settings for a Captured 12-Lead ECG” on page 120).
Capturing the 12-Lead ECG
To capture the last 10 seconds of ECG data, select the Capture Waves pop-up key. The pop-up key is
active as soon as enough wave data is available; until then a progress bar is displayed in the title bar of
the pop-up keys. A preview of the captured data appears on the screen (unless your monitor is
connected to an Information Center with software release earlier than Revision M — then the
captured data is automatically stored and sent to the Information Center).
The title bar of the pop-up keys will now show the current filter setting and, if you are using EASI lead
placement, an EASI indicator (see “EASI ECG Lead Placement” on page 122).
You can at any time return to the realtime 12-Lead ECG view by selecting the Show Waves pop-up
key. From there, you return to the preview window by selecting the Review 12 Lead pop-up key and
then selecting the 12-Lead marked with * from the list.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
120
Changing Settings for a Captured 12-Lead ECG
Select the Setup 12 Lead pop-up key to choose settings for filter, gain, etc., if changes are needed. All
changes apply to both the display and the printed 12-Lead report. The changes are only applied
temporarily and will not be stored. If you want to change the default settings, see “Setting Up the 12-
Lead ECG” on page 122.
Storing and Sending the 12-Lead ECG
You can enter an order number that will then be associated with the 12-Lead ECG. To enter an order
number, select the Enter OrderNo. pop-up key. The order number will be displayed in the title bar of
the pop-up keys.
To store the previewed data on the monitor and send it to a connected Information Center for storage
and analysis, select the Store & Send pop-up key. If the monitor is connected to an Information
Center, use the Store & Send function before patient transport to store the 12-Lead ECG centrally, as
the 12-Lead ECG data will not be uploaded from the MMS to another monitor after transport.
If the connection to the Information Center is not active while storing, the 12-Lead ECG will be
automatically sent as soon as the connection is established or restored. If a previously stored 12-Lead
ECG is waiting to be sent to the Information Center, it will be overwritten when a new 12-Lead ECG
is stored and can then not be sent to the Information Center.
High Pass Filter Sets the high pass filter for the waveforms.
Choices are 0.05Hz, 0.15Hz and 0.5Hz.
Low Pass Filter Sets the low pass filter for the waveforms.
Choices are 40Hz, 100Hz and 150Hz.
AC Filter Switches the AC (line frequency) filter On or Off.
Gain Defines the gain used for the waveforms.
Choices are 2.5 mm/mV, 5 mm/mV, 10 mm/mV and 20 mm/mV.
Chest Gain Defines the gain for the chest leads relative to the standard gain setting.
Choices are Full and Half.
Paper Speed Defines the waveform speed.
Choices are 25 mm/sec and 50 mm/sec.
Format Defines the page layout.
Choices are 12X1, 6X2, 3X4, 3X4 1R, 3X4 3R,3X4 ST and 3X4 1R ST. 1R and 3R
refer to 1 or 3 rhythm leads, ST formats contain an ST map.
Time Defines whether all leads show simultaneous or sequential intervals of time, when
displaying or printing 2 or more columns.
Choices are Sequential and Simultaneous.
Rhythm Lead 1
Rhythm Lead 2
Rhythm Lead 3
Defines which lead will be used as rhythm lead 1, 2 or 3.
Choices are Primary, Secondary, I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V.
This setting is only relevant when 3X4 1R, 3X4 1R ST or 3X4 3R is selected as
Format.
Lead Sequence Defines the sequence in which the leads are presented.
Choices are Cabrera and Internat.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
121
Printing the 12-Lead ECG
Print a dedicated 12-Lead ECG report by selecting the Print Report pop-up key.
When you are working with an Information Center iX that provides 12-Lead analysis, the report
contains the 12-Lead analysis results as well as measurement values (e.g. ST values, QT values, HR)
which are also downloaded from the Information Center iX. If you work with an Information Center
which does not provide any 12-Lead analysis results, the report only contains the measurement values.
In this case, however, the values are based on the real-time measurements made at the bedside.
Consequently, the measurement values in the report might differ in the two cases, due to the slightly
different algorithm approaches of patient monitor (real-time measurement) and Information Center iX
(diagnostic interpretation of 12-Lead capture).
Downloading Analysis Results (PIIC iX only)
Download analysis results from the IntelliVue Information Center by selecting Show Analysis. Return
to the previous screen by selecting Hide Analysis.
Reviewing Previewed or Stored 12-Lead Captures
To view 12-Lead captures previewed or stored on the monitor or 12-Lead captures stored at the
IntelliVue Information Center (PIIC iX only), select Review 12 Lead. You can then select from a list
of 12-Lead captures available for the current patient.
The 12-Lead captures in the list may be marked with a symbol, for example an open or closed padlock
to indicate unlocked or locked status or a * to indicate preview status.
Information Center Remote Export (PIIC iX only)
Use the Export key to remotely start the 12-Lead export functionality of the IntelliVue Information
Center.
Information Center Remote Lock/Unlock (PIIC iX only)
Use the Lock key to remotely lock the 12-Lead capture at the IntelliVue Information Center. If it is
already locked, the Unlock key will be displayed.
Capture 12-Lead Pop-up Keys
Here is a summary of all the pop-up keys available during the 12-Lead ECG procedure:
Pop-up Keys Selecting this pop-up key lets you
Admit Patient enter the age and gender for the patient, to allow analysis of the 12-Lead
ECG.
Change View switch between the single column and two-column display of the realtime
wave data.
Capture Waves capture the current ECG waves and open the preview window.
Show Waves return to the realtime 12-Lead ECG view.
Setup 12 Lead choose settings for filter, gain, display layout, etc.
Enter OrderNo. enter an order number that is stored with the capture and displayed in the
title bar of the pop-up keys.
Print Report print a 12-Lead report.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
122
Setting Up the 12-Lead ECG
You can make settings that will be stored and used in future as default settings for each 12-Lead ECG
capture made.
1Select the HR numerics on the screen to enter Setup ECG.
2Select 12Lead.
3The Setup 12 Lead window opens for you to make the default settings.
For a description of the available settings, see “Changing Settings for a Captured 12-Lead ECG” on
page 120.
EASI ECG Lead Placement
Using a standard 5-electrode set in EASI lead placement you can monitor up to 12 standard ECG leads
simultaneously and continuously at the bedside. EASI provides a monitoring method for trending ST
segment changes that can provide an early indication of ischemia.
WARNING
EASI-derived 12-lead ECGs and their measurements are approximations to conventional 12-lead
ECGs. As the 12-lead ECG derived with EASI is not exactly identical to the 12-lead conventional
ECG obtained from an electrocardiograph, it should not be used for diagnostic interpretations.
Respiratory monitoring is also possible with the EASI placement; respiration is measured between the
I and A electrodes.
Place the electrodes as accurately as possible to obtain the best quality EASI measurements.
When EASI lead placement is selected, EASI is shown beside the 1 mV calibration bar on the ECG
wave on the display, and EASI is marked on any recorder strips and printouts.
EASI Monitoring During INOP Conditions
If one of the derived EASI leads has an INOP condition (for example, Lead Off), a flat line is
displayed. After 10 seconds, the directly acquired EASI AI, AS, or ES lead (depending on which is
available) is displayed with the corresponding lead label. This causes an arrhythmia relearn.
Store & Send store the captured 12-Lead ECG in the monitor and send it to the
Information Center.
Review 12 Lead view a list of 12-Lead captures available at the monitor or at the IntelliVue
Information Center, and select one for review.
Show Analysis download analysis results from the IntelliVue Information Center
Export remotely export 12-Lead ECG data from the IntelliVue Information Center
to an ECG management system (see the Information Center Instructions for
Use for details).
Lock / Unlock remotely lock/unlock the 12-Lead capture at the IntelliVue Information
Center.
Pop-up Keys Selecting this pop-up key lets you
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
123
EASI Electrode Placement
ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview
The ECG and arrhythmia alarms available depend on which measurements are switched on, and the
arrhythmia option enabled for your monitor.
• Cardiotach alarms are available when HR is on and the active alarm source is ECG, but arrhythmia
is switched off
• Basic arrhythmia alarms are available when Arrhythmia is switched on
• Advanced arrhythmia alarms are available when Arrhythmia is switched on and the Advanced
Arrhythmia option has been enabled for your monitor
1E (V) - on the lower sternum at the level of
the fifth intercostal space
2A (LL) - on the left midaxillary line at the
same level as the E electrode
3S (LA) - on the upper sternum
4I (RA) - on the right midaxillary line at the
same level as the E electrode
5N - reference electrode - can be anywhere,
usually below the sixth rib on the right hip
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
124
Using ECG Alarms
ECG alarms can be switched on and off and the high and low alarm limits changed just like other
measurement alarms, as described in the “Alarms” chapter. Special alarm features which apply only to
ECG are described here.
Extreme Alarm Limits for Heart Rate
The extreme rate alarms, Extreme Tachy and Extreme Brady, generated by the active alarm source,
either HR or Pulse, are set in Configuration Mode by adding a set value (the value) to the high and
low alarm limits.
You need to know which value has been configured for your monitor. Changing the high and low
alarm limits automatically changes the extreme alarm limits within the allowed range.
To see the extreme rate alarms set for your monitor, in the Setup ECG menu, see the menu items Δ
ExtrTachy and Δ ExtrBrady.
Cardiotach Alarms Additional Alarms with Basic
Arrhythmia Option
Additional Alarms with
Enhanced Arrhythmia Option
***Asystole
***Ventricular Fibrillation/
Tachycardia
***Extreme Bradycardia
***Extreme Tachycardia
**High heart rate
**Low heart rate
***Ventricular Tachycardia
**Pacer Not Capture
**Pacer Not Pacing
**PVCs/min HIGH (PVC >
limit/min)
**Afib
**End Afib
**Supraventricular Tach
**Missed Beat
**Pause
**Irregular HR
**End Irregular HR
**Ventricular Rhythm
**Run PVCs High
**Pair PVCs
**R-on-T PVCs
**Ventricular bigeminy
**Ventricular trigeminy
**Non-sustain VT
**Multiform PVCs
1Extreme Brady Limit
2Low Limit
3High Limit
4Extreme Tachy Limit
5 Extreme Brady
6Extreme Tachy
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
125
ECG Alarms Off Disabled
Be aware that your hospital department may have decided to disable the Alarms Off setting for ECG
in the monitor's Configuration Mode. In this case, HR alarms cannot be switched off in Monitoring
Mode. If you try to switch off the HR alarms, you will see the message To activate enter Config and
enable Alarms Off.
HR Alarms When Arrhythmia Analysis is Switched Off
When arrhythmia analysis is switched off, only these HR-related alarms will be detected:
• the asystole alarm
• the ventricular fibrillation/tachycardia alarm
• the extreme tachycardia and extreme bradycardia alarms
• the high heart rate and low heart rate alarms.
Enhanced Asystole Detection
In order to improve alarming on asystole under certain conditions, you can set Asystole Detect. in
Configuration Mode to Enhanced. In enhanced mode an asystole alarm will be suppressed for up to
five seconds if a valid beat-to-beat Pulse is detected from a Pressure.
ECG Safety Information
CAUTION
Interference from instruments near the patient and ESU interference can cause problems with the
ECG wave. See the monitor specifications for more information.
WARNING
Defibrillation and Electrosurgery:
Do not touch the patient, or table, or instruments, during defibrillation.
After defibrillation, the screen display recovers within 10 seconds if the correct electrodes are used and
applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
ECG cables can be damaged when connected to a patient during defibrillation. Check cables for
functionality before using them again.
According to AAMI specifications the peak of the synchronized defibrillator discharge should be
delivered within 60 ms of the peak of the R wave. The signal at the ECG output on the IntelliVue
patient monitors is delayed by a maximum of 30 ms. Your biomedical engineer should verify that your
ECG/Defibrillator combination does not exceed the recommended maximum delay of 60 ms.
When using electrosurgical (ES) equipment, never place ECG electrodes near to the grounding plate of
the ES device, as this can cause a lot of interference on the ECG signal.
General:
When you are connecting the electrodes or the patient cable, make sure that the connectors never
come into contact with other conductive parts, or with earth. In particular, make sure that all of the
ECG electrodes are attached to the patient, to prevent them from contacting conductive parts or earth.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
126
During surgery:
Use the appropriate orange electrode ECG safety cable, or lead cable with an orange connector, for
measuring ECG in the operating room. These cables have extra circuitry to protect the patient from
burns during cautery, and they decrease electrical interference. This also reduces the hazard of burns in
case of a defective neutral electrode at the HF device. These cables cannot be used for measuring
respiration.
Pacemaker failure:
During complete heart block or pacemaker failure to pace/capture, tall P-waves (greater than 1/5 of
the average R-wave height) may be erroneously counted by the monitor, resulting in missed detection
of cardiac arrest.
Patients exhibiting intrinsic rhythm:
When monitoring paced patients who exhibit only intrinsic rhythm, the monitor may erroneously
count pace pulses as QRS complexes when the algorithm first encounters them, resulting in missed
detection of cardiac arrest.
The risk of missing cardiac arrest may be reduced by monitoring these patients with low heart rate limit
at or slightly above the basic/demand pacemaker rate. A low heart rate alarm alerts you when the
patient's heart rate drops to a level where pacing is needed. Proper detection and classification of the
paced rhythm can then be determined.
Filtered ECG signal from external instruments:
Instruments such as defibrillators or telemetry units produce a filtered ECG signal. When this signal is
used as an input to the bedside monitor, it is filtered again. If this twice-filtered signal is passed to the
arrhythmia algorithm, it may cause the algorithm to fail to detect pace pulses, pacemaker non-capture,
or asystole, thus compromising paced patient monitoring performance.
External pacing electrodes:
When a pacemaker with external pacing electrodes is being used on a patient, arrhythmia monitoring is
severely compromised due to the high energy level in the pacer pulse. This may result in the arrhythmia
algorithm's failure to detect pacemaker noncapture or asystole.
Fusion beat pacemakers:
Pacemakers that create fusion beats (pace pulse on top of the QRS complex) cannot be detected by the
monitor's QRS detector.
Rate adaptive pacemakers:
Implanted pacemakers which can adapt to the Minute Ventilation rate may occasionally react on the
Impedance measurement used by patient monitors for the determination of the Resp value and
execute pacing with the maximum programmed rate. Switching off the Resp measurement can prevent
this.
Line isolation monitor transients:
When electrodes or lead wires are loose or detached, the monitor becomes susceptible to switching
transients from some types of line isolation monitors. Line isolation monitor transients may resemble
actual cardiac waveforms and thus inhibit heart rate alarms. To minimize the chance of this occurring,
always adhere to the instructions for skin preparation and electrode placement given in this chapter.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
127
About Arrhythmia Monitoring
Arrhythmia analysis provides information on your patient's condition, including heart rate, PVC rate,
rhythm, and ectopics. The monitor uses the user-selected primary and secondary ECG leads for single-
lead or multi-lead arrhythmia analysis. During arrhythmia analysis, the monitor continuously
• optimizes ECG signal quality. This is important for arrhythmia analysis. The monitor continuously
filters the ECG signal to remove baseline wander, muscle artifact, and signal irregularities. Also, if
the Patient Paced status is set to Yes, pace pulses are filtered out to avoid processing them as QRS
beats.
• detects beats, for example, QRS complexes, identifying them for further analysis.
• measures signal features such as R-wave height, width, and timing.
• creates beat templates, and classifies and labels beats to aid in rhythm analysis and alarm detection.
• examines the ECG signal for ventricular fibrillation, asystole, and noise.
Arrhythmia Options
Your monitor has either the basic or the enhanced arrhythmia option. Both options provide rhythm
and ectopic status messages and beat labeling. The number of rhythms being classified, events being
detected, and alarms generated differs according to the option. The alarms available with the different
options are listed in the section “ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview” on page 123, the rhythm and
ectopic messages detected are listed in “Arrhythmia Status Messages” on page 130.
Where Can I Find More Information?
See the Application Notes on ST and Arrhythmia supplied on your documentation DVD for detailed
information on the arrhythmia algorithm and its clinical application.
Switching Arrhythmia Analysis On and Off
1In the Setup Arrhy menu, select Arrhythmia to toggle between On and Off.
2Select the Confirm pop-up key which appears at the bottom of the screen.
Be aware that when arrhythmia analysis is switched off,
– the message Arrhythmia Off appears beside the ECG wave, if configured to do so
– only the HR-related alarms are detected (the asystole alarm, the ventricular fibrillation/
tachycardia alarm, the extreme tachycardia and extreme bradycardia alarms, the high heart rate
and low heart rate alarms)
– HR High and HR Low alarms behave like normal yellow alarms, no timeout periods are active.
Choosing an ECG Lead for Arrhythmia Monitoring
It is important to select a suitable lead for arrhythmia monitoring.
Guidelines for non-paced patients are:
– QRS complex should be tall and narrow (recommended amplitude > 0.5 mV)
– R-Wave should be above or below the baseline (but not bi-phasic)
– T-wave should be smaller than 1/3 R-wave height
– the P-wave should be smaller than 1/5 R-wave height.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
128
For paced patients, in addition to the above, the pace pulse should be:
– not wider than the normal QRS
– the QRS complexes should be at least twice the height of pace pulses
– large enough to be detected, with no re-polarization.
To prevent detection of P-waves or baseline noises as QRS complexes, the minimum detection level
for QRS complexes is set at 0.15 mV, according to AAMI-EC 13 specifications. Adjusting the ECG
wave size on the monitor display (gain adjustment) does not affect the ECG signal which is used for
arrhythmia analysis. If the ECG signal is too small, you may get false alarms for pause or asystole.
Aberrantly-Conducted Beats
As P-waves are not analyzed, it is difficult and sometimes impossible for the monitor to distinguish
between an aberrantly-conducted supraventricular beat and a ventricular beat. If the aberrant beat
resembles a ventricular beat, it is classified as ventricular. You should always select a lead where the
aberrantly-conducted beats have an R-wave that is as narrow as possible to minimize incorrect calls.
Ventricular beats should look different from these 'normal beats'. Instead of trying to select two leads
with a narrow R-wave, it may be easier to just select one lead and use single lead arrhythmia
monitoring. Extra vigilance is required by the clinician for this type of patient.
Atrial Fibrillation Alarm
The monitor performs atrial fibrillation analysis using information about the RR irregularity, PR
interval variability and P wave variability.
In order to generate an Afib alarm the following criteria must be detected for 1 minute:
• normal beat RR intervals must be irregular
• PR interval deviation must be large
• P-wave region must not match well
Atrial fibrillation analysis is only available for adult patients and atrial fibrillation detection cannot be
performed on PVCs or Paced beats.
An ** End AFIB alarm will occur when no atrial fibrillation waveform was detected for a configured
delay time.
Since most atrial flutters have regular RR intervals, they cannot be detected by the atrial fibrillation
algorithm.
An ** AFIB can be falsely detected in the presence of:
• sinus arrhythmia,
• muscle noise, or
• electrode motion artifact.
If you also have monitors with earlier software revisions, the ** AFIB and ** End AFIB alarms will not
be generated after a transfer to one of these monitors. Always leave the Irregular HR alarm switched
on, so that this alarm can be generated in such situations.
See the Application Note on Arrhythmia/ST supplied on your documentation DVD for detailed
information on the arrhythmia algorithm and ECG analysis.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
129
Intermittent Bundle Branch Block
Bundle branch and the other fascicular blocks create a challenge for the arrhythmia algorithm. If the
QRS during the block changes considerably from the learned normal, the blocked beat may be
incorrectly classified as ventricular, causing false PVC alarms. You should always select a lead where
the bundle branch block beats have an R-wave that is as narrow as possible to minimize incorrect calls.
Ventricular beats should look different from these 'normal beats'. Instead of trying to select two leads
with a narrow R-wave, it may be easier to just select one lead and use single lead arrhythmia
monitoring. Extra vigilance is required by the clinician for this type of patient.
Understanding the Arrhythmia Display
Your monitor screen may look slightly different from the illustration.
1Beat label
2Pace pulse marks
3Rhythm status message
4PVC Numeric
5HR Numeric
6Ectopic status message
7Delayed arrhythmia wave
Viewing Arrhythmia Waves
To review arrhythmia beat labels, in the Setup Arrhy menu, select Annotate Arrhy.
The wave showing the primary ECG lead will be delayed by six seconds and shown on a gray
background. Beat labels will be annotated above the ECG wave and Delayed will be written beside it.
To return to the normal ECG primary lead display, select Annotate Arrhy again.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
130
Arrhythmia Beat Labels
Arrhythmia beat labels tell you how the monitor is classifying beats.
N = Normal
V = Ventricular Ectopic
S = Supra-ventricular Premature
P = Paced
' = Pacer spike
" = Biventricular Pacer Spike
L = Learning patient's ECG
A = Artifact (noisy episode)
? = Insufficient information to classify beats
I = Inoperative condition (e.g., LEADS OFF)
M = Pause or missed beat
Arrhythmia Status Messages
The monitor displays two types of status messages:
• Rhythm Status Messages -- to indicate the patient's rhythm.
• Ectopic Status Messages -- to indicate the presence of ectopic beats.
These status messages are shown on the right hand side of the primary ECG wave. They are updated
every second, with the exception of the Sinus and Supraventricular (SV) rhythm messages.
The Sinus and SV rhythm messages are updated based on the current heart rate, taking into account
the patient category (adult, pediatric, or neonatal). For the message to change from one rhythm status
to another, the HR must be in the new range for five beats.
If you have basic arrhythmia capability, you will get only messages for the alarms provided with this
level.
Rhythm Status Messages
The label B or E indicates basic (B) or enhanced (E) arrhythmia capability.
Rhythm Status Message Description B or E
Asystole No QRS for 4 consecutive seconds in absence of vent fib or
chaotic signal
B, E
Vent Fib/Tach A fibrillatory wave for 4 consecutive seconds B, E
Vtach A dominant rhythm of adjacent Vs and a HR > the V-Tach
Heart Rate Limit
B, E
Sustained VT Ventricular tachycardia rhythm for more than 15 seconds E
Vent Rhythm A dominant rhythm of adjacent PVCs and a HR ≤ the V-Tach
HR Limit
E
Vent Bigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V E
Vent Trigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, N, V, N, N, V E
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
131
Ectopic Status Messages
The label B or E indicates basic (B) or enhanced (E) arrhythmia capability.
Paced Rhythm A dominant rhythm of paced beats B, E
Irregular HR Consistently irregular rhythm E
Sinus Brady
Sinus Rhythm
Sinus Tach
A dominant rhythm of SV beats preceded by P-waves B, E
SV Brady
SV Rhythm
SV Tach
A dominant rhythm of SV beats not preceded by P-waves B, E
Unknown ECG Rhythm Rhythm cannot be determined B, E
Learning ECG Algorithm is learning the ECG beat morphology B, E
Learning Rhythm Algorithm is learning the rhythm of the classified beats B, E
Cannot Analyze ECG ECG signal is predominantly invalid and therefore cannot be
analyzed
B, E
Rhythm Status Message Description B or E
Ectopic Status Message Explanation B or E
(No message displayed) No ectopic activity within the last minute
Run PVCs More than 2 consecutive PVCs within the last minute E
Pair PVCs Pair PVCs within the last minute E
Pacer Not Capt Pause with pace pulse (paced patient only) within the last
minute
B, E
PacerNotPacing Pause without pace pulse (paced patient only) within the last
minute
B, E
Pause No beat detected for 1.75 x average R-R interval for HR <120,
or
No beat for 1 second with HR >120 (non-paced patient only),
or
No beat detected for more than the set pause threshold.
E
R-On-T PVCs R-ON-T detected within the last minute E
Multiform PVCs Multiform PVCs detected within the last minute E
Frequent SVPBs SVPB count within last minute is greater than 5 E
SVPBs 1-5 SVPBs in the last minute with a sinus rhythm and no Vs E
SV Beats SV count within last minute and rhythm status is paced B, E
Paced Beats Paced beat count within last minute and rhythm status is not
paced
B, E
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
132
Arrhythmia Relearning
During a learning phase:
• Alarm timeout periods are cleared
• Stored arrhythmia templates are cleared
• Asystole, Vfib, and HR alarms (when there are enough beats to compute the HR) are active. No
other alarms are active.
Initiating Arrhythmia Relearning Manually
To initiate relearning manually, in the Setup Arrhy menu, select Relearn Arrhy.
– While the monitor is learning, the delayed arrhythmia wave displays the beat label L and the
rhythm status message Learning ECG.
– Next, the monitor determines the dominant rhythm. The beats are labeled N, and the rhythm
status message changes to Learning Rhythm.
After relearning is complete, you should check the delayed arrhythmia wave to ensure that the
algorithm is labeling the beats correctly.
If beats are still not classified correctly, check that the ECG is optimized for arrhythmia monitoring.
You may need to select a different lead or change the electrodes or electrode positions if there is
excessive noise, unstable voltage, low amplitude, or large P- or T-waves.
Automatic Arrhythmia Relearn
Arrhythmia relearning is initiated automatically whenever:
• ECG monitoring is switched on
• The ECG Lead or Lead Label of the primary/secondary lead is changed manually, or when
fallback occurs
• A Leads Off INOP condition (that has been active for > 60 seconds) ends.
If you are monitoring multi-lead arrhythmia and there is a change in one lead only, relearning happens
only in the affected lead. During this learning phase, the system will continue monitoring using the
other lead. Therefore, the delayed arrhythmia wave is not labeled L and there is no Learning ECG
rhythm status message. In addition, alarm timeout periods are maintained, stored arrhythmia templates
are maintained for the operative lead, and all alarms switched on are active.
Arrhythmia Relearn and Lead Fallback
Lead fallback triggers an automatic arrhythmia relearn.
WARNING
If arrhythmia learning takes place during ventricular rhythm, the ectopics may be incorrectly learned as
the normal QRS complex. This may result in missed detection of subsequent events of V-Tach and V-
Fib.
For this reason you should:
• take care to initiate arrhythmia relearning only during periods of predominantly normal rhythm
and when the ECG signal is relatively noise-free
• be aware that arrhythmia relearning can happen automatically
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
133
• respond to any INOP messages (for example, if you are prompted to reconnect electrodes)
• be aware that a disconnected EASI electrode triggers an arrhythmia relearn on all leads
• always ensure that the arrhythmia algorithm is labeling beats correctly.
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia alarms can be switched on and off and the alarm settings changed just like other
measurement alarms, as described in the Alarms section. Special alarm features which apply only to
arrhythmia are described here.
The different alarms detected and generated by the monitor depend on the level of arrhythmia analysis
that is enabled. For a complete list of arrhythmia alarms and INOPs, see the “Alarms” chapter.
The monitor detects arrhythmia alarm conditions by comparing ECG data to a set of pre-defined
criteria. An alarm can be triggered by a rate exceeding a threshold (for example, HR >xx), an abnormal
rhythm (for example, Ventricular Bigeminy), or an ectopic event (for example, Pair PVCs).
Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms
Yellow arrhythmia alarms are short yellow alarms specific to arrhythmia-related patient conditions.
The heart rate alarms (High HR and Low HR) can be configured as short yellow or standard yellow
alarms. When they are standard yellow alarms they exist independently of the other arrhythmia alarms
and no timeout periods apply.
WARNING
When arrhythmia analysis is on, all yellow ECG and arrhythmia alarms are short yellow alarms (one-
star). This means that the yellow alarm lamp and the tones are active for six seconds only, after which
the blinking numeric and the alarm message remain for up to three minutes. The only exception to this
are the HR High and Low alarms which can be configured as standard yellow alarms. Red alarms
behave as usual.
Arrhythmia Alarms and Latching
When using arrhythmia analysis, Visual Latching and Audible Latching should be on for red alarms,
or at least Visual Latching should be on. Because of the transient nature of arrhythmia alarms, many
arrhythmia conditions may go unnoticed if alarm latching is off. This setting can only be changed in
Configuration Mode.
Switching Individual Arrhythmia Alarms On and Off
Some arrhythmia alarms can be individually switched on or off:
Non-Sustain, Vent Rhythm, Run PVCs, Pair PVCs, R-On-T PVCs, V.Bigeminy, V.Trigeminy,
Multif.PVCs, Pacer N.Cap, Pacer N.Pac, Pause, SVT, IrregularHR, Missed Beat, PVCs/min and Afib.
To switch individual alarms on or off, in the Setup Arrhy menu, select the alarm from the list to switch
between On and Off. Depending on your configuration, some alarms may not be available in the list
and cannot be switched on or off here.
The monitor displays the INOP message Some ECG AlarmsOff, if configured, when more alarms are
switched off than configured in your active profile.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
134
Switching All Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms On or Off
All yellow arrhythmia alarms can be switched on and off together. To do this,
•In the Setup Arrhy menu, select All Yellow Off or All Yellow On.
Adjusting the Arrhythmia Alarm Limits
Some arrhythmia alarms have limits which can be individually adjusted:
VTach HR, VTach Run, PVCs/min, Vent Rhythm, SVT HR, SVT Run, Asystole Thresh., Pause
Threshold, Afib/IHR End Dly.
1To adjust alarm limits, in the Setup Arrhy menu, select the alarm to be adjusted.
2Select the appropriate setting from the pop-up list.
Arrhythmia Alarm Timeout Periods
Normally, an arrhythmia alarm is announced when an alarm condition is detected. However, there are
certain situations that can inhibit the audible and visible indications of the alarm even though the alarm
condition was detected. These include:
• if a more serious alarm condition is active in the same chain
• if a timeout period is in effect for a particular alarm
• if a timeout period is in effect for a higher alarm in that chain.
See “Arrhythmia Alarm Chaining” on page 135 for more details on alarm chains.
What is a Timeout Period?
Timeout periods are automatically started when a yellow arrhythmia alarm is detected. During this
period, the same alarm condition will not generate another alarm. Alarm conditions further down the
same arrhythmia alarm chain will also not generate an alarm, but alarms further up the chain will: see
“Arrhythmia Alarm Chaining” on page 135.
To view the timeout period configured for your monitor, in the Setup Arrhy menu, see the menu
items TimeOut 1st and TimeOut 2nd.
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
** AFIB and ** Irregular HR alarms do not have a timeout period. These alarms can be generated
immediately after the corresponding end alarm was generated.
When ** HR High and ** HR Low alarms are configured as standard yellow alarms, they do not have a
timeout period.
Resetting the Timeout Period
To reset the timeout period, press the Alarms key and then reselect it.
How are Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms Indicated?
When a yellow arrhythmia alarm is generated, it triggers visual and audible indicators. Yellow
arrhythmia alarms are always set to latch visually for three minutes except HR High/Low alarms, if
configured to standard yellow. Depending on the alarm condition, audible and visual alarm indicators
will appear as follows:
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
135
If you silence a yellow arrhythmia alarm and the alarm condition still exists, the visual indicators
continue until the condition stops. You will get an alarm reminder every time the configured timeout
period has expired.
If you silence a yellow arrhythmia alarm and the alarm condition has stopped, the visual
indicators are immediately cleared. Silencing an alarm does not reset its timeout period, so you will not
get a realarm for the same condition or lower on the chain until the timeout expires.
Arrhythmia Alarm Chaining
When arrhythmia analysis is switched on, multiple alarm conditions may be present. Announcing all of
the detected alarm conditions would be confusing, and might hide a more serious condition. For this
reason, arrhythmia alarms are prioritized in three alarm "chains": PVC Alarms; Beat Detection Alarms,
and Rate Alarms.
Only the highest priority alarm condition in each chain is announced. Lower priority alarms in the
same chain will not be announced while an alarm is active or during the configured timeout period. If
alarm conditions of equal severity from different chains are detected, the alarm condition that occurred
most recently is announced.
See “ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview” on page 123 for information on which alarms are
included in the different arrhythmia options. See “Arrhythmia Alarm Timeout Periods” on page 134
for an explanation of how alarm timeouts work.
Alarm Condition Example Short yellow alarm tone sounds Alarm message
displayed
Single alarm
instance
Non-sustained V-
tach
when alarm condition is initially
detected
for 3 minutes (latching
time)
Continuous alarm
condition
PVCs/min HIGH when alarm condition is initially
detected and - as an alarm
reminder - every time the
configured timeout period has
expired
until the alarm
condition stops, plus a
maximum of three
minutes latching time
Same intermittent
alarm condition
Pair of PVCs each time the alarm condition is
detected, provided that the
configured timeout period has
expired
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
136
Examples of Alarm Chaining Logic
– If there is an active Vent Bigeminy alarm, a PVCs > xx/min will not be triggered because it is
lower on the same chain. However, a high HR alarm will become active because it is on a
different chain.
– Higher priority alarms supersede previous alarms. For example, if a Vent Trigeminy alarm is
active and a Pair PVCs occurs, the Pair alarm will be activated.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
137
Understanding PVC-Related Alarms
PVC-related alarms are detected on the basis of the current ventricular heart rate and the number of
consecutive PVCs counted (referred to as PVC Runs).
Example:
This diagram illustrates the conditions under which PVC alarms would be generated if the Vent
Rhythm Run limit is set to 12, the V-Tach Run Limit is set to 8, and the V-Tach HR Limit is set to 100.
You will see that
• if both the V-Tach Heart Rate Limit and the V-Tach Run Limit are exceeded, a red V-Tach alarm is
generated
• if the ventricular heart rate exceeds the V-Tach Heart Rate Limit but not the V-Tach Run Limit, a
yellow Non-Sustain VT alarm is generated.
About ST Monitoring
The monitor performs ST segment analysis on normal and atrially paced beats and calculates ST
segment elevations and depressions. This information can be displayed in the form of ST numerics and
snippets on the monitor.
The monitor also performs ST Elevation (STE) analysis using automated ISO and J point
determination and measuring the ST segment directly at the J point (J +0). This is based on the
recommendations for measuring ST Elevation published by the American Heart Association, the
American College of Cardiology and the European Society of Cardiology.
All available leads can be monitored continuously. The ECG waveform does not need to be displayed
on the monitor for ST Segment analysis.
ST analysis is always performed using a dedicated filter which ensures diagnostic quality. If you are
monitoring ECG using an ECG filter mode other than Diagnostic, the ST segment of the ECG wave
may look different from the ST segment of the ST snippet for the same wave. For diagnostic
evaluation of the ST segment, always switch to Diagnostic filter mode or use the ST snippet.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
138
WARNING
Some clinical conditions may make it difficult to achieve reliable ST monitoring, for example:
• if you are unable to get a lead that is not noisy
• if arrhythmias such as atrial fib/flutter are present, which may cause an irregular baseline
• if the patient is continuously ventricularly paced
• if the patient has left bundle branch block.
You should consider switching ST monitoring off if these conditions are present.
This monitor provides ST level change information; the clinical significance of the ST level change
information should be determined by a physician.
ST segment monitoring is intended for use with adult patients only and is not clinically validated for
use with neonatal and pediatric patients. For this reason, the recommended - and default - setting for
ST monitoring in neonatal and pediatric modes is ST Analysis: Off.
Switching ST or STE On and Off
ST and STE analysis can be switched on and off independently.
To switch all ST monitoring on or off, in the Setup ST Analysis menu, select ST Analysis to switch
between On and Off.
To switch all STE monitoring on or off, in the Setup ST Elevation menu, select STE to switch between
On and Off.
Selecting Leads for ST Analysis
You select which leads to use for ST analysis in the Setup ST Analysis menu.
To see the current list of leads selected for ST analysis:
1Enter the Setup ST Analysis menu.
2Select Setup ST Leads. This opens the Setup ST Leads pop-up window. Leads chosen for ST
monitoring are listed here. There are two pop-up keys at the bottom of the screen, Add and
Delete. If all leads are already selected, the Add pop-up key is disabled.
To choose a lead for ST monitoring:
1Select the Add key at the bottom of the Setup ST Leads window. This opens the Choices pop-up
window.
2Choose a lead from the list for ST monitoring. This closes the Choices window and adds the
selected lead to the list of chosen leads.
To disable ST monitoring for a lead:
1Choose a lead from the list in the Setup ST Leads window.
2Select the Delete key. This removes this lead from the list.
NOTE
The order in which ST leads are listed in the Setup ST Leads menu determines the order in which ST
leads are displayed on the monitor screen.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
139
To change the order in which ST leads are displayed,
1In the Setup ST Leads menu, choose a lead from the list.
2Select the Sort Up or Sort Down key to move the lead up or down in the list.
Understanding the ST Display and Windows
Your monitor screen may be configured to look slightly different from the illustrations.
ST Numerics
Up to 12 ST numerics plus the ST index can be displayed on the monitor screen. They can be
configured to show beside the measurement numerics, beside the ECG wave, or beside the ST snippet.
A positive ST value indicates ST segment elevation; a negative value indicates depression.
ST numerics are displayed in the order in which you select ST leads for analysis. If there is additional
space in the field assigned to ST numerics, the monitor will display extra numerics in the order in
which they appear in the list in Setup ST Leads, in the Setup ST Analysis menu. Any ST leads
switched on for analysis that do not fit in the assigned numerics field are shown in succession in place
of the last ST numeric.
ST Index
The ST index numeric (STindx) is the sum of the absolute values for the ST leads V2, V5, aVF.
Because it is based on absolute values, it is always a positive number. If you haven't selected one of the
leads V2, V5, and aVF for ST analysis, the ST index numeric will display a question mark "?".
To switch the ST index numeric on or off for display, in the Setup ST Analysis menu, select ST-Index
to toggle between On and Off.
ST Snippets
ST snippets show a one second wave segment for each measured ST lead. The most recent snippet is
drawn in the same color as the ECG wave, usually green, superimposed over the stored baseline
snippet, drawn in a different color. The comparison shows any deviation in the measurement since the
baseline snippet was stored, for example as a result of a procedure carried out on the patient. The
information is updated once per minute.
You can see ST snippets in the Adjust ST Points window or the ST View window.
1ST numerics
2Current HR alarm limits
3Current heart rate
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
140
ST View Window
The ST View Window shows a current ST snippet and numeric with a baseline snippet and numeric.
The two snippets are in different colors, so that you can differentiate between them easily and see at a
glance which numerics belong to which snippet. In the upper left corner the current lead and the ISO/
J-Point mode for current and baseline snippets is shown. On the right side all available ST numerics
are shown. The date and time of the baseline snippet is shown at the bottom of the window.
The ST View Window opens with the ST pop-up keys Current / Baseline / Overlap (to select viewing
mode), Show Points / Hide Points, Update Baseline, Record ST, STE View, Adjust ST Points, ST
Map, Setup ST and arrow keys for scrolling through the available leads.
• To view the ST View window, select the ST numerics, then ST View.
1Current Lead
2ISO/J-point mode for current snippet
3ISO/J-point mode for baseline snippet
41 mV calibration bar
5Current ST snippet and ST baseline snippet overlapped
6Timestamp of most recently stored baseline snippet
7All available ST numerics for current snippet and baseline snippet
The ST point, J-point and ISO point can be hidden using the Hide Points pop-up key.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
141
STE View Window
The STE View window shows a current ST snippet and STE numeric with an ST baseline snippet. The
two snippets are in different colors, so that you can differentiate between them easily. In the upper left
corner the current lead is shown. On the right side all available STE numerics are shown. The date and
time of the ST baseline snippet is shown at the bottom of the window.
The STE View window opens with the pop-up keys Current / Baseline / Overlap (to select viewing
mode), Show Points/Hide Points, Record STE, ST View, ST Map, Setup ST and arrow keys for
scrolling through the available leads.
The ST point, J-point and ISO point can be hidden using the Hide Points pop-up key.
Updating ST Baseline Snippets
ST analysis requires valid samples to measure and store a snippet. ST Snippets and ST values are
updated every minute. If there is artifact in the signal, it may take longer for an ST snippet and an ST
value to appear.
The first baseline is stored automatically after ST monitoring is started, or when a new patient is
admitted.
To update ST baselines,
1Select the ST numerics then ST View to open the ST View window.
2In the ST View window, select Update Baseline to store all current snippets as baselines. This
deletes all previously-stored baselines.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
142
About the ST Measurement Points
The ST value for each beat complex is the vertical difference between the ISO point and the ST point,
as shown in the diagram below. The isoelectric (ISO) point provides the baseline, the ST point is at the
midpoint of the ST segment. The J point is where the QRS complex changes its slope; as it is a fixed
distance away from the ST point, it can be useful to help you position the ST point correctly.
CAUTION
If using ST analysis, the ST measurement points need to be adjusted when you start monitoring, and if
the patient's heart rate or ECG morphology changes significantly, as this may affect the size of the QT
interval and thus the placement of the ST point. Artifactual ST segment depression or elevation may
occur if the isoelectric point or the ST point is incorrectly set.
Always ensure that ST measurement points are appropriate for your patient.
Setting ISO and J-Point Detection Mode
There are two modes for ISO and J-point detection: Auto and Manual. In Manual mode you can set
the measurement points yourself. In Auto mode the measurement points will be determined
automatically.
To set the detection mode, in the Setup ST Analysis window,
1Select ISO/J-Pt.
2Select Auto or Manual mode.
Adjusting ST Measurement Points
If the ISO and J-point detection mode is set to Manual, all three measurement points can be set. In
Auto mode, only the ST point can be changed.
To adjust the ST measurement points, in the Setup ST Analysis menu,
1Select Adjust ST Points to open the Adjust ST Points window.
Alternatively, you can use the Adjust ST Points pop-up key in the ST View window.
2Select a suitable ECG lead for ST measurement, with a visible J-point and a visible P wave. Use the
up and down arrow keys to scroll through the ST snippets for the other ECG leads.
1R-wave peak at 0 msec
2J point, for example, 48 msec
3Difference = ST value
4ST measurement point, for
example, J + 60 msec
5Isoelectric point set to -80 msec
6P
7Q
8S
9T
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
143
3Select the ST point you need to adjust by touching the appropriate point on the screen. The
current choice is highlighted (ISO point -80 in the screen example).
The ISO-point cursor (1) positions the isoelectric point relative to the R-wave peak. The relation is
shown beside the ISO-point in milliseconds. Position the ISO-point in the middle of the flattest
part of the baseline (between the P and Q waves or in front of the P wave).
The J-point cursor (2) positions the J-point relative to the R-wave peak. It helps you to correctly
position the ST-point. Position the J-point at the end of the QRS complex and the beginning of
the ST segment.
The J-point cursor is not available if your monitor is configured to let you set the ST point directly.
1 ST label and the ST numeric that would apply using the current points
2 1mV calibration bar
3 Cursors for adjusting ST points
4 Highlighted ST point
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
144
To position the ST-point (3) relative to the J-point:
select either J+60 or J+80. Select J Point and use the arrow keys to move the J-Point and position
the ST-point at the midpoint of the ST segment.
To position the ST-point directly:
select ST Point and use the left and right arrow keys to position the ST point at the midpoint of the
ST segment.
4Select the Apply Changes pop-up key to activate the new ST measurement points and recalculate
all ST values.
The most recent ST Points adjustment time is displayed in the Adjust ST Points window. This
information is cleared when a patient is discharged or when a new Profile is loaded into the
monitor.
5To update the ST snippet shown in the Adjust ST Points window, select the Update pop-up key.
ST Alarms
ST alarms are yellow alarms. Each ST lead has its own alarm limit. ST alarms are triggered when an ST
value exceeds its alarm limit for more than one minute. Switching ST alarms off switches off alarms for
all ST leads.
If more than one ST measurement is in alarm, the monitor only displays the alarm message of the ST
lead which is currently furthest from its set alarm limits.
Changing ST Alarm Limits
The monitor can detect alarms on each ST lead separately, so you can set high and low ST alarm limits
individually for each ST lead. When two contiguous leads are available, ST alarms will be generated
when ST values of the two contiguous leads are outside the limit. When no contiguous lead is available
an ST alarm is generated when the ST value of the single lead is outside the limit.
Set the high and low alarm limits based on your assessment of the patient's clinical condition, unit
protocols, physician orders or medication-specified limits. A good guideline is + 1.0 mm or - 1.0 mm
from the patients's ST, or follow your hospital protocol.
1In the Setup ST Analysis menu, select the alarm to be adjusted.
2Select the appropriate setting.
STE Alarms
The STE alarm is a yellow alarm. It can be switched on and off in the Setup ST Elevation menu but
the limits can only be changed in Configuration mode. The STE alarm limits are gender specific and
can be set individually for limb leads, V2/V3 leads, and V1/V4/V5/V6 leads. The default values, for
example on V2 and V3 1.5 mm for females and 2.0 mm for males, are based on the recommendations
from the American Heart Association and American College of Cardiology.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
145
The ST Elevation measurements with automated J-point determination generate ST Elevation alarms,
in addition to the ST measurements at the user-defined ST point (J+offset), which may be useful for
ST depression alarms. When ST and STE analysis are both in use, this may result in redundant alarms
for ST elevations. Because of the different measurement points, there may be different values
obtained. Thus there could be an ST alarm and an STE alarm but the STE alarm may announce sooner
based upon the values obtained.
Viewing ST Maps
The monitor can derive a multi-axis portrait (map) from the ST analysis to help you detect changes in
ST values. It displays two planes obtained from a multilead ECG in a multi-axis diagram, where each
axis represents a lead. The ST value at the J point is given. The position of the axes within the diagram
correspond to the placement of the ECG leads. Each ST value is assigned to either a limb lead, or to a
chest lead. Every axis shows the polarity of the lead it represents. By joining adjacent ST values, the
monitor obtains the ST map. The contour line, and the map shading, is shown in the same color as the
ECG parameter.
Viewing an ST Map
To display an ST map,
•In the Main Setup menu, select ST Map.
Current View
In current view, the monitor displays an ST map that corresponds to the current ST values. Three or
more leads per plane are necessary to display a map.
The left of the following diagram shows leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, and aVF on the limb leads. On the
right, the V-leads (V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6) are on the chest leads.
1Alarm status indicator
2EASI Limb Leads
3EASI Chest Leads
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
146
4ST index (for EASI)
5ST label, value and polarity of corresponding lead
6ST map
If an ST lead is switched off, its axis is not shown in the map.
If a lead is in INOP (the value is being measured but is invalid or unavailable because, for example, the
corresponding ECG electrode is off), the area formed by the remaining ST leads is left open.
If there is insufficient information (for example, there are less than three chest leads) for a second ST
map to be displayed, the currently available ST values are displayed in place of the second ST map.
Additionally, when both ST maps are displayed, you can view the currently available ST values in the
ST Map (Current) or ST Map (Trend) window at any time. To do this, select the Show Values pop-up
key. The ST values are shown in place of the second ST map, and the pop-up key text changes to Hide
Values. Select the Hide Values Hide Values pop-up key and the display shows both ST maps again.
Trend View
In trend view, you can see up to four trended ST maps, and the current ST map, simultaneously. You
can configure the time interval between trended samples. The most recent map is shown in the same
color as the parameter itself. Past values change from white through dark gray. In the diagram below,
the time interval between trends is one minute. The first trended sample is white and is one minute old.
The second trended sample corresponds to the ST values two minutes ago and so forth. The ST values
on the diagrams show the current ST values.
If a lead is turned off, its axis is no longer shown. This has no impact on the presentation of trended
values that were recorded while the lead was still on.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
147
1Limb Leads
2Chest Leads
3current ST values
4trending interval
Working in the ST Map Task Window
You may need to activate the ST map task window to see all the data, and to access the pop-up keys.
Select the map view on screen to activate its task window. Once you activate it, you can perform the
tasks detailed here.
Switching Between ST Map Views
To switch between views,
•Select
Current View or Trend View to toggle between views.
If your trend view is empty, you need to adjust the priority of this measurement in the trending priority
list. See “Trend Priority” on page 220.
In this diagram, V4 was either temporarily switched off, or in INOP,
for around 30 seconds. No data was recorded. Consequently, the
affected maps are not closed.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
148
Displaying an ST Reference Baseline
You can display an ST reference baseline for the current view, or for the trended view. The baseline is
shown in yellow. However, if the ECG color is yellow, the baseline is shown in green. Use this baseline
to detect ST changes. The baseline is derived automatically whenever the monitor relearns arrhythmia
and also on user request.
Select Show Baseline/Hide Baseline to toggle between baseline display on and off.
Updating an ST Map Reference Baseline
To update the baseline,
•In the Setup ST Analysis menu, select ST View then select Update Baseline.
Changing the Scale of the ST Map
To change scale,
•Select
Size Up or Size Down to alter the size at which monitor displays the map.
Changing the Trending Interval
To determine how frequently the monitor displays a trended sample,
1In Trend view, select Select Interval.
2Select the required interval from the menu. The interval ranges between 12 seconds to 30 minutes.
Printing an ST Map Report
To print the most recently viewed (current or trend) window,
1Select Main Setup then select Reports.
2Select ST Map.
3Press Print.
About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring
The QT interval is defined as the time between the beginning of the Q-wave and the end of the T-
wave. It measures the total duration of the depolarization (QRS duration) and repolarization (ST-T)
phases of the ventricular action potential. QT interval monitoring can assist in the detection of
prolonged QT interval syndrome.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
149
The QT interval (1) has an inverse relationship to heart rate. Faster heart rates shorten the QT interval
and slower heart rates prolong the QT interval. Therefore there are several formulas used to correct
the QT interval for heart rate. The heart rate corrected QT interval is abbreviated as QTc. The monitor
uses as a default the Bazett correction formula and the alternative Fridericia formula can be selected in
Configuration Mode.
For QT interval monitoring to be effective, basic or enhanced arrhythmia monitoring should be turned
on.
QT Measurement Algorithm
The QT values are updated every five minutes except in the initial phase (first five minutes) where they
are updated once per minute. Normal or atrial paced beats and beats with a similar morphology are
averaged to form a representative waveform for further processing. Normal beats followed by a
premature QRS will be excluded from the measurements to prevent the premature beat from
obscuring the end of the T-wave. If the algorithm cannot form a representative waveform, for example
because the morphology of the beats is too varied, a Cannot Analyze QT INOP will be generated after
10 minutes. This is also the case if normal beats have been falsely labeled so that the algorithm does
not have enough valid beats to make QT measurements. No QT value is calculated if the QT-HR is
>150 bpm (Adult) or >180 bpm (Pedi/Neo).
Because of the different algorithm approaches, a QT/QTc measurement from a diagnostic 12-lead
program may differ from the realtime measurement on the monitor.
Where Can I Find More Information?
See the Application Note on QT/QTc Interval Monitoring and the QT Interval Monitoring Quick
Guide supplied on your documentation DVD for detailed information on the QT algorithm and
performance.
Indications For Use Of QT Interval Monitoring
Of special concern for QT monitoring is the administration of QT prolonging drugs to patients
identified with risk factors for Torsade de Pointe. Females, older patients and patients with
bradycardia, impaired left ventricular function (ischemia, left ventricular hypertrophy), hypokalemia
and hypomagnesemia are in this increased risk category.
Limitations For Use Of QT Interval Monitoring
Some conditions may make it difficult to achieve reliable QT monitoring, for example:
• the T-wave is very flat
• T-waves are not well defined due to atrial flutter or atrial fibrillation
• the end of the T-wave is difficult to define because of the presence of U-waves
• a high heart rate causes the P-wave to encroach on the end of the previous T-wave
• noise or high QRS morphology variation
For these cases you should select a lead with a good T-wave amplitude and no visible flutter activity,
and without a predominant U-wave or P-wave.
Some conditions such as left or right bundle branch block or hypertrophy can lead to a widened QRS
complex. If a long QTc is observed you should verify it to ensure that it is not caused by QRS
widening.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
150
Because normal beats followed by ventricular beats are not included in the analysis, no QT
measurement will be generated in the presence of a bigeminy rhythm.
If the heart rate is extremely high (over 150 bpm for adults and over 180 bpm for pediatrics and
neonates) QT will not be measured.
When the heart rate changes, it can take several minutes for the QT interval to stabilize. For reliable
QTc calculation it is important to avoid a region where the heart rate is changing.
WARNING
QT/QTc measurements should always be verified by a qualified clinician.
Selecting The QT Leads
For QT Monitoring you can select one of the following three modes:
• All Leads mode - all available leads (I, II, III, V, MCL, V1 - V6) are used to produce a global QT
measurement. For EASI lead placement, directly acquired AI, AS and ES leads are used.
• Primary-Lead mode - the primary lead will be used for QT measurement. If the original primary
lead becomes unavailable or is changed, QT measurement will continue with the new primary lead.
• Single-Lead mode - a single lead selected from all available leads (except the augmented leads) will
be used for QT measurement. QT measurement will stop if the selected lead becomes unavailable.
To select the mode,
1Select the QT numeric to enter the Setup QT Analysis window.
2Select QT Lead and select All, Primary Lead or one of the available single leads.
When using the All Leads mode, make sure when you compare QT values that they are based on the
same set of leads.
Changing the lead(s) used for QT measurements will not cause the baseline to be reset.
QT View
In the QT View window you can verify that the QT algorithm detects correct Q and T points.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
151
The current waves are shown in the upper half of the window and the baseline waves in a different
color below. The Q and T points are marked with a vertical line. By selecting one of the lead labels at
the top of the window you can highlight the corresponding wave; the other waves are shown in gray.
The underlined lead labels are the leads used for the QT calculation. By selecting the numeric area you
can highlight all underlined leads.
Changing The View To A Single Wave Set
To view one set of waves in a larger scale, you can cycle through the different views,
1Select Current view to see the set of current waves.
2Select Baseline view to see the set of baseline waves.
3Select Split view to return to the combined view with current and baseline waves.
Setting The QT Baseline
In order to quantify changes in the QTc value, you can set a QTc baseline. For example to assess the
effect of medication on the QT interval you can set the current value as the baseline before you begin
medication. This baseline will then be used to calculate the QTc value.
To set the baseline,
•Select
Set Baseline and set the value.
If no baseline has been set for this patient, the first five minute value after the start of monitoring is
automatically set as baseline. If you set a new baseline the previous baseline is discarded. As the QTc
alarm is based on the difference between the baseline and the current value, setting an inappropriate
new baseline may prevent a QTc alarm from being generated. Discharging a patient clears the
baseline.
Printing The QT Waves
To start a printout,
•Select
Print QT.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
152
Recording The QT Waves
To start a recording,
•Select
Record QT.
QT Alarms
There are two QT alarms, QTc high limit alarm and QTc high alarm. The QTc high limit alarm is
generated when the QTc value exceeds the set limit for more than 5 minutes. The QTc alarm is
generated when the difference between the current value and the baseline value exceeds the set limit
for more than 5 minutes.
The Cannot Analyze QT INOP and the -?- will be displayed when no QT measurement could be
calculated for 10 minutes. Up to this time the previous valid value will be displayed. The following
additional messages on the cause of the invalid measurements may also be displayed.
Switching Individual QTc Alarms On and Off
Each QTc alarm can be switched off individually.
To switch an alarm on or off, in the Setup QT Analysis menu, select QTc Alarm or ΔQTc Alarm to
toggle between On and Off.
Changing QTc Alarm Limits
Set the high alarm limits based on your assessment of the patient's clinical condition, unit protocols,
physician orders or medication specified limits.
1In the Setup QT Analysis menu, select High Limit.
2Select the appropriate setting.
Additional Message Cause of Invalid QT Measurement
QT Startup QT monitoring was just turned on or has been reset
Asystole or Leads Off 1Not all specified leads needed to perform QT analysis are
available, or
2Asystole condition is detected
Too few N labeled beats Not enough valid QRS complexes to generate a QT measurement
Invalid Rhythm for QTc Not enough valid RR intervals to generate QT-HR, the averaged HR
used for QTc calculation
High QT-HR QT-HR exceeds the specified upper limit of 150 bpm (for adults) or
180 bpm (for neonates and pediatrics)
Small R Wave R-wave of the signal is too small
Small T Wave T-wave of the signal is too small
End of T not Detected End of the T-Wave cannot be accurately detected
QT out of Range QT measurement is outside the specified range of valid QT values
(200-800 msec)
QTc out of Range QTc measurement is outside the specified range of valid QTc values
(200-800 msec)
QTc Erratic QTc measurements are not stable
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
153
3Select ΔHighLimit.
4Select the appropriate setting.
Switching QT Monitoring On and Off
To switch all QT monitoring on or off, in the Setup QT Analysis menu, select QT Analys. to switch
between On and Off.
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
154
8
155
8Monitoring Pulse Rate
The pulse numeric counts the arterial pulsations that result from the mechanical activity of the heart in
beats per minute (bpm). You can display a pulse from any measured SpO2 signal (pleth wave), or any
arterial pressure (P, ABP, ART, Ao, PAP, UAP, FAP, BAP: see the “Monitoring Invasive Pressure”
chapter for an explanation of the pressure labels). The displayed pulse numeric is labeled and color-
coded to match its source wave. If the pulse numeric is not displayed, see the Setup Pulse menu to
check whether it is switched on.
Entering the Setup Pulse Menu
If a pulse numeric is displayed on the screen, select it to enter the setup menu for that pulse source. If
no pulse numeric is visible, in the Setup SpO₂ menu or the setup menu from an arterial pressure, select
pulse with the correct source, e.g. Pulse (HR).
System Pulse Source
The currently selected system pulse source is shown in the setup menus of the pulse source
measurements. The pulse rate chosen as system pulse:
• is monitored as system pulse and generates alarms when you select pulse as the active alarm source
• is sent via the network to the Information Center, if available
• is trended in the HighRes Trends and stored in the monitor's databases.
To define which pulse rate is used as system pulse,
1In the Setup Pulse menu, select System Pulse.
2Select one of the SpO2 or arterial pressure labels from the pop-up list, or select Auto.
If you select Auto, the monitor automatically chooses a pulse rate to be used as system pulse. It
looks through the list from top to bottom and activates the first pulse rate that is switched on and
available.
If your selected pulse source measurement becomes unavailable or is switched off, the monitor will use
the next measurement from the list as system pulse until the selected pulse source measurement
becomes available again.
8 Monitoring Pulse Rate
156
Switching Pulse On and Off
To switch a particular pulse numeric on or off, enter the Setup Pulse menu via the measurement setup
menu or wave menu of the pulse source. For example, to switch an SpO2 pulse numeric on or off,
1Enter the Setup Pulse menu by selecting the Pulse numeric or by selecting Pulse in the Setup
SpO₂ menu.
2In the Setup Pulse menu, select the correct pulse label, e.g. Pulse (SpO₂), to toggle between On
and Off.
Using Pulse Alarms
You can change pulse rate alarm limits in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu which can be accessed from
the Setup Pulse menu or the Setup ECG menu by selecting AlarmSrc(xxx) where xxx is the current
alarm source. Changing the alarm limits for a specific Pulse numeric changes the alarm limits for all
pulse rate alarms and heart rate alarms.
Pulse alarms are only generated when the active alarm source is set to Pulse, a pulse source is set as
system pulse and pulse alarms are switched on.
Selecting the Active Alarm Source: ECG or Pulse?
In most cases the HR and Pulse numerics are identical. In order to avoid simultaneous alarms on HR
and Pulse, the monitor uses either ECG or Pulse as its active alarm source. To change the alarm
source, select Al. Source in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu, then select
•ECG/Arrhythm: if you want the HR to be the alarm source for HR/Pulse.
•Pulse: If you select Pulse as the active alarm source, the monitor will prompt you to confirm your
choice. Be aware that if you select Pulse as the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms
are switched off.
•Auto: If the alarm source is set to Auto, the monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG
measurement as the alarm source whenever the ECG measurement is switched on and at least one
ECG lead can be measured without an INOP condition.
The monitor will automatically switch to Pulse as the alarm source if:
– a valid ECG lead can no longer be measured
and
– a Pulse source is switched on and available,
The monitor then uses the pulse rate from the measurement currently active as system pulse.
While Pulse is the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms are switched off. If an ECG
lead becomes available again, the monitor automatically uses HR as alarm source.
Note:
If ECG is switched off, the monitor will always change to Pulse as alarm source, if a Pulse is available.
One exception to this rule can arise when you have a telemetry device paired with your monitor. The
monitor ECG is then deactivated but the monitor may be configured to allow only ECG as the active
alarm source. In this case the monitor will not switch to Pulse as alarm source and Pulse will not be
available as a selection in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu.
8 Monitoring Pulse Rate
157
WARNING
Selecting Pulse as the active alarm source for HR/Pulse switches off the arrhythmia alarms listed in the
section “ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview” on page 123, including Asystole, Vfib and Vtach
alarms, and the heart rate alarms. This is indicated by the message ECG/Arrh AlarmsOff (unless this
has been configured off for your monitor), and the crossed-out alarm symbol beside the ECG heart
rate numeric. The message ECG/Arrh AlarmsOff can be configured off, or to switch to a yellow
(medium severity) INOP after a fixed number of hours.
High and low pulse rate and extreme bradycardia and extreme tachycardia alarms from pulse are active.
Alarm Source Selection Disabled
If you cannot change the alarm source, selection of the alarm source may be disabled. If you try to
change the source, the monitor displays the message To activate enter Config and enable Alarm
Source Selection. This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
Changing HR/Pulse Alarm Limits
As Pulse and HR share the same high and low alarm limits, if you change the alarm limit in the Setup
Pulse menu, the high or low alarm limits for HR in the Setup ECG menu change automatically, and
vice versa. The only exceptions are caused by a low limit clamp for each measurement: the lowest value
for Pulse when derived from SpO2 is 30 bpm; from HR 15 bpm, and from Pressure 25 bpm.
Extreme Alarm Limits for Heart Rate
The extreme rate alarms, *** Extreme Tachy and *** Extreme Brady, generated by the active alarm
source, either HR or Pulse, are set in Configuration Mode by adding a set value to the high and low
alarm limits. You need to know what value has been configured for your monitor. Changing the high
and low alarm limits automatically changes the extreme alarm limits within the allowed range.
• To see the values added to the high and low limit alarms to create the extreme rate alarms for your
monitor, in the Setup ECG menu, see the menu items ΔExtrTachy and ΔExtrBrady.
QRS Tone
The active alarm source is also used as a source for the QRS tone. You can change the tone volume in
the Setup SpO₂ and Setup ECG menus and the QRS tone modulation in the Setup SpO₂ menu.
WARNING
The audible QRS tone might be influenced by external interference and is not intended to be used as a
substitute for ECG based arrhythmia analysis.
If arrhythmia detection is needed, do not rely on the audible QRS tone.
8 Monitoring Pulse Rate
158
9
159
9Monitoring Respiration Rate
(Resp)
For the respiratory measurement (Resp), the monitor measures the thoracic impedance between two
ECG electrodes on the patient's chest. Changes in the impedance due to thoracic movement produce
the Resp waveform on the monitor screen. The monitor counts the waveform cycles to calculate the
respiration rate (RR).
Lead Placement for Monitoring Resp
Correct patient skin preparation techniques for electrode placement are important for Resp
measurement: you will find this information in the chapter on ECG.
The Resp measurement uses the standard ECG cable sets and lead placements. You can use any of the
different types of ECG cable sets - 3-lead, 5-lead, 6-lead or 10-lead, using either standard or EASI™
placement - to measure Resp, as long as you use ICU ECG cables.
The Resp signal is always measured between two of the ECG electrodes. If you are using standard
ECG electrode placement, Resp is measured between the RA and LL electrodes. If you are using
EASI™ ECG electrode placement, Resp is measured between the I and A electrodes.
Optimizing Lead Placement for Resp
If you want to measure Resp and you are already measuring ECG, you may need to optimize
placement of the two electrodes between which Resp will be measured for some patients.
Repositioning ECG electrodes from standard positions, especially when you are using EASI™ ECG
electrode placement, results in changes in the ECG waveform and may influence ST and arrhythmia
interpretation.
Cardiac Overlay
Cardiac activity that affects the Resp waveform is called cardiac overlay. It happens when the Resp
electrodes pick up impedance changes caused by the rhythmic blood flow. Correct electrode
placement can help to reduce cardiac overlay: avoid the liver area and the ventricles of the heart in the
line between the respiratory electrodes. This is particularly important for neonates.
9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
160
Lateral Chest Expansion
Some patients, especially neonates, expand their chests laterally. In these cases it is best to place the
two respiratory electrodes in the right midaxillary and left lateral chest areas at the patient's maximum
point of breathing movement to optimize the respiratory wave.
Abdominal Breathing
Some patients with restricted chest movement breathe mainly abdominally. In these cases, you may
need to place the left leg electrode on the left abdomen at the point of maximum abdominal expansion
to optimize the respiratory wave.
Understanding the Resp Display
The Resp measurement is displayed on the monitor as a continuous wave and a numeric respiration
rate. If the detected respiration rate is close to the heart rate, this is indicated by the text HR = RR next
to the respiration wave if you are in manual monitoring mode. Your monitor screen may look slightly
different from the illustration.
1Resp wave label
2One Ohm calibration bar
3Manually-set Resp detection level
4Resp numeric and label
Changing Resp Detection Modes
The Resp detection level can be set either automatically or manually.
• To change the resp detection mode, in the Setup Resp menu, select Detection to toggle between
the settings.
Auto Detection Mode
In Auto Detection Mode, the monitor adjusts the detection level automatically, depending on the wave
height and the presence of cardiac artifact. Note that in Auto Detection Mode,
9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
161
• the detection level (a dotted line) is not displayed on the waveform,
• the algorithm expects a heart rate and therefore needs at least 3 electrodes attached to the patient.
If you are monitoring respiration with only two electrodes, the detection algorithm becomes less
sensitive which may result in reduced breath detection performance.
Use Auto Detection Mode for situations where:
• the respiration rate is not close to the heart rate
• breathing is spontaneous, with or without continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP)
• patients are ventilated, except patients with Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation (IMV).
Manual Detection Mode
In Manual Detection Mode you must set the Resp detection level.
•In the Setup Resp menu, select Manual Up or Manual Down. Use the dotted detection level line
in the Resp waveform to determine when the desired level is reached.
Once set, the detection level will not adapt automatically to different respiration depths. It is important
to remember that if the depth of breathing changes, you may need to change the detection level.
Use Manual Detection Mode for situations where:
• the respiration rate and the heart rate are close.
• patients have Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation.
• respiration is weak. Try repositioning the electrodes to improve the signal.
Resp Detection Modes and Cardiac Overlay
In Auto Detection Mode:
If you are monitoring Resp and the ECG is switched off, the monitor cannot compare the ECG and
Resp rates to detect cardiac overlay. The respiration detection level is automatically set higher to
prevent the detection of cardiac overlay as respiration.
In Manual Detection Mode:
Cardiac overlay can in certain situations trigger the respiration counter. This may lead to a false
indication of a high respiration rate or an undetected apnea condition. If you suspect that cardiac
overlay is being registered as breathing activity, raise the detection level above the zone of cardiac
overlay. If the Resp wave is so small that raising the detection level is not possible, you may need to
optimize the electrode placement as described in the section “Lateral Chest Expansion” on page 160.
Changing the Size of the Respiration Wave
WARNING
When monitoring in Manual Detection Mode, make sure to check the respiration detection level after
you have increased or decreased the size of the respiration wave.
•In the Setup Resp menu, select Size Up to increase the size of the wave or Size Down to decrease
it.
9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
162
Changing the Speed of the Respiration Wave
Resp waveforms are usually viewed at a slower speed than other waveforms. For this reason, the Resp
measurement has its own speed control and is not affected by the wave speed settings of the other
measurements.
• Select the Resp wave to enter the Resp Wave menu, then select Change Speed. Choose the
required speed from the pop-up list. This defines the speed at which the wave is drawn across the
screen in millimeters per second (mm/s).
Using Resp Alarms
Resp alarms can be switched on and off and the high and low alarm limits can be changed just like
other measurement alarms, as described in the Alarms chapter.
Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay
The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The apnea alarm delay time defines
the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the
indication of the apnea alarm.
1In the Setup Resp menu, select Apnea Time.
2Select the appropriate setting.
Resp Safety Information
WARNING
Respiration detection level
If you do not set the detection level for the respiration correctly in manual detection mode, it may not
be possible for the monitor to detect apnea. If you set the detection level too low, the monitor is more
likely to detect cardiac activity, and to falsely interpret cardiac activity as respiratory activity in the case
of apnea.
Apnea
The respiration measurement does not recognize obstructive and mixed apneas - it only indicates an
alarm when a pre-adjusted time has elapsed since the last detected breath.
The safety and effectiveness of the respiration measurement method in the detection of apnea,
particularly the apnea of prematurity and apnea of infancy, has not been established.
Interference
If operating under conditions according to the EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2 (Radiated Immunity 3V/
m), field strengths above 1V/m may cause erroneous measurements at various frequencies. Therefore
it is recommended to avoid the use of electrically radiating equipment in close proximity to the
respiration measurement unit.
Resp Accessories
To monitor respiration, use only the non-OR ECG accessories listed in the Resp section of the
accessories chapter. You cannot measure respiration if you are using an orange OR ECG cable set.
9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
163
This is because of the higher internal impedance of the OR cable set, required for use if electrosurgery
is being performed.
Rate adaptive pacemakers
Implanted pacemakers which can adapt to the Minute Ventilation rate may occasionally react on the
Impedance measurement used by patient monitors for the determination of the Resp value and
execute pacing with the maximum programmed rate. Switching off the Resp measurement can prevent
this.
9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
164
10
165
10Monitoring SpO2
Philips pulse oximetry uses a motion-tolerant signal processing algorithm, based on Fourier artifact
suppression technology (FAST). It provides four measurements:
• Oxygen saturation of arterial blood (SpO2) - percentage of oxygenated hemoglobin in relation to
the sum of oxyhemoglobin and deoxyhemoglobin (functional arterial oxygen saturation).
• Pleth waveform - visual indication of patient's pulse.
• Pulse rate (derived from pleth wave) - detected pulsations per minute.
• Perfusion indicator - numerical value for the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by
arterial pulsation.
The monitors are also compatible with SpO2 technologies from other manufacturers. Refer to the
instructions for use provided with these devices for further information.
SpO2 Sensors
Familiarize yourself with the instructions for use supplied with your sensor before using it. In
particular, check that the sensor being used is appropriate for your patient category and application
site.
CAUTION
Do not use OxiCliq disposable sensors in a high humidity environment, such as in neonatal
incubators or in the presence of fluids, which may contaminate sensor and electrical connections
causing unreliable or intermittent measurements. Do not use disposable sensors when there is a
known allergic reaction to the adhesive.
Applying the Sensor
1Follow the SpO2 sensor's instructions for use, adhering to all warnings and cautions.
2Remove colored nail polish from the application site.
3Apply the sensor to the patient. The application site should match the sensor size so that the
sensor can neither fall off, nor apply excessive pressure.
10 Monitoring SpO2
166
4When using the M1195A Infant Finger Sensor, select a finger or toe with a diameter of between 7
and 8 mm (0.27" and 0.31"). When applying a M1193A neonatal sensor do not overtighten the
strap.
5Check that the light emitter and the photodetector are directly opposite each other. All light from
the emitter must pass through the patient's tissue.
WARNING
Proper Sensor Fit: If a sensor is too loose, it might compromise the optical alignment or fall off. If it
is too tight, for example because the application site is too large or becomes too large due to edema,
excessive pressure may be applied. This can result in venous congestion distal from the application site,
leading to interstitial edema, hypoxemia and tissue malnutrition. Skin irritations or lacerations may
occur as a result of the sensor being attached to one location for too long. To avoid skin irritations and
lacerations, periodically inspect the sensor application site and change the application site regularly.
Venous Pulsation: Do not apply sensor too tightly as this results in venous pulsation which may
severely obstruct circulation and lead to inaccurate measurements.
Ambient Temperature: At elevated ambient temperatures be careful with measurement sites that are
not well perfused, because this can cause severe burns after prolonged application. All listed sensors
operate without risk of exceeding 41°C on the skin if the initial skin temperature does not exceed
35°C.
Extremities to Avoid: Avoid placing the sensor on extremities with an arterial catheter, an NBP cuff
or an intravascular venous infusion line.
Connecting SpO2 Cables
• Connect the sensor cable to the color-coded socket on the monitor. You can connect some Philips
sensors directly to the monitor. For other sensors, use the corresponding adapter cable.
CAUTION
Extension cables: Do not use more than one extension cable (M1941A). Do not use an extension
cable with Philips reusable sensors or adapter cables with part numbers ending in -L (indicates "long"
cable version).
Electrical Interference: Position the sensor cable and connector away from power cables, to avoid
electrical interference.
Humidity: For neonatal patients, make sure that all sensor connectors and adapter cable connectors
are outside the incubator. The humid atmosphere inside can cause inaccurate measurements.
Measuring SpO2
1Select the correct patient category setting (adult/pediatric and neonatal), as this is used to optimize
the calculation of the SpO2 and pulse numerics.
2During measurement, ensure that the application site:
– has a pulsatile flow, ideally with a perfusion indicator value above 1.0.
10 Monitoring SpO2
167
– has not changed in its thickness (for example, due to edema), causing an improper fit of the
sensor.
WARNING
• For fully conscious pediatric or adult patients, who have a normal function of perfusion and
sensory perception at the measurement site:
To ensure skin quality and correct optical alignment of the sensor, inspect the application site
when the measurement results are suspicious or when the patient complains about pressure at
the application site, but at least every 24 hours. Correct the sensor alignment if necessary.
Move the sensor to another site, if the skin quality changes.
• For all other patients:
Inspect the application site every two to three hours to ensure skin quality and correct optical
alignment. Correct the sensor alignment if necessary. If the skin quality changes, move the
sensor to another site.
Change the application site at least every four hours.
• Injected dyes such as methylene blue, or intravascular dyshemoglobins such as methemoglobin
and carboxyhemoglobin may lead to inaccurate measurements.
• Inaccurate measurements may result when the application site for the sensor is deeply pigmented
or deeply colored, for example, with nail polish, artificial nails, dye or pigmented cream.
• Interference can be caused by:
– High levels of ambient light (including IR warmers) or strobe lights or flashing lights (such as
fire alarm lamps). (Hint: cover application site with opaque material.)
– Another SpO2 sensor in close proximity (e.g. when more than one SpO2 measurement is
performed on the same patient). Always cover both sensors with opaque material to reduce
cross-interference.
– Electromagnetic interference, especially at perfusion indicator values below 1.0 or signal
quality indicator below medium.
– Excessive patient movement and vibration.
10 Monitoring SpO2
168
Understanding the SpO2 Numerics
In automatic mode, you may see the time until the next measurement instead of the timestamp,
depending on your configuration. The time is shown like this:
SpO2 numerics from intermittent measurements (from the IntelliVue CL SpO2 Pod or a telemetry
device) can be configured to be grayed out or to disappear from the screen after a set time. This avoids
older numerics being misinterpreted as current data. The time can be set in Configuration mode.
When an automatic measurement is ongoing, the numerics are replaced by horizontal bars (1, 2 or 3
bars, in turn).
SpO2 Signal Quality Indicator (Fast SpO2 only)
The SpO2 numeric is displayed together with a signal quality indicator (if configured and enough space
is available) which gives an indication of the reliability of the displayed values.
The level to which the triangle is filled shows the quality of the signal; the indicator below shows a
medium signal quality, the signal quality is at a maximum when the triangle is completely filled.
1Measurement Mode (only with the
IntelliVue CL SpO2 Pod, in Auto or
Manual mode)
2Repeat time (only with the IntelliVue CL
SpO2 Pod, in Auto mode)
3Timestamp for numerics (only with the
IntelliVue CL SpO2 Pod or a telemetry
device)
4Pulse numeric
5Perfusion Numeric
6Alarms off indicator (here for Pulse
alarms)
7SpO2 numeric
8SpO2 alarm limits
9Signal Quality indicator
10 Monitoring SpO2
169
Assessing a Suspicious SpO2 Reading
Traditionally, pulse rate from SpO2 was compared with heart rate from ECG to confirm the validity of
the SpO2 reading. With newer algorithms, such as FAST-SpO2, this is no longer a valid criteria because
the correct calculation of SpO2 is not directly linked to the correct detection of each pulse.
When pulse rate is very low, or strong arrhythmia is present, the SpO2 pulse rate may differ from the
heart rate calculated from ECG but this does not indicate an inaccurate SpO2 value.
If you doubt the measured SpO2, use the signal quality indicator (if available) or the pleth wave and
perfusion indicator instead to assess the signal quality.
WARNING
With pulse oximetry, sensor movement, ambient light (especially strobe lights or flashing lights) or
electromagnetic interference can give unexpected intermittent readings when the sensor is not
attached. Especially bandage-type sensor designs are sensitive to minimal sensor movement that might
occur when the sensor is dangling.
Changing the Averaging Time
Depending on the monitor configuration, you may be able to change the averaging time for the SpO2
values.
The averaging time represents the approximate time period used for the calculation. The exact
averaging algorithm depends on the SpO2 technology (option) used and on the signal conditions. The
longer the averaging time, the longer the time needed until the SpO2 value reflects the physiological
event. Fast averaging is useful for situations where an extremely fast measurement is required or few
artifacts are expected. Use slow averaging where you expect the number of artifacts to be relatively
high.
1In the Setup SpO₂ menu, select Average.
2Select the required averaging time from the list.
Setting the Measurement Mode
When a telemetry device supplies SpO2T to the monitor via short range radio transmission, the
monitor will have a manual measurement mode available. This allows SpO2 measurements to be
made on request and not continuously, helping to save the telemetry device’s battery power.
When an IntelliVue CL SpO2 Pod is providing SpO2 measurement data to the monitor via short range
radio, the monitor will have manual and automatic measurement modes available.
To set the measurement mode,
1In the Setup SpO₂ menu, select Mode.
2Select Continuous, Manual or Auto mode (if available).
10 Monitoring SpO2
170
NOTE
To ensure there is no gap in SpO2 measurements when moving from standard telemetry transmission
to short range radio transmission, the measurement mode will always be set to continuous in this
situation unless manual mode is set in both the telemetry device and the monitor.
Making a Manual Measurement
When the measurement mode is set to manual,
•In the Setup SpO₂ menu, select Start SpO₂, or use the Start SpO₂ SmartKey.
When manual measurements are made, there will be no continuous SpO2 monitoring or alarming. The
manual measurement value reflects a momentary status. The numerics from SpO2T measurements
made in manual mode, for example SpO2T, PerfT, PulseT, will remain for a time on the main screen.
They are annotated with the time that the measurement was made to distinguish them from
continuously measured values.
Making an Automatic Measurement
When automatic mode is selected, to make a measurement:
1Select Repeat or Repeat Time and select the required interval between measurements.
2In the Setup SpO₂ menu, select Start SpO₂, or use the Start SpO₂ SmartKey.
You can start a manual measurement between automatic measurements, if required, by selecting Start
SpO₂ again as described above.
To end an automatic series of measurements, change the measurement mode to Manual or
Continuous.
Understanding SpO2 Alarms
This refers to SpO2 specific alarms. See the “Alarms” chapter for general alarm information. SpO2
offers high and low limit alarms, and a high priority desat alarm. You cannot set the low alarm limit
below the desat alarm limit.
CAUTION
If you measure SpO2 on a limb that has an inflated noninvasive blood pressure cuff, a non-pulsatile
SpO2 INOP can occur. If the monitor is configured to suppress this alarm there may be a delay of up
to 60 seconds in indicating a critical status, such as sudden pulse loss or hypoxia.
Alarm Delays
There is a delay between a change in the oxygen saturation at the measurement site and the
corresponding alarm indication at the monitor. This delay has two components:
•The general measurement delay time is the time between the occurrence of the saturation
change and when the new value is represented by the displayed numerical values. This
delay depends on the algorithmic processing and the averaging time configured for SpO2. The
longer the averaging time configured, the longer the time needed until the numerical values reflect
the change in saturation.
10 Monitoring SpO2
171
•The time between the displayed numerical values crossing an alarm limit and the alarm
indication on the monitor. This delay is the sum of the alarm delay time configured for SpO2,
plus the system alarm delay. The system alarm delay is the processing time the system needs for
any alarm to be indicated on the monitor, after the measurement has triggered the alarm. See the
performance specifications in the Specifications chapter for the system alarm delay specification.
For SpO2 high and low limit alarms, there are two different types of alarm delay time. The standard
alarm delay is set to a fixed value. The Smart Alarm Delay varies, based on an intelligent algorithm,
and can be used instead of the standard alarm delay.
The Desat alarm always uses the standard alarm delay.
Standard Alarm Delay
The standard alarm delay time can be configured to a fixed value between 0 and 30 seconds, in 1
second steps.
Smart Alarm Delays
The Smart Alarm Delay functionality is currently not available in China or in clinical environments under SFDA control.
When Smart Alarm Delays are used, the delay before the indication of an SpO2 high or low limit alarm
depends on the amount by which the limit is exceeded and for how long. This capability can be used to
avoid alarms when the SpO2 values show a pattern of recovering after a limit violation.
There are three modes available, Short, Medium and Long. All modes have a minimum delay of
10 seconds. The maximum delay is 25 seconds for Short mode, 50 seconds for Medium mode and
100 seconds for Long mode.
Alarm Limit
Violation
Deviation
from violated
Alarm Limit
Alarm
Limit
Resulting Alarm Delay
Short Mode
Medium Mode
Long Mode
10 Monitoring SpO2
172
This diagram shows the relationship between the alarm delay and the deviation from the alarm limit.
The shaded areas on the diagram show the area in which SpO2 values can violate the alarm limit
without causing an alarm to be indicated. The area is smallest for the Short mode, and is extended for
the Medium and Long modes by the corresponding areas shown above.
WARNING
Before using Smart Alarm Delays, make sure that you fully understand how the delay is applied and
what the consequences are.
Example With Short Mode
This diagram shows the area for Short mode, with two examples of hypoxia.
Progressive hypoxia scenario: SpO2 value (A) - the values drop steadily and after 10 seconds a value
leaves the shaded area. An alarm is indicated immediately.
Recovery scenario: SpO2 value (B) - the values stay within the shaded area for 24 seconds, deviating
from the alarm limit by 1% or 2%, before rising again above the alarm limit. No alarm is indicated
because the SpO2 values never leave the shaded area below the alarm limit.
On the basis of the two examples, you can see that the delay depends on how much the value exceeds
the limit, and for how long. Changes in the SpO2 value can be major, but very short, or minor and for
a longer time - as long as they stay within the shaded area there will be no alarm indicated.
Deviation
from violated
Alarm Limit
Alarm
Limit
Resulting Alarm Delay
10 Monitoring SpO2
173
Example With Medium Mode
This diagram shows the area for Medium mode, with two examples of hypoxia.
Progressive hypoxia scenario: SpO2 value (C) - the values drop steadily and after 11 seconds a value
leaves the shaded area. An alarm is indicated immediately.
Recovery scenario: SpO2 value (D) - the values stay within the shaded area for 48 seconds, deviating
from the alarm limit by 1% or 2%, before rising again above the alarm limit. No alarm is indicated
because the SpO2 values never leave the shaded area below the alarm limit.
Example With Long Mode
This diagram shows the area for Long mode, with two examples of hypoxia.
Deviation
from violated
Alarm Limit
Alarm
Limit
Resulting Alarm Delay
Deviation
from violated
Alarm Limit
Alarm
Limit
Resulting Alarm Delay
10 Monitoring SpO2
174
Progressive hypoxia scenario: SpO2 value (E) - the values drop steadily and after 16 seconds a value
leaves the shaded area. An alarm is indicated immediately.
Recovery scenario: SpO2 value (F) - the values stay within the shaded area for 98 seconds, deviating
from the alarm limit by 1% to 3%, before rising again above the alarm limit. No alarm is indicated
because the SpO2 values never leave the shaded area below the alarm limit.
Setting Smart Alarm Delay Mode
To set the mode for Smart Alarm Delays, in the Setup SpO₂ menu,
1Check that SmartAlarmDelay is set to On.
This setting is made in Configuration mode and will be shown in the menu in gray. If it is set to
Off, a standard alarm delay is in use.
2Select High Alarm Delay and choose Short, Medium, or Long mode.
3Select Low Alarm Delay and choose Short, Medium, or Long mode.
If you also use monitors with earlier software revisions, be aware that smart alarm delays will not be
used after a transfer to one of these monitors. Monitors with earlier software revisions will always use
the standard alarm delay. If you are not sure whether a monitor has the Smart Alarm Delay function,
check whether there is a SmartAlarmDelay entry in the Setup SpO₂ menu.
Adjusting the Alarm Limits
In the Setup SpO₂ menu:
• Touch the high limit on the alarm limits menu button. Choose the high alarm limit from the pop-
up list that opens.
• Touch the low limit on the alarm limits menu button. Choose the low alarm limit from the pop-up
list that opens.
WARNING
High oxygen levels may predispose a premature infant to retrolental fibroplasia. If this is a
consideration do NOT set the high alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to switching the high
alarm off.
10 Monitoring SpO2
175
Adjusting the Desat Limit Alarm
The Desat alarm is a high priority (red) alarm notifying you of potentially life threatening drops in
oxygen saturation.
1In the Setup SpO₂ menu, select Desat Limit.
2Adjust the limit.
Pleth Wave
The Pleth wave is autoscaled to maximum display size. It decreases only when the signal quality
becomes marginal. It is NOT directly proportional to the pulse volume. If you need an indication of
change in pulse volume, use the perfusion indicator.
1Minimum size for reliable SpO2 value
Perfusion Numeric
The perfusion numeric (Perf) gives a value for the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by
the pulsating arterial blood flow.
As pulse oximetry is based on the pulsatile nature of the signal, you can also use the perfusion numeric
as a quality indicator for the SpO2 measurement. Above 1 is optimal, between 0.3-1 is acceptable.
Below 0.3 is marginal; reposition the sensor or find a better site.
Perfusion Change Indicator
The perfusion change indicator is a graphic symbol which shows the change in the perfusion value,
relative to a reference value which you can set.
To set the current perfusion value as the reference value:
•In the Setup SpO₂ menu, select Set Perf Ref..
When a reference value has been set, the perfusion change indicator is displayed next to the perfusion
numeric.
Setting SpO2/Pleth as Pulse Source
1In the Setup SpO₂ menu, select Pulse (SpO₂) to enter the Setup Pulse menu.
2In the Setup Pulse menu, select Syst.Pulse and select SpO₂ from the pop-up list.
10 Monitoring SpO2
176
Setting Up Tone Modulation
If tone modulation is on, the QRS tone pitch lowers when the SpO2 level drops. Remember, the QRS
tone is derived from either heart rate or pulse depending on which is currently selected as the active
alarm source.
•In the Setup SpO₂ menu, select Tone Mod. to toggle between Yes (for on) and No (for off).
Tone modulation is licensed under US patent US 4,653,498 from Nellcor Puritan Bennett
Incorporated.
Setting the QRS Volume
In the Setup SpO₂ menu, select QRS Volume and set the appropriate QRS tone volume.
11
177
11Monitoring NBP
This monitor uses the oscillometric method for measuring NBP. In adult and pediatric mode, the
blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the American National
Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10-1992) in relation to
mean error and standard deviation, when compared to intra-arterial or auscultatory measurements
(depending on the configuration) in a representative patient population. For the auscultatory reference,
the fifth Korotkoff sound was used to determine the diastolic pressure.
In neonatal mode, the blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the
American National Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10-
1992) in relation to mean error and standard deviation, when compared to intra-arterial measurements
in a representative patient population.
The NBP measurement is suitable for use in the presence of electrosurgery and during the discharge of
a cardiac defibrillator according to IEC 601-2-30:1999/EN 60601-2-30:2000.
A physician must determine the clinical significance of the NBP information.
Introducing the Oscillometric NBP Measurement
Oscillometric devices measure the amplitude of pressure changes in the occluding cuff as the cuff
deflates from above systolic pressure. The amplitude suddenly increases as the pulse breaks through
the occlusion in the artery. As the cuff pressure decreases further, the pulsations increase in amplitude,
reach a maximum (which approximates to the mean pressure), and then diminish.
Studies show that, especially in critical cases (arrhythmia, vasoconstriction, hypertension, shock),
oscillometric devices are more accurate and consistent than devices using other noninvasive measuring
techniques.
WARNING
Patient Category: Select the correct patient category setting for your patient. Do not apply the higher
adult inflation, overpressure limits and measurement duration to neonatal patients.
Intravenous infusion: Do not use the NBP cuff on a limb with an intravenous infusion or arterial
catheter in place. This could cause tissue damage around the catheter when the infusion is slowed or
blocked during cuff inflation.
Skin Damage: Do not measure NBP in cases of sickle-cell disease or any condition where skin
damage has occurred or is expected.
11 Monitoring NBP
178
Unattended measurement: Use clinical judgement to decide whether to perform frequent
unattended blood pressure measurements in cases of severe blood clotting disorders because of the
risk of hematoma in the limb fitted with the cuff.
CAUTION
If you spill liquid onto the equipment or accessories, particularly if there is a chance that it can get
inside the tubing or the measurement device, contact your service personnel.
Measurement Limitations
Measurements are impossible with heart rate extremes of less than 40 bpm or greater than 300 bpm, or
if the patient is on a heart-lung machine.
The measurement may be inaccurate or impossible:
• with excessive and continuous patient movement such as shivering or convulsions
• if a regular arterial pressure pulse is hard to detect
• with cardiac arrhythmias
• with rapid blood pressure changes
• with severe shock or hypothermia that reduces blood flow to the peripheries
• with obesity, where a thick layer of fat surrounding a limb dampens the oscillations coming from
the artery
• on an edematous extremity.
The effectiveness of this sphygmomanometer has not been established in pregnant, including pre-
eclamptic patients.
Measurement Modes
There are four modes for measuring NBP:
•Manual - measurement on demand.
•Auto - continually repeated measurements (between one minute and 24 hours adjustable interval).
•Sequence - up to four measurement cycles which will run consecutively, with number of
measurements and interval between them configurable for each cycle.
•STAT - rapid series of measurements over a five minute period, then the monitor returns to the
previous mode. Use only on supervised patients.
Reference Method
The measurement reference method can be Auscultatory (manual cuff) or Invasive (intra-arterial). For
further information, see the Application Note supplied on the monitor documentation DVD.
In Neonatal mode, to comply with safety standards, invasive is always used as the reference method.
This setting cannot be changed and is not visible in any operating mode.
In Adult and Pediatric mode, to check the current setting, select Main Setup, Measurements, then
NBP, and check whether the Reference setting is set to Auscult. or Invasive. This setting can only be
changed in Configuration Mode.
11 Monitoring NBP
179
Preparing to Measure NBP
1Connect the cuff to the air tubing.
2Plug the air tubing into the red NBP connector. Avoid compression or restriction of pressure
tubes. Air must pass unrestricted through the tubing.
3Make sure that you are using a Philips-approved correct sized cuff and that the bladder inside the
cover is not folded or twisted.
A wrong cuff size, and a folded or twisted bladder, can cause inaccurate measurements. The width
of the cuff should be in the range from 37% to 47% of the limb circumference. The inflatable part
of the cuff should be long enough to encircle at least 80% of the limb.
4Apply the cuff to a limb at the same level as the heart. If it is not, you must use the measurement
correction formula to correct the measurement.
The marking on the cuff must match the artery location. Do not wrap the cuff too tightly around
the limb. It may cause discoloration, and ischemia of the extremities. Inspect the application site
regularly to ensure skin quality and inspect the extremity of the cuffed limb for normal color,
warmth and sensitivity. If the skin quality changes, or if the extremity circulation is being affected,
move the cuff to another site or stop the blood pressure measurements immediately. Check more
frequently when making automatic or stat measurements.
Correcting the Measurement if Limb is not at Heart Level
To correct the measurement if the limb is not at heart level, to the displayed value
Understanding the NBP Numerics
Depending on the NBP numeric size, not all elements may be visible. Your monitor may be configured
to display only the systolic and diastolic values. If configured to do so, the pulse from NBP will display
with the NBP numeric.
The measured NBP value, together with the corresponding pulse rate if this is switched on, will be
displayed for one hour. After that the values are regarded as invalid and are no longer displayed.
During this time, measurement values may be grayed out or disappear from the screen after a set time,
if configured to do so. This avoids older numerics being misinterpreted as current data. The time can
add 0.75 mmHg (0.10 kPa) for each centimeter
higher or
deduct 0.75 mmHg (0.10 kPa) for each
centimeter lower or
add 1.9 mmHg (0.25 kPa) for each inch higher. deduct 1.9 mmHg (0.25 kPa) for each inch
lower.
1Alarm source
2Measurement Mode
3Timestamp/Timer
4Mean pressure
5Diastolic
6Systolic
7Alarm limits
11 Monitoring NBP
180
be set in Configuration mode. In Auto mode the measurement values may disappear more quickly (to
be replaced by new measurement values), if the repeat time is set to less than one hour.
NBP and SpO2 numerics from intermittent measurements can be configured to be grayed out or to
disappear from the screen after a set time. This avoids older numerics being misinterpreted as current
data. The time can be set individually for SpO2 and NBP in Configuration mode.
Alarm Sources
If you have parallel alarm sources, the sources are displayed instead of the alarm limits.
NBP Timestamp
Depending on your configuration, the time shown beside the NBP numeric can be:
– the time of the most recent NBP measurement, also known as the "timestamp", or
– the time until the next measurement in an automatic series, displayed with a graphic
representation of the remaining time, as shown here.
The NBP timestamp will normally show the completion time of the NBP measurement. Only under
the following conditions the timestamp shows the beginning of the measurement:
•when in Auto or Sequence mode, and
• the monitor is configured to synchronize the measurements in a measurement series to an "easy-
to-document" time. For example, if you start the first measurement at 08:23, and the Repeat Time
is set to 10 minutes, the monitor automatically performs the next measurement at 8:30, then 8:40
and so on.
During Measurements
The cuff pressure is displayed instead of the units and the repeat time. An early systolic value gives you
a preliminary indication of the systolic blood pressure during measurement.
Starting and Stopping Measurements
Use the Setup NBP menu or SmartKeys to start and stop measurements.
11 Monitoring NBP
181
Action to be performed NBP Setup menu SmartKeys
Start manual measurement
Start Auto series
Start/Stop
Start/ Stop
Start NBP
Start STAT measurement NBP STAT
NBP STAT
Start STAT
Stop Manual measurements Start/Stop
Start/ Stop
Stop NBP
Stop current Auto measurement Start/Stop
Start/ Stop
Stop NBP
Stop current STAT measurement and end series Start/Stop
Start/ Stop
NBP STAT
NBP STAT
Stop NBP
Stop Auto, Manual or STAT measurement AND
series
Stop All
Stop All
11 Monitoring NBP
182
CAUTION
Use clinical judgment to decide whether to perform repeated series of STAT measurements because of
the risk of purpura, ischemia and neuropathy in the limb with the cuff.
Enabling Automatic Mode and Setting Repetition
Time
1In the Setup NBP menu, select Mode and select Auto from the pop-up menu.
2For an automatic measurement, select Repeat and set the time interval between two
measurements.
Enabling Sequence Mode and Setting Up The
Sequence
1In the Setup NBP menu, select Mode and select Sequence from the pop-up menu.
2Select Setup Sequence to open the Setup Sequence window.
Up to four measurement cycles can be setup which will run consecutively. For each cycle you can
set the number of measurements and the interval between them. If you want to run less than four
cycles in a sequence, you can set the number of measurements for one or more cycles to Off.
3Select each sequence in turn and select the number of measurements and the time interval between
the measurements.
4To have measurements continue after the sequence, set the number of measurements for your last
cycle to Continuous and this cycle will run indefinitely.
CAUTION
Be aware that, if none of the cycles are set to Continuous, NBP monitoring will end after the last
measurement of the cycle.
When the NBP measurement mode is set to Sequence, the repetition time for Auto mode cannot be
changed.
Choosing the NBP Alarm Source
You can monitor for alarm conditions in systolic, diastolic and mean pressure, either singly or in
parallel. Only one alarm is given, with the priority of mean, systolic, diastolic.
In the Setup NBP menu, select Al. from and choose from:
11 Monitoring NBP
183
If Mean is not selected as alarm source (Sys., Dia., or Sys & Dia selected), but the monitor can only
derive a mean value, mean alarms will nevertheless be announced using the most recent mean alarm
limits. Check that the mean alarm limits are appropriate for the patient, even when not using mean as
the alarm source. When no value can be derived an NBP Measure Failed INOP will be displayed.
Switching Pulse from NBP On/Off
In the process of making the NBP measurement, a pulse value can be derived and displayed. The pulse
value is displayed together with the time the measurement was made. After one hour the value
becomes invalid. There are no alarms associated with pulse from NBP.
To switch the display of the pulse value on or off:
•In the Setup NBP menu select Pulse (NBP).
Assisting Venous Puncture
You can use the NBP cuff to cause sub-diastolic pressure. The cuff deflates automatically after a set
time (adult/pediatric 170 seconds, neonatal 85 seconds) if you do not deflate it.
1In the Setup NBP menu select VeniPuncture.
2Puncture vein and draw blood sample.
3Reselect VeniPuncture to deflate the cuff.
During measurement, the NBP display shows the inflation pressure of the cuff and the remaining time
in venous puncture mode.
NOTE
Performing a venous puncture while automatic or sequence NBP measurements are being made
suspends the measurement series for the duration of the venous puncture inflation and for three
minutes afterwards.
Calibrating NBP
NBP is not user-calibrated. Cuff-pressure transducers must be verified at least once every two years by
a qualified service professional, and calibrated, if necessary. See the Service Guide for details.
Menu option Pressure value monitored
Sys. systolic
Dia. diastolic
Mean mean
Sys & Dia systolic and diastolic in parallel
Dia & Mean diastolic and mean in parallel
Sys & Mean systolic and mean in parallel
Sys&Dia&Mean all three pressures in parallel
11 Monitoring NBP
184
12
185
12Monitoring Temperature
WARNING
Measurements from an MMS extension connected to the monitor are not available when the monitor
is running on its own battery power. They are only available when the monitor is powered by the
external power supply (M8023A) or the Battery Extension (865297).
You can measure temperature using the built-in temperature measurement (optional), or one of the
MMS extensions.
The Temp measurement automatically switches on when you connect a probe. You can switch the
measurement off manually.
Making a Temp Measurement
1Select the correct type and size of probe for your patient.
2If you are using a disposable probe, connect the probe to the temperature cable.
3Plug the probe or temperature cable into the temperature connector socket.
4Apply the probe to the patient. You are advised to use a protective rubber cover on rectal probes.
5Select an appropriate temperature label.
6Check that the alarm settings (on or off, high and low limits) are appropriate for this patient and
this type of temperature measurement.
WARNING
Make sure you set alarm limits for the correct label. The alarm limits you set are stored for that
particular label only. Changing the label may change the alarm limits.
Selecting a Temperature for Monitoring
Tell the monitor which temperature you want to monitor by selecting its temperature label. The label is
a unique identifier for each type of temperature. When you choose a label, the monitor uses that label's
stored color and alarm settings.
1In the Setup <Temp Label> menu, select Label.
2Select the appropriate label from the list.
12 Monitoring Temperature
186
Extended Temperature Label Set
The following additional labels are available if Label Set is set to Full. This setting can only be changed
in Configuration Mode.
Note that if your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the additional labels in the extended
label set may not be correctly displayed. See the Configuration Guide for your monitor for more
information.
Calculating Temp Difference
The monitor can calculate and display the difference between two temperature values by subtracting
the second value from the first. The difference is labeled ΔTemp.
1In the Main Setup menu, select Measurements.
2Select ΔTemp.
3In the Setup ΔTemp menu, select First Temp.
4Select the appropriate label for the measurement source.
5Select Second Temp.
6Select the appropriate label for the second measurement source.
Temp non-specific temperature label Trect rectal temperature
Tart arterial temperature Tskin skin temperature
Tcore core temperature Tven venous temperature
Tesoph esophageal temperature Tnaso nasopharyngeal temperature
T1, T2, T3, T4 Non-specific temperature labels
Tamb ambient temperature
Tcereb cerebral temperature
Ttymp tympanic temperature
Tvesic vesical temperature
13
187
13Monitoring Invasive Pressure
WARNING
Measurements from an MMS extension connected to the monitor are not available when the monitor
is running on its own battery power. They are only available when the monitor is powered by the
external power supply (M8023A) or the Battery Extension (865297).
CAUTION
Do not use a monitor with an M1006A pressure module as an additional monitor for your patient. This
may cause interference on the respiration or invasive pressure measurements.
You can measure pressure using the monitor's built-in pressure measurement (optional), or one of the
MMS extensions.
Setting up the Pressure Measurement
1Plug in the pressure cable.
2Prepare the flush solution.
3Flush the system to exhaust all air from the tubing. Ensure that the transducer and stopcocks are
free of air bubbles.
WARNING
If air bubbles appear in the tubing system, flush the system with the infusion solution again. Air
bubbles may lead to a wrong pressure reading.
4Connect the pressure line to the patient catheter.
5If you are using an infusion pressure cuff with the pressure line, attach the pressure cuff to the
fluid to be infused. Inflate it according to your standard hospital procedure, then start the infusion.
6Position the transducer so that it is level with the heart, approximately at the level of the
midaxillary line.
13 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
188
WARNING
If measuring intracranial pressure (ICP, IC1 or IC2) with a sitting patient, level the transducer with the
top of the patient's ear. Incorrect leveling may give incorrect values.
Selecting a Pressure for Monitoring
Tell the monitor the source of the pressure you want to monitor by selecting an appropriate pressure
label. The label is a unique identifier for each type of pressure. When you choose a label, the monitor
uses that label's stored settings, for example color, wave scale and alarm settings. The label also
determines which algorithm is used to process the pressure signal, so an incorrect label can lead to
incorrect pressure values.
1In the Setup <Press Label> menu, select Label.
2Select the appropriate label from the list.
Extended Pressure Label Set
The following additional labels are available if Label Set is set to Full. This setting can only be changed
in Configuration Mode.
Note that if your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the additional labels in the extended
label set may not be correctly displayed. See the Configuration Guide for your monitor for more
information.
Label Description
ABP Arterial blood pressure
ART Arterial blood pressure (alternative)
Ao Aortic pressure
CVP Central venous pressure
ICP Intracranial pressure
LAP Left atrial pressure
PNon-specific pressure label
PAP Pulmonary artery pressure
RAP Right atrial pressure
UAP Umbilical arterial pressure
UVP Umbilical venous pressure
Label Description
BAP Brachial arterial pressure
FAP Femoral arterial pressure
IC1, IC2 Alternative intracranial pressures
P1, P2, P3, P4 Alternative non-specific pressure labels
13 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
189
Zeroing the Pressure Transducer
To avoid inaccurate pressure readings, the monitor requires a valid zero. Zero the transducer in
accordance with your hospital policy. You must perform a zero:
• when you use a new transducer or tubing
• every time you reconnect the transducer cable to the monitor
• if you think the monitor's pressure readings are not correct.
Zeroing ICP (or IC1/IC2)
Your hospital guidelines may require you to zero the ICP transducer less frequently than other
transducers, due to the need for aseptic conditions. When you zero an ICP transducer, the zero values
are automatically stored and you will not be prompted to repeat the zero procedure.
If you want to simultaneously zero all pressures except ICP, disconnect the ICP transducer from the
monitor while zeroing. Reconnecting the transducer recalls the stored values.
WARNING
If you select the label ICP (or IC1/IC2), the measurement device uses the most recently stored zero.
Therefore, make sure you zeroed the transducer correctly in accordance with the transducer
manufacturer's instructions and your hospital policy. When you use a transducer that you cannot
rezero after placement, ensure that you keep the measuring device with the patient so that you are
certain you have the correct zero data for this patient.
Determining a Pressure's Most Recent Zero
The monitor displays the most recent zero on the status line. If this has "timed-out" after you have
performed a zero, redisplay the information in the status line by entering the pressure's setup menu.
Zeroing a Pressure Measurement
WARNING
Invasive pressure alarms (and pulse alarms, if derived from invasive pressure) are temporarily
suppressed until 30 seconds after the transducer finishes zeroing.
1Turn off the stopcock to the patient.
2Vent the transducer to atmospheric pressure, to compensate for the static and atmospheric
pressure exerted on the transducer.
3In the setup menu for the pressure, select Zero <Press Label>.
4When you see the message <Press Label> zero done at <date and time> on the status line,
close the stopcock to atmospheric pressure, and open the stopcock to the patient.
13 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
190
CAUTION
When using high frequency ventilation, ensure that the tubing from the ventilator does not touch the
arterial line, or connect with it indirectly, while zeroing the pressure. This could cause small pressure
variations which can interfere with the zero procedure.
Zeroing All Pressures Simultaneously
WARNING
Before zeroing all pressures, make sure that all pressure transducers are vented to atmospheric
pressure.
If you are measuring pressures with more than one measuring device, using the Zero Press SmartKey
to initiate the zeroing calls up a list of all active pressures. Select the pressure you want to zero or select
All Press to zero all pressures simultaneously.
Troubleshooting the Zero
The status line lists the probable cause of an unsuccessful zero:
Adjusting the Calibration Factor
Each time you use a reusable transducer, compare the calibration factor written on your transducer
with the calibration factor shown on the monitor. To ensure accurate measurement, they must be the
same.
1In the Setup <Press Label> menu, select Cal. Factor.
If the value here does not match that on the transducer, select the corresponding value from the
list now in accordance with your hospital's procedure.
Message Corrective Action
<Press Label> can't
zero; equipment malf.
The hardware is faulty. Contact your service personnel.
<Press Label> can't
zero; excessive offset
Make sure the transducer is vented to air and try again. If this fails, the
hardware may be faulty. Replace the adapter cable and try again. If it fails,
replace the transducer and try again. If it still fails, contact your service
personnel.
<Press Label> can't
zero - unstable signal
<Press Label> can't
zero - no transducer
Make sure that the transducer is connected and try again. If this fails,
exchange the adapter cable and try again. If this fails, exchange the
transducer.
<Press Label> can't
zero; pulsat. pressure
Make sure that the transducer is vented to air, not to the patient, and try
again.
<Press Label> unable
to zero - timed out
Try pressing the Zero key again. If this fails, replace the transducer and
adapter cable and contact your service personnel.
Switch <Press Label>
on first
Pressure measurement is switched off. To switch it on, in the Setup
Pressure menu, select the pressure's label.
13 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
191
2To confirm you want to use the new calibration factor, select the Confirm pop-up key.
Displaying a Mean Pressure Value Only
Use this when you want to see only the mean pressure.
In the pressure's setup menu, select Mean only. Toggle between On to display mean pressure value
only, and Off to display all pressure values (systolic, diastolic and mean).
Changing the Pressure Wave Scale
1Select the label of the pressure wave whose scale you want to set to enter the Setup <Press
Label> menu.
2In the Setup <Press Label> menu, (for example ABP) select Scale.
3Select a value from the pop-up list:
– a positive value sets the top gridline. The bottom gridline is set at zero.
– a negative value sets the bottom gridline. The middle gridline is set at zero.
Optimizing the Waveform
In the Setup <Press Label> menu, select Optimum Scale to let the monitor select the best minimum
and maximum scales for the current wave.
Non-Physiological Artifact Suppression
Some clinical procedures may affect blood pressure, for example, a flush procedure or a blood sample.
Your monitor may be configured to suppress these non-physiological artifacts for a specified duration
(Artifact Suppr. is configured to 30 sec, 60 sec, or 90 sec). During artifact suppression, the monitor
shows the INOP message <Press Label> Artifact, and a question mark is shown beside the pressure
numerics. Pressure alarms and the <Press Label> No Pulse INOP are suppressed during the
configured period. The CPP alarms are not suppressed.
Choosing the Pressure Alarm Source
WARNING
Make sure you set alarm limits for the correct label. The alarm limits you set are stored for that
particular label only. Changing the label may change the alarm limits.
You can monitor for alarm conditions in systolic, diastolic and mean pressure, either singly or in
parallel. Only one alarm is given at a time, in this order of priority: mean, systolic, diastolic.
•In the Setup <Press Label> menu, select Al. from and choose the source.
13 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
192
Select and set the High Limit and Low Limit for the pressure(s) you have selected.
Extreme Alarm Limits for Pressure
The extreme pressure alarms, Extreme High and Extreme Low, can be made available for your
monitor in Configuration Mode and are additional to the standard High and Low limit alarms. They
are generated by the active pressure alarm source, and are setup in Configuration Mode by adding a set
value (the value) to the high and low alarm limits. This value can be set for each pressure label
individually.
1Extreme Low Limit
2Low Limit
3High Limit
4Extreme High Limit
5 Extreme Low
6 Extreme High
You need to know which values have been configured for your monitor. Changing the high and low
alarm limits automatically changes the extreme alarm limits within the allowed range.
To see the extreme pressure alarms set for your monitor, in the setup menu for that pressure, see the
menu items ΔExtr.High and ΔExtr. Low.
The extreme pressure alarms are high priority, red alarms, marked *** in the alarm message.
Calibrating Reusable Transducer CPJ840J6
Depending on your monitor's configuration, you may be able to perform a calibration in monitoring
mode. Perform a mercury calibration when you use a new transducer, and at regular intervals
according to your hospital policy. You require:
Menu option Pressure value monitored
Sys. systolic
Dia. diastolic
Mean mean
Sys & Dia systolic and diastolic in parallel
Dia & Mean diastolic and mean in parallel
Sys & Mean systolic and mean in parallel
Sys&Dia&Mean all three pressures in parallel
13 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
193
• standard sphygmomanometer.
• sterile 10cc syringe with heparinised solution.
•3-way stopcock.
• approximately 25 cm of tubing.
Making the Pressure Calibration
WARNING
Never perform the invasive pressure calibration while a patient is being monitored.
1Zero the transducer.
2Connect the syringe and manometer.
a. Attach the tubing to the manometer.
b. Connect the 3-way stopcock to the stopcock that is not connected to the patient catheter
when you measure a patient.
c. Attach the syringe to one port and the manometer tubing to the other port.
d. Open the port to the manometer.
1 Tubing to manometer
2 Syringe with heparinised solution
3 To pressure connector on monitor
4 Patient connection stoppered
5 Off
3Move the syringe barrel in and raise the mercury to 200 mmHg (30 kPa). 200 mmHg is the
recommended calibration pressure.
4In the Setup <Press Label> menu, select Cal. Press.
5Select the calibration pressure from the list, for example 200 mmHg.
6Select Confirm to recalculate the calibration factor using the applied pressure.
13 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
194
7When the monitor displays <Press Label> mercury calibr. done at <date and time>, remove
the manometer tubing, syringe and extra stopcock. We recommend you replace the transducer
dome and tubing with sterile ones.
8Label the transducer with the calibration factor shown in the Cal. Factor field in the pressure's
setup menu.
9Reconnect the patient and start measuring again.
Troubleshooting the Pressure Calibration
The status line lists the probable cause of an unsuccessful calibration.
Calculating Cerebral Perfusion Pressure
The monitor can calculate the difference between mean arterial pressure and the intracranial pressure.
The difference is labeled CPP.
1In the Main Setup menu, select Measurements.
2Select CPP.
3In the Setup CPP menu, select which arterial pressure source should be used in the calculation.
Message Corrective Action
<Press Label> can't calibr.;
equipmt malf.
Contact your service department. The pressure hardware is
faulty.
<Press Label> can't calibrate;out
of range
Make sure that you have selected the value for Cal. Press that
you are applying to the transducer, and repeat the calibration.
<Press Label> can't calibrate; no
transd.
Make sure that the transducer is connected and try again.
<Press Label> can't cal.;
unstable signal
Make sure there are no disturbances to the transducer, and
repeat the calibration.
<Press Label> can't calibr.;do
zero first
No valid zero. Zero the transducer.
14
195
14Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
WARNING
Measurements from an MMS extension connected to the monitor are not available when the monitor
is running on its own battery power. They are only available when the monitor is powered by the
external power supply (M8023A) or the Battery Extension (865297).
CAUTION
Only one CO2 measurement at a time is supported.
Use the CO2 measurement to monitor the patient's respiratory status and to control patient ventilation.
There are two methods for measuring carbon dioxide in the patient's airway:
• Mainstream measurement uses a CO2 sensor attached to an airway adapter directly inserted into
the patient's breathing system. This method is available using the monitor's built-in CO2
measurement (optional), the M3014A Capnography Extension or the M3016A Mainstream
Extension.
• Sidestream measurement takes a sample of the respiratory gas with a constant sample flow from
the patient's airway and analyzes it with a remote CO2 sensor. You can measure sidestream CO2
using the monitor's built-in CO2 measurement (optional) or using the M3014A Capnography
Extension, or the M3015A/B Microstream CO2 Extension.
WARNING
Correlation: The etCO2 readings do not always correlate closely with paCO2, especially in neonatal
patients and patients with pulmonary disease, pulmonary embolism or inappropriate ventilation.
Pharmaceuticals in aerosols: Do not measure CO2 in the presence of pharmaceuticals in aerosols.
Explosion Hazard: Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics or gases, such as a
flammable anesthetic mixture with air, oxygen or nitrous oxide. Use of the devices in such an
environment may present an explosion hazard.
Failure of operation: if the measurement or a sensor fails to respond as described, do not use it until
the situation has been corrected by qualified personnel.
Low etCO2 values: Leakages in the breathing system or sampling system may cause the displayed
etCO2 values to be significantly too low. Always connect all components securely and check for leaks
according to standard clinical procedures. Displacement of the nasal or combined nasal oral cannulas
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
196
can cause lower than actual etCO2 readings. Even with combined nasal oral cannulas, the etCO2
readings may be slightly lower than actual in patients breathing through the mouth only.
Measurement Principles
For both mainstream and sidestream measurements, the measurement principle is infrared
transmission, where the intensity of infrared light passing the respiratory gas is measured with a photo
detector. As some of the infrared light is absorbed by the CO2 molecules, the amount of light passing
the gas probe depends on the concentration of the measured CO2.
When using a wet ventilator circuit, monitor mainstream CO2 if available, in preference to sidestream
CO2.
The partial pressure is calculated from the gas concentration by multiplying the concentration value
with the ambient pressure.
The measurement provides:
•a CO
2 waveform.
•an end tidal CO
2 (etCO2) value: the CO2 value measured at the end of the expiration phase.
• an inspired minimum CO2 (imCO2): the smallest value measured during inspiration.
• an airway respiration rate (awRR): the number of breaths per minute, calculated from the CO2
waveform.
Depending on the Max Hold setting configured for your monitor, the etCO2 numeric shows either the
highest CO2 value measured within the configured time period (Max Hold set to 10 sec or 20 sec) or
the etCO2 numeric shows breath-to-breath value (Max Hold set to Off).
The Microstream method also provides an Integrated Pulmonary Index (IPI) numeric, which is an
indication of the patient's overall ventilatory status based on four measurement parameters: etCO2,
awRR, pulse rate and SpO2. IPI can thus provide an early indication of a change in ventilatory status
which may not be shown by the current value of any of these four parameters individually. The IPI is
designed to provide additional information regarding patient status, possibly before etCO2, awRR,
SpO2, or pulse rate values reach levels of clinical concern.
The IPI is available for all three groups of pediatric patients (1-3 years, 3-6 years, and 6-12 years), and
for adult patients. It is displayed as a single value between 1 and 10.
Measuring CO2 using the CO2 Option or M3014A
The monitor (with the CO2 option) or the M3014A Capnography Extension measures partial pressure
of carbon dioxide in a patient's expired gas using the mainstream method or the sidestream method.
The mainstream CO2 measurement can be used, with appropriate accessories, with intubated adult,
pediatric and neonatal patients. The sidestream CO2 measurement can be used, with appropriate
accessories, with intubated and non-intubated adult, pediatric, infant and neonatal patients. With
intubated patients, a sample of the respiratory gas is drawn from the patient's breathing circuit through
an airway adapter and a gas sampling tube. With non-intubated patients, the gas sample is drawn
through a nasal or oral-nasal cannula.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
197
WARNING
Altitude Setting: The monitor is not equipped with automatic barometric pressure compensation.
Before the CO2 measurement is used for the first time, the altitude must be set to the correct value. An
incorrect altitude setting will result in incorrect CO2 readings. The CO2 readings will typically deviate
5% for every 1000 m difference.
CAUTION
Use the CO2 measurement with Philips approved accessories only. Refer to the instructions for use
provided with the accessory.
Preparing to Measure Mainstream CO2
You must perform a zero as described in this procedure each time you use a new airway
adapter.
1Attach the sensor connector to the CO2 connector on the monitor (when the optional CO2
measurement is integrated) or on the extension.
2Wait 2 minutes, allowing the sensor to reach its operating temperature and a stable thermal
condition.
3Choose the appropriate airway adapter and connect it to the sensor head. The airway adapter clicks
into place when seated correctly. To zero the sensor:
– expose the sensor to room air and keep it away from all sources of CO2 including the
ventilator, the patient's breath and your own.
– in the setup menu for the CO2, select Start Zero Cal.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
198
– When you see the message CO₂ calibration done at <date and time> on the status line, the
zero calibration is finished and you can begin monitoring.
4Install the airway adapter at the proximal end of the circuit between the elbow and the ventilator Y-
section.
WARNING
To prevent stress on the endotracheal tube, support the sensor and airway adapter.
Position sensor cables and tubing carefully to avoid entanglement or potential strangulation. Do not
apply excessive tension to any cable.
Replace the airway adapter, if excessive moisture or secretions are observed in the tubing or if the
CO2 waveform changes unexpectedly without a change in patient status.
To avoid infection, use only sterilized, disinfected or disposable airway adapters.
Inspect the airway adapters prior to use. Do not use if airway adapter appears to have been damaged
or broken. Observe airway adapter color coding for patient population.
Preparing to Measure Sidestream CO2
1Plug the sensor cable into the monitor's CO2 input connector. Allow the sensor two minutes warm
up time
2Connect the cannula, airway adapter, or sample line as appropriate, to the sensor. It will click into
place when seated correctly.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
199
3To zero the sensor:
– expose the sensor to room air and keep it away from all sources of CO2 including the
ventilator, the patient's breath and your own.
– in the setup menu for the CO2, select Start Zero Cal.
– when you see the message CO₂ calibration done at <date and time> on the status line, the
zero calibration is finished and you can begin monitoring.
4For intubated patients requiring an airway adapter: Install the airway adapter at the proximal end of the
circuit between the elbow and the ventilator Y-section.
For intubated patients with an integrated airway adapter in the breathing circuit.: Connect the male luer
connector on the straight sample line to the female port on the airway adapter.
For non-intubated patients: Place the nasal cannula onto the patient.
For patients prone to mouth breathing use an oral-nasal cannula.
For nasal or oral-nasal cannulas with oxygen delivery, place the cannula on the patient as shown then
attach the oxygen supply tubing to the oxygen delivery system and set the prescribed oxygen flow.
WARNING
Always connect the airway adapter to the sensor before inserting the airway adapter into the breathing
circuit. In reverse, always remove the airway adapter from the breathing circuit before removing the
sensor.
Make sure that you do not accidentally connect the luer connector of the gas sample line to an infusion
link or any other links in the patient vicinity.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
200
CAUTION
Always disconnect the cannula, airway adapter or sample line from the sensor when not in use.
Using the Sidestream Sensor Holder
The holder delivered with the sensor can be used to clamp the sensor onto an IV pole or a shelf.
1Push the sensor into the holder until it clicks into position.
2Clamp the holder onto an IV pole, a shelf or another appropriate location.
To remove the sensor from the holder, release the clip and pull the sensor out of the holder.
Removing Exhaust Gases from the System
WARNING
Anesthetics: When using the sidestream CO2 measurement on patients who are receiving or have
recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, to avoid exposing medical
staff to anesthetics.
Use an exhaust tube to remove the sample gas to a scavenging system. Attach it to the sidestream
sensor at the outlet connector.
Measuring Mainstream CO2 using M3016A
The M3016A Mainstream CO2 Extension measures partial pressure of carbon dioxide in a patient's
expired gas using the mainstream method. When using the appropriate accessories you can use the
mainstream CO2 measurement with ventilated adults, pediatric and neonatal patients.
WARNING
Infra-red radiation: Do not expose the airway adapter or M1460A transducer to infra-red radiation
during use. This may cause incorrect readings.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
201
Preparing to Measure Mainstream CO2
1Attach the transducer connector to the CO2 connector on the M3016A extension.
2Wait 20 minutes, allowing the transducer to reach its operating temperature and a stable thermal
condition.
3Perform an accuracy check and then, if necessary, calibrate the transducer.
Checking Transducer Accuracy
WARNING
Check transducer accuracy at least once a week or if you doubt the CO2 readings.
1In Setup CO₂ menu, select Cal. Mode to switch on calibration mode.
2Look at the calibration value displayed in the Setup CO₂ menu next to Start CAL1. Is it the same
as the value on the calstick? If not, calibrate the transducer now.
3Place the transducer on the low cell of the calstick (labeled 0.0 mmHg or "ZERO"). The reading
on the screen should be zero within ±1 mmHg within one minute.
4Place the transducer on the high cell of the calstick. The reading on the screen should be within
±1 mmHg of the value on the calstick within one minute.
5If both readings are in range, you can leave calibration mode and begin monitoring. If either of the
readings is out of range, calibrate the transducer.
Calibrating the Transducer
1Check that the windows on the calstick are clean and clear.
2Place the transducer on one of the calstick cells and select Start CAL1.
3Enter the calibration value printed on the calstick then press Confirm to start calibration.
4When the message CO₂ CAL1 done;Start CAL2 cal appears, put the transducer on the other cell
and select Start CAL2 then press Confirm.
5When you see the message CO₂ cal done; leave Cal. Mode, calibration is complete.
6Select Cal. Mode to switch calibration mode off. You cannot monitor in calibration mode.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
202
Attaching and Removing the CO2 Transducer
1Open the latch and place the transducer (B) onto the airway adapter (A). Place the airway adapter
in the patient's breathing circuit between the endotracheal tube and the Y-piece. You may see the
CO₂ Sens Warmup message until the transducer reaches operating temperature. Wait until this
disappears before starting the measurement.
2To remove the transducer from the airway adapter, open the latch and pull out the airway adapter.
WARNING
To prevent stress on the endotracheal tube, support the transducer and airway adapter.
To avoid infection, use only sterilized airway adapters.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
203
Measuring Microstream CO2 using M3015A/B
The M3015A/B Microstream CO2 Extension measures the partial pressure of carbon dioxide in a
patient's expired gas using Microstream technology.
The measurement is equipped with an automatic barometric pressure compensation.
WARNING
When using the IPI numeric (available for adult and pediatric patients), always ensure that the patient's
date of birth is entered correctly and that the monitor is displaying the current date. These two pieces
of information are used to calculate the age of the patient, which affects the algorithm used to provide
the IPI numeric.
Preparing to Measure Microstream CO2
Use appropriate accessories for:
• the patient type (adult, pediatric or neonatal),
• the ventilation situation (including humidification)
• the duration - short term use, up to 24 hours (typically OR), or long term use (typically ICU).
All accessories are for single patient use only.
Using Microstream Accessories
The Microstream measurement can be operated with the special Microstream accessories only. Refer
to the instructions for use provided with the accessory.
For intubated patient with non-humidified ventilation, you can use a Microstream FilterLine set. For
humidified ventilation, use a FilterLine H Set.
For non-intubated patients, the gas sample is taken through a Nasal FilterLine, or a Smart CapnoLine
(which is a combined oral-nasal FilterLine). In parallel to the measurement of the CO2, oxygen (O2)
may be delivered to the patient to support gas exchange. This is done by using an O2/CO2 FilterLine,
or a Smart CapnoLine O2 (a combined oral-nasal O2/CO2 FilterLine).
Using the FilterLine and Airway Adapter
WARNING
Make sure that you do not accidentally connect the luer connector of the gas sample line to an infusion
link or any other links in the patient vicinity.
1Attach the female Luer connector to the CO2 inlet connector by pushing the socket cover aside
and screwing the connector clockwise into the CO2 inlet until it can no longer be turned.
This will assure that there is no leak of gases at the connection point during measurement and that
measurement accuracy is not compromised. Following connection of the CO2 sampling line, check
that CO2 values appear on the monitor display.
2Check that the FilterLine is not kinked.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
204
3Change the FilterLine if a CO₂ Occlusion INOP appears on the monitor or if the readings become
extremely erratic.
Disconnect the FilterLine during suctioning and nebulizing therapies or suppress sampling by turning
off the pump as described in “Suppressing Sampling (not Mainstream CO2)” on page 205.
Check the table in the Microstream CO2 Accessories section of the Accessories chapter for typical
usage times for the different Microstream accessories.
CO2 values for non-intubated patients using Microstream accessories will always tend to be lower than
for intubated patients. If values appear extremely low, check whether the patient is breathing through
the mouth or whether one nostril is blocked.
Removing Exhaust Gases from the System
WARNING
Anesthetics: When using the Microstream CO2 measurement on patients who are receiving or have
recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, or to the anesthesia machine/
ventilator, to avoid exposing medical staff to anesthetics.
Use an exhaust tube to remove the sample gas to a scavenging system. Attach it to the MMS Extension
at the outlet connector.
Suppressing Zero Calibration
To prevent an automatic zero calibration from being started in the next five minutes,
•in the Setup CO₂ menu, select No Zero For 5Min, or select the Suppress CO₂ Zero SmartKey, if
configured.
Selecting No Zero For 5Min or selecting the Suppress CO₂ Zero SmartKey again before the timer has
timed out resets the timer to five minutes, unless an AutoZero became due during the previous
suppression.
Setting up all CO2 Measurements
These tasks are common to all CO2 measurements except where otherwise noted.
Adjusting the CO2 Wave Scale
1In the CO₂ Wave menu or the Setup CO₂ menu, select Scale.
2Choose a suitable scale range from the pop-up list.
Setting up CO2 Corrections
Temperature, water vapor in the patient's breath, barometric pressure, and the proportions of O2, N2O
and Helium in the mixture all influence CO2 absorption. If values seem inaccurately high or low, check
that the monitor is using the appropriate corrections.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
205
Suppressing Sampling (not Mainstream CO2)
To temporarily stop sampling, in the Setup CO₂ menu, select Pump 15Min Off or use the CO₂ Pump
Off SmartKey if available.
Selecting Pump 15Min Off again before fifteen minutes have passed resets the timer to fifteen
minutes.
To re-start the pump, in the Setup CO₂ menu, select Pump On.
Changing CO2 Alarms
This refers to CO2 specific alarms. See the Alarms section for general alarm information.
To change the etCO2 alarm limits, in the Setup CO₂ menu:
1Touch the high limit on the alarm limits menu key.
2Choose the high alarm limit from the pop-up list that opens.
3Touch the low limit on the alarm limits menu key.
4Choose the low alarm limit from the pop-up list that opens.
To change the imCO2 high limit:
•Select
imCO₂ High and choose the high alarm limit from the pop-up list that opens.
Correction
Altitude
(M3014A only)
Altitude is set during installation. The monitor automatically applies an
appropriate correction.
O2
(M3014A only)
In the Setup CO₂ menu, select Oxy. Corr and select a value between 20%
and 100%, the default value is 20%. If you are not measuring the expired O2,
estimate it by subtracting 5% from the inspired O2 then select the nearest
value from the list.
Humidity At installation, the monitor is configured to automatically apply either Body
Temperature Pressure Saturated (BTPS) or Ambient Temperature Pressure
Dry (ATPD). To see which, go to the Setup CO₂ menu, and scroll down to
look at Hum. Corr or Humidity Corr..
N2O
(M3016A mainstream
and M3015A/B
microstream only)
In the Setup CO₂ menu, select N₂O Corr. and turn on or off. If N2O is
present in the ventilation gas mixture, you must turn this on.
If the N2O correction is not available in the Setup CO₂ menu, the CO2
measurement in your MMS Extension does not require N2O correction or it
is setup with Gas Corr. (see below).
Gas
(M3014A only)
In the Setup CO₂ menu, select Gas Corr. and select Helium, N₂O or turn off.
If Helium or N2O is present in the ventilation gas mixture, you must make
the appropriate selection.
If the Gas correction is not available in the Setup CO₂ menu, the CO2
measurement in your MMS Extension does not require N2O or Helium
correction or the N2O correction is setup with N₂O Corr. (see above).
Agent
(M3014A only)
In the Setup CO₂ menu, select Agt. Corr and select the concentration of the
anesthetic agent (between 0.0% and 20.0%). If an anesthetic agent is present
in the ventilation gas mixture, you must select the appropriate concentration.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
206
Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay
This determines the time limit after which the monitor alarms if the patient stops breathing.
1In the Setup CO₂ menu, select awRR.
2In Setup awRR menu, select Apnea Time.
3Choose the apnea alarm delay time.
WARNING
Safety and effectiveness of the respiration measurement method in the detection of apnea,
particularly the apnea of prematurity and apnea of infancy, has not been established.
Prolonged delay: The selected apnea alarm delay may be prolonged by up to 17 seconds, if an apnea
occurs during the automatic zero process. This applies to the Microstream (M3015A) measurement
only.
Deriving Alarms From awRR
1In the Setup CO₂ menu, select awRR.
2In the Setup awRR menu, select Alarms.
3Choose On to derive alarms from the airway respiration signal or Off to disable them.
Changing awRR Alarm Limits
1In the Setup CO₂ menu, select awRR.
2Select High Limit to set the upper alarm limit.
Select Low Limit to set the lower alarm limit.
3Select the appropriate setting.
Changing IPI Alarm Limits
1In the Setup CO₂ menu, select IPI.
2Select Low Limit to set the low alarm limit.
3Select a value between 2 and 9.
If you also have monitors with earlier software revisions than J.0, the IPI low alarm will not be
generated after a transfer to one of these monitors, or when a monitor/MMS with the IPI functionality
is connected to one of these monitors in companion mode. In this case, do not rely only on the IPI
low alarm but leave the individual alarms switched on (etCO2, awRR, pulse rate and SpO2) so that
these alarms can be generated in such situations.
Understanding the IPI Numeric
The index is modeled on normal healthy patients (ASA Physical Status value of 1 according to the ASA
Physical Status Classification System). Patients with ASA Physical Status values of 3 or higher are
expected to have low IPI values by definition. Therefore, for patients with an ASA Physical Status
value of 3 or higher, the index may have no added value.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
207
The value of the Integrated Pulmonary Index given in the IPI numeric is associated with the patient
status as follows:
NOTE
The interpretation of the patient's IPI score may change in different clinical environments. For
example, patients with specific respiratory difficulties (in contrast to normally healthy patients who are
being monitored during sedation or pain management) may require a lower IPI Low Alarm threshold
to reflect their impaired respiratory capacity.
The IPI is available for all three groups of pediatric patients (1-3 years, 3-6 years, and 6-12 years), and
for adult patients.
WARNING
Ensure that the patient category and date of birth are set correctly before monitoring a patient's IPI.
An incorrect patient category or date of birth could produce incorrect IPI data.
IPI Patient Status
10 Normal
8-9 Within normal range
7 Close to normal range; requires attention
5-6 Requires attention and may require intervention
3-4 Requires intervention
1-2 Requires immediate intervention.
14 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
208
15
209
15Using a Telemetry Device and a
Monitor (PIIC only)
It is possible to assign a monitor and a telemetry device to the same patient, resulting in the
information from both devices being combined in one sector at the Information Center. This is called
"pairing" and when a telemetry device and a monitor are paired, the measurement data from the
telemetry device will be displayed on the monitor screen.
A telemetry device can be:
• any Philips telemetry device (only for indirect connections, see below).
• a TRx/TRx+ Intellivue Telemetry system transceiver.
For complete user information, including accessory listings and specifications, for the M4841A/
M4851A TRx/TRx+ IntelliVue Telemetry Transceiver, refer to the Instructions for Use provided with
the device.
How Can You Combine Devices?
•With an indirect connection, using standard telemetry transmission - the data are sent to the
monitor via the Information Center and arrive with a delay of several seconds at the monitor.
•With a direct connection to the monitor, via a short range radio link - the data arrive with a
minimal delay on the monitor screen.
Indirect Connection - Manual Pairing
The telemetry device can be paired with the monitor at the Information Center or at the monitor. For
detailed information regarding pairing and configuration at the Information Center, see the
Information Center Instructions for Use.
To pair the monitor with a telemetry device at the monitor:
1Select Main Setup then Measurements
2Select Telemetry
The Setup Telemetry menu will appear with only one entry Paired Equipment.
3Enter here the equipment label of the telemetry device to be paired.
Pairing at the monitor is only possible when the monitor already has a connection to the Information
Center and the Information Center software version allows pairing at the monitor.
15 Using a Telemetry Device and a Monitor (PIIC only)
210
Own Patient Overview Window
The measurements from the telemetry device are shown in the own patient overview window on the
monitor when there is no direct connection via short range radio link.
See “Own Patient Overview Window” on page 101.
Direct Connection - Automatic Pairing
The following direct connections are possible:
• a TRx+4841A/4851A Intellivue Telemetry system transceiver connected via short range radio
(SRR) link to an MP2 with SRR capability.
If a telemetry device is assigned to a monitor via a direct short range radio link, the monitor and the
telemetry device are automatically paired at the Information Center (if configured).
The measured data from the telemetry device - ECG and, if available, SpO2T - will appear on the
monitor screen and will be sent through the monitor to the Information Center. The ECG waves and
numerics appear in place of the monitor's own ECG, and SpO2T is displayed as an additional
measurement. When ECG is measured with the telemetry device there will be no Respiration
measurement derived.
WARNING
• When ECG is being measured with a telemetry device directly connected to the monitor, there will
be no ECG signal available at the ECG analog output or ECG Sync Pulse output and no
synchronization marks on the ECG wave. A No ECG Out message will appear in the ECG wave
channel.
• When a telemetry device is connected to the monitor, arrhythmia relearning is initiated, and again
when the telemetry device is disconnected.
• Controls on the Telemetry Device (e.g. nurse call) will be inactive when the device is directly
connected to the monitor except in the case when the monitor has no network connection and
data are transferred via the telemetry device.
See the “Enhancing Telemetry Monitoring with the Monitor” chapter.
Assigning a Telemetry Transceiver with an SRR Adapter to a Monitor
Monitors which have this capability have a short range radio symbol on the model label.
A telemetry device with a short range radio adapter can be assigned to a monitor directly. To assign a
telemetry device to a monitor:
1Press the Check button on the telemetry device.
The measurement selection key on the monitor will change to show the "add cableless" symbol
2Select the symbol.
3In the Add Cableless window, select the correct equipment label for the telemetry device.
4Check that the assignment is successful and that transmission has begun:
•A
Tele Device assigned message appears on the monitor
15 Using a Telemetry Device and a Monitor (PIIC only)
211
• A tone sounds at the telemetry device and the Leads Off indicators light
• The ECG wave appears on the monitor
To confirm that the correct telemetry device has been assigned, open the ECG Setup menu. The title
of the menu contains the equipment label of the telemetry device; check that this is the correct label.
If a telemetry device is already assigned to a monitor, you cannot assign a further telemetry device to
that monitor.
If the telemetry device goes out-of-range or loses the short range radio connection, it will switch over
to standard telemetry transmission to the Information Center. In this case, the telemetry data is
displayed in the Own Patient Overview Window as described above.
When a telemetry device with a short range radio adapter is assigned to the patient, the short range
radio connection to the monitor is made automatically.
If a telemetry device disappears from the list in the Add Cableless menu, press the Check button on
the telemetry device again. If the monitor is not configured to be used with a telemetry device, the add
cableless symbol will appear crossed out .
If the telemetry device is removed (unassigned), the short range radio connection will be ended.
WARNING
Short range radio connections are subject to interruption due to interference from other radio sources
in the vicinity, including microwaves, bluetooth devices and DECT phones. Outside the operating
frequency band and 5% above and below, i.e. the exclusion band according IEC 60601-1-2, section
36.202.3a)4), the short range radio connection is immune up to 3V/m in the frequency range from 80
MHz to 2.0 GHz and up to 1V/m in the frequency range from 2.0 to 2.3 GHz. Depending on the
strength and duration of the interference, the interruption may occur for an extended period. A loss of
connection, due to moving out-of-range, interference, or for other reasons, is indicated with a Tele
Disconnected INOP.
Correct channel configuration is important, refer to the Configuration Guide for details.
If a Tele Disconnected INOP occurs when the telemetry device goes out-of-range, the INOP will
disappear (without being silenced) as soon as the ECG signal from the telemetry device is available at
the Information Center via standard telemetry transmission.
Unpairing the Monitor and Telemetry Device
If the patient will no longer be monitored with the telemetry device, or only with the telemetry device
and no longer with the monitor, you need to end the device pairing. After unpairing, the Information
Center will receive data exclusively from the monitor or from the telemetry device:
• select the Unpair To Mon. SmartKey to end pairing and have the Information Center receive the
measurement data from the monitor
• select the Unpair To Tele SmartKey to end pairing and have the Information Center receive the
measurement data from the telemetry device
15 Using a Telemetry Device and a Monitor (PIIC only)
212
or
use the Unpair function at the Information Center.
NOTE
The SmartKeys and pop-up keys for unpairing appear only on the monitor which is directly involved
in pairing.
Temporarily Stopping the Short Range Radio
Connection
To temporarily disable the SRR connection for this device, for example, in case of interference:
1Open the Equipment window - either directly in Main Setup or by selecting the bed label in the
information line.
2Select the telemetry device.
3Select Disable SRR in the menu displayed.
This closes the SRR connection and the telemetry device switches over to standard telemetry
transmission.
To return to SRR use:
•Select
Enable SRR and press the check button on the telemetry transceiver.
16
213
16Enhancing Telemetry
Monitoring with the Monitor
You can use a monitor without a network connection to view measurement data from a telemetry
transceiver at the bedside. You can also use the monitor to make additional measurements and send
this measurement data to the Information Center via the telemetry transceiver. The monitor can so be
used as a mobile viewer and measurement device, and is set up to simplify the assign/unassign
procedures when used with short range radio.
Monitor and Telemetry Transceiver Requirements
The monitor and the telemetry transceiver need a direct connection via a short range radio link. Not all
revisions of the telemetry transceiver can be used directly with the monitor, if you connect a device
that cannot be used you will see a Tele Unsupported INOP.
Data Sent to the Information Center
The data sent to the Information Center includes numerics from NBP, SpO2, Pulse from SpO2 and
predictive temperature. INOPs from these measurements, battery INOPs and a general INOP
generated by alarms from any other measurement (More Bed Alarms) will also be transmitted.
NOTE
The monitor must be configured appropriately to support direct connection to a telemetry transceiver;
refer to the Configuration Guide for details.
Changing Assignment to a New Telemetry Transceiver
1Assign the telemetry transceiver to the monitor; see “Assigning a Telemetry Transceiver with an
SRR Adapter to a Monitor” on page 102.
2Make the required measurements; the data will be automatically sent to the Information Center via
the telemetry transceiver.
It is not necessary to unassign the telemetry transceiver. This will happen automatically when the
next telemetry transceiver is assigned. The patient is also discharged (if configured), ensuring that
the measurement data is erased before data from the next patient appears. Always assign the
telemetry transceiver before you start making measurements.
16 Enhancing Telemetry Monitoring with the Monitor
214
17
215
17Trends
Trends are patient data collected over time and displayed in graphic or tabular form to give you a
picture of how your patient's condition is developing. Trend information is stored in the trends
database for continuously-monitored measurements, such as ECG, as well as for aperiodically-
measured parameters, such as Cardiac Output.
Viewing Trends
Trend information can be viewed embedded as a screen element on specially-designed Screens, or you
can open a trend window over the current Screen.
• To view trends embedded as a screen element, enter the Change Screen window, then select a
Screen designed to show an embedded trend window.
• To open the tabular trends window over the current Screen, select Main Setup, Trends, then
Vitals Trend, or select the Vitals Trend SmartKey .
• To open the graphic trends window over the current Screen, select the Graph Trend SmartKey
.
The trend windows open displaying the most recent data and are updated as new data is stored. A
timescale along the bottom or the top of the screen shows you where you are in the trends database.
The preview column on the right-hand side shows the latest available measurement value. The preview
column is updated every five minutes or whenever an NBP or other aperiodic measurement is
completed.
A question mark (?) beside a value means that the data may not be reliable, due perhaps to an INOP
condition in the measurement.
Your monitor screen may look slightly different to the examples shown in this chapter.
17 Trends
216
Trends Pop-Up Keys
When you open the graphic, tabular or histogram trends window, a selection of pop-up keys appears to
let you navigate through the stored trend data and carry out trends-related tasks.
Pop-Up Keys Selecting this pop-up key lets you....
Select Group see a pop-up list of trend groups and select a group for viewing.
Select Interval see a pop-up list of available data resolution settings and select the level of
detail shown in the trend view.
Print/ Record print a tabular trends report or make a tabular trend recording of the data in
the current window. The report will use the current trend interval settings.
Print print a graphic trends report or histogram report of the data in the current
window. The report will use the current trend interval settings.
move the cursor one step to the left or right to navigate through the trends
database timeline.
move the cursor one page to the left or right to navigate through the trends
database timeline.
jump to the beginning or the end of the trends database to see the most
recent or oldest trend information stored.
scroll up and down the screen to see measurement trends that do not fit in
the current view.
Vital Signs open the current trend view in tabular form. The displayed time period and
resolution stay the same.
Graph Trend open the current trend view in graphic form. The displayed time period and
resolution stay the same.
Data Source select a realtime SpO2 or realtime system pulse or trended data for display in
the histogram.
Period select a time period for the histogram.
Select Range define the range of values to be displayed in the histogram by selecting an
upper and a lower limit.
Column select a column width for the histogram. For each width selection the
resulting number of columns is shown.
Curve On/Off switch the display of the cumulative value columns in the histogram on or
off.
Adjust Cursor open a new set of pop-up keys for switching on cursors and setting their
positions.
17 Trends
217
Viewing Graphic Trends
1Scroll to view more pop-up keys
A cursor spanning all measurements in the trend group helps you to navigate through the trends
database and shows you your current position in the database. When the cursor is moved across the
time line, the values measured at the cursor time are shown in the right hand column.
In graphical trends, aperiodic measurement trends are shown as an asterisk, NBP has a special symbol.
To use the trend cursor to navigate in time through the trends database,
1Select the graphical trend or the arrow pop-up keys to activate the cursor.
2Use the arrow pop-up keys to move the trend cursor backwards and forwards in time, or
3Place the cursor at a specific time by touching the graph.
17 Trends
218
Viewing Vital Signs Trends
1Aperiodic values are shown with a timestamp
2Scroll to view more pop-up keys
The currently-selected column is highlighted. The values can be configured to display in the same
colors as the waves and numerics on the realtime display.
Any values available for display before the next scheduled update are shown in the right hand column,
with a timestamp in brackets.
If more than one value is available for an aperiodic trend for a certain trend period, all measured values
are stored in the database and the value closest to the timestamp is shown in the Vital Signs display
marked with an arrow.
To view the Vital Signs trend with one column for each NBP measurement (see “Defining the Column
Interval Using the NBP Measurement” on page 221):
1With the Vital Signs trend open, select Interval.
2Select NBP from the pop-up list.
Setting Up Trends
Trends are set up in Configuration Mode. You can make temporary changes to trends settings such as
trend groups, priorities, or scales in Monitoring Mode. The general settings for all Trends are under
Main Setup, Trends.
Settings for a single segment in graphical trends or for the corresponding trend group can be made
more easily in that segment menu.
Making Segment Settings
The Graphical Trends window is divided into measurement segments, each of which has its own
settings.
To enter the segment menu,
17 Trends
219
• select the left hand column of the segment, where the measurement label is displayed.
Expanded View
To expand the segment to fill the Graphical Trends window,
•in the Segment menu, select Expand to have that segment enlarged to fill the window.
In the expanded view, you can also highlight a measurement to make it more easily visible (for example
when multiple ST trends are in one segment). To highlight a measurement,
•in the Segment menu, select Highlight repeatedly until the highlight is on the required
measurement.
To return the segment to its original size,
•in the Segment menu, select Expand again.
Trend Scales for Segment Measurements
To change the trend scales for a measurement in the current segment:
1In the Segment menu, select the measurement label.
2Select Upper to change the upper limit of the scale or Lower to change the lower limit of the scale.
Optimum Scale
To have the monitor automatically select an optimum scale for viewing, based on current values,
•in the Segment menu, select Optimum Scale.
This scale change is temporary. When the graphical trend window is closed the scale reverts back to
the setting in Parameter Scales.
To switch off automatic optimum scaling,
•in the Segment menu, select Optimum Scale again.
Trend Group
To add or remove measurements for this trend group or change the order of the existing
measurements:
1In the Segment menu, select Change Group.
2Use the Add, Change, Sort Up and Sort Down pop-up keys to change or re-order the group as
required.
No. of Segments
In an embedded graphical trend window, you can select the number of segments to be displayed in the
Segment menu:
•In the Segment menu, select No. Of Segments.
Trend Groups
The measurements grouped in trend groups define the trends displayed together in the Vital Signs or
Graphical Trends windows and printed in trends reports and recordings. The sequence of the
measurements in the group defines the order in which they are displayed. Measurements listed
17 Trends
220
between dotted line separators are displayed overlapping. The trend group All contains all available
measurements, you cannot change the order or selection of this group.
To change the selection of measurements in a trend group, either use the Change Group setting in the
Segment menu or:
1Select Main Setup, Trends, then Trend Groups.
2Select the Trend Group you want to change and use the pop-up keys to Add, Change, or Delete
the selection of measurements trended.
To temporarily change the order in which the measurements are displayed in a group,
1Select Main Setup, Trends, then Trend Groups.
2Select the Trend Group and then the measurement you want to move and use the Sort Up/Sort
Down pop-up keys.
Trend Interval
The trend interval defines the resolution of trend data shown on the Screen.
To set the trend resolution, in the Vital Signs or Graphical Trends window,
• Select the Select Interval pop-up key and then select the required interval from the list.
Trend Priority
The monitor stores trend information for all monitored measurements, if configured to do so. If your
configuration restricts the number of measurements trended, you must choose which measurements
will be included. A priority list is used to select the trended measurements.
To see the measurement priority list for trending,
1In the Main Setup menu, select Trends.
2Select Trend Priority.
To add measurements to the priority list,
1Select the pop-up key Add and choose from the pop-up list of available measurements.
2Use the Sort Up and Sort Down pop-up keys to change the priority order.
Trend Parameter Scales
Parameter scales define how the trend waveform will appear on the screen and in trend reports.
Separate scales can be set for adult, pediatric, and neonatal patient trends.
To change the trend parameter scales settings, either use the Scale setting in the Segment menu or:
1In the Main Setup menu, select Trends.
2Select Parameter Scales.
3Select the measurement or parameter you want to change from the list.
4Select the pop-up key Change to call up the Scale menu.
5In the Scale menu, select the parameter label you want to define settings for. Select Adult, Pedi,
and Neo and use the pop-up keypad to enter new upper and lower scale definitions.
17 Trends
221
Graphical Trend Presentation
Graphical trends and screen trends for measurements with compound values (for example ABP or
CO2) can be viewed in line or band form.
To change the presentation style,
1Select Main Setup then select Trends.
2Select Global Style and choose
•Line to display the trends as a continuous line
•Band to fill the area between the trend lines, for example, between the systolic and diastolic
pressures, with color.
This sample ABP trend shows the continuously-measured values for the systolic, diastolic and mean
pressures displayed in band form.
Defining the Column Interval Using the NBP Measurement
You can have the NBP measurement determine the interval between the columns on the Vital Signs
trend. Each NBP measurement will generate a column in the trend table. The values for the other
measurements are added to the column to provide a complete vital signs set for the NBP measurement
time.
To use the NBP measurement to determine the column interval:
1Select Main Setup then Trends.
2In the Trends menu, select Setup VitalSigns.
3In the Vital Signs menu, select Column and then NBP from the pop-up menu.
Documenting Trends
To print a Vital Signs or Graphical Trends report,
•in the Vital Signs or Graph Trends window, select the pop-up key Print to print a report for the
trend group currently on the monitor screen.
Reports include the most recent information in the trends database and extend backwards in time
according to the selected trend interval and your monitor's configuration. Trends reports can be
printed on central or local printers.
Trends Databases
The trend databases store information for up to 16 measurements for up to 48 hours.
The values in the trends database are stored as measured by the monitor, they are not averaged values.
The trend resolution defines how often a value is stored. In general, if more than one value is available
for storage in the trends database, the most recent value is used. Some values in the trends are marked
17 Trends
222
with arrows. This indicates that for this time period, more values were available and the most recent
one is shown.
Example database configuration
In this example, we see that the monitor stores the most recent data at the highest resolution, older
data are stored at a lower resolution.
"4 hours @ 12 second resolution" means that the monitor stores trend data every 12 seconds, for the
most recent four hours.
Aperiodic Trends Database
Aperiodic trends do not count toward the maximum number of trends allowed by the trend
configuration. Trend data for aperiodic measurements is stored in a separate database and
timestamped with the measurement time.
Trending Multiple-Value Measurements
Some measurements generate multiple values, for example invasive pressure measurements can
provide systolic, diastolic, and mean values. These values are trended as separate measurements.
Screen Trends
Trends configured to display permanently on special monitor Screens are called screen trends. The
selection and number of measurement waves in the Screen Trend segment depends on your monitor
configuration. Screen trends are color-coded to match the measurement wave and numerics, and they
can be viewed in graphical, tabular, histogram or horizon format.
If you do not see screen trends on the monitor Screen, select a different Screen, one that is configured
to show screen trends. Screen trends are only available on specially designed Screens.
Screen Trend information is taken from the Trends database. If you do not see a Screen Trend for a
particular measurement on the Screen, check the trend priority list to ensure that this measurement is
being trended.
Setting the Screen Trend Time
To set the ScreenTrend Time for all graphical, histogram and horizon screen trends ("global" trend
time),
1Select a screen trend then select Setup Trend, or select Main Setup then select Trends.
2Select ScreenTrend Time and select the required time: 30 minutes, one, two, four, eight, or twelve
hours.
This is now the Global screen trend time and defines the period of trend information shown for
all screen trends.
17 Trends
223
To set a different ScreenTrend Time for a screen trend or a group of aligned screen trends,
1Select a screen trend.
2Select Change TrendTime.
3Select the required trend time.
Selecting Global leaves the trend time set to the global screen trend time.
Changing the Selection of Screen Trends Displayed
1Select the screen trend.
2Select Change Trend and select the required trend from the list of available trends.
Select Blank to remove the selected trend from the Screen.
If you do not see Change Trend in the screen trend menu, the trend is aligned to display with the
measurement wave. Changing the wave automatically changes the trend.
To display two or more screen trends overlapping,
1Select the screen trend to open the screen trend menu,
2Select Change Trend followed by Add Trend and select a screen trend from the pop-up list.
Activating the Cursor for Screen Trends
To activate the cursor for Screen Trends:
1Select the screen trend.
2Select Activate Cursor.
You can now use the arrow keys to move the cursor across the time line. The values measured at the
cursor time are shown next to the cursor.
To de-activate the cursor,
• Press the Main Screen key.
Changing the Screen Trend View
To switch between tabular, graphic, histogram and horizon views, select the screen trend then select
Change View and select the required view.
Tabular View
Aperiodic measurements such as NBP, can be viewed as a screen trend in tabular form. The measured
values and their timestamps are shown, with the measurement label.
17 Trends
224
Horizon View
The horizon view presents trend information superimposed over a defined baseline or base range. This
helps you visualize changes in your patient's condition since the baseline was set.
The horizon view is made up of:
• a horizon, drawn in white, as a reference point or baseline to help you visualize changes in your
patient's condition. The horizon can be set to represent your patient's current condition, or a
target condition and can be a single value or a range.
• a graphical trend, displaying patient data for the set TrendTime (1).
• a trend indicator arrow, indicating how the patient trend has developed in the set time period
(10minutes, 5minutes or 2minutes) (2).
• a deviation bar, showing how the currently measured value deviates from the set horizon (3). The
height of the deviation bar is an indication of the extent of the change in your patient's condition
relative to the (horizon) baseline.
Your monitor may not be configured to show all elements of the screen trend horizon view.
Setting the Horizon
The horizon is the reference value to which deviations in the measurements are compared.
1To set the horizon, select the horizon trend.
2Select
–Set High Horizon to select the upper horizon value. If the high and low horizon values are the
same, the horizon is a baseline - if the values are different the horizon is a range.
–Set Low Horizon to select the lower horizon value.
–Auto Horizon to set the horizon for the selected horizon trend to the currently-measured
value.
–Auto All to reset the horizon for all horizon screen trends to the currently-measured values.
–Set Horizon to set the horizon to a specific value from a pop-up list.
Setting the Horizon Trend Scale
The horizon trend scale is defined with respect to the horizon. If your horizon is set to 100 and you
select 20 as the horizon scale delta, the upper limit of the horizon scale will be 120 and lower limit 80.
To set the horizon trend scale delta,
1Select the horizon trend.
2Select Set Scale Delta and select a value to define the distance between the horizon and the upper
and lower scale limits.
17 Trends
225
Be aware that changing the horizon trend scale can change the angle of the trend indicator, without the
patient's condition having changed.
If a measurement exceeds the outer limits of the scale, the wave will be clipped and you must either
reset the horizon or the horizon trend scale to display the values outside the scale limits.
Setting the Time Period for the Trend Indicator Arrow
The time period for which the trend indicator arrow is displayed can be set in the Trends window.
1Select Main Setup then select Trends.
2Select HorizonArrowTime.
3Select 10, 5 or 2 minutes.
17 Trends
226
18
227
18Recording
Central
Recording For central recording from the bedside, your monitor must be connected via a network to an
Information Center. You can use either the M1116B 2-Channel Recorder or the standalone M3160A
4-Channel Recorder. Recordings made on the M3160A may look slightly different to those described
here. See the documentation supplied with the Information Center for information on the 4-Channel
Recorder.
Starting and Stopping Recordings
The recordings pop-up keys let you start and stop recordings. Select the Main Setup SmartKey then
select Recordings to call up the line of pop-up keys. Scroll right or left to see any pop-up keys not
displayed.
Recording Without a Template
To record without a preconfigured template, selecting the waves you require,
1Select the Main Setup SmartKey, then select Recordings.
2Select the pop-up key Select Waves.
3Use the pop-up keys to choose up to three measurement waves to be printed on the recording. If
you want fewer than three waves on the recording, select the waves you want then select the
Continue pop-up key.
4Select one of the recording speed pop-up keys to set the required recording speed.
5Select the Start pop-up key to start the recording.
Select Waves recordings use default values for any recorder settings not defined: runtime is
continuous, overlapping is set to non-overlapping.
Delayed Recordng
RT A Recordng
RT B Recordng
Select Waves
Setup Recordng
Stop All Recordng
18 Recording
228
Overview of Recording Types
Creating and Changing Recordings Templates
To save you defining recording settings each time you start a recording, you can create templates for
commonly-used types of recordings in the Setup Recordings menu. You can create templates for one
delayed recording, one alarm recording and two realtime recordings (Realtime A and Realtime B).
Changing recordings templates changes the settings that will be used each time a recording of this
name is triggered.
1Select the Main Setup SmartKey to call up the Main Setup menu.
2Select Recordings.
3Select the Setup Recordng pop-up key to enter the Setup Recordings menu.
4Select the name of the template you want to create or change. Each recording name is linked to a
recording type: delayed, alarm, and realtime. Recording names can be changed in the monitor's
Configuration Mode.
5Design the template by selecting each menu item and entering the information for the template.
•Recorder: choose which recorder the recording will print to (Central 2-Ch or Central 4-
Ch recorder, or a printer (for realtime reports in alarm recording only)).
•Channel 1, Channel 2, etc.: choose which waveform to record in each channel.
In addition to the currently available waves, you can choose from several other settings which
make an automatic allocation when the recording starts:
–Alarm Par will always record the measurement in alarm in the chosen recorder channel
–Primary Lead will always record the current primary lead in the chosen recorder channel
–SecondryLead will always record the current secondary lead in the chosen recorder channel
•Overlap: define whether the recorded waveforms will be printed overlapping or beside each other.
Delayed Alarm Realtime (RT)
Type of recording manual automatic, triggered by defined alarm
conditions
manual
Recording
Destination
central central printer central
Information
recorded
from the start trigger
minus the delay time
from the start trigger
minus the delay time
n/a from the start trigger
Number of waves up to 2 up to 2 n/a up to 2
Speed 50, 25, 6.25 mm/sec 25 mm/sec n/a 50, 25, 6.25 mm/sec
Runtime n/a n/a n/a continuously
Stops automatically automatically n/a manually
Delay Time 10, 15 seconds 10, 15 seconds n/a none
Overlap Off
On (up to 2 waves)
Off
On (up to 2 waves)
n/a Off
On (up to 2 waves)
n/a = not applicable
18 Recording
229
•Speed: choose the recording print speed.
•Delay Time: Delayed recordings start documenting on the recorder strip from a pre-set time
before the recording is started. This interval is called the "Delay Time" and can be set as specified
in “Overview of Recording Types” on page 228. This setting can only be changed in Configuration
Mode.
•Run Time: see how long this type of recording is configured to run. This setting can only be
changed in Configuration Mode. Continuous recordings run indefinitely.
•Central Config - if available in the General menu, select this setting to use the recording settings
made for the centrally-connected recorder.
Maintaining Recording Strips
Recording ink sometimes fades when covered with transparent tape. Avoid covering any part of a
recording that is clinically relevant (annotation or waveforms) when taping a recording strip to a
patient record or other patient documentation.
Recorder Status Messages
CAUTION
If no central recorder is available, alarm recordings may be lost. The message No alarm recording
available will be displayed. This message is not shown if Printer is configured as the alarm recording
destination.
Recorder Status Messages Explanation
<Recording Name> running The named recording is currently running.
No alarm recording available No recorder available. Alarm recordings will be lost.
Try configuring Printer as the alarm recording
destination.
Central Recorder out of paper The named recorder is out of paper.
Central Recorder door open The door of the specified recorder is open.
18 Recording
230
19
231
19Printing Patient Reports
Starting Report Printouts
Most patient reports can be printed by selecting Main Setup then Reports (or the Print Reports
SmartKey) and then selecting the report name in the top half of the Reports menu. Report names are
shown only for reports that have been correctly set up.
Data from the time of the print request is printed, even if the print job is delayed in the printer queue.
Your monitor can also be set up to automatically print all reports when a matching printer is available.
To set this up
1Select Main Setup, then select Reports.
2Select Auto Print Dbs.
–Always will print all reports when a matching printer is available.
–Host Only will print the reports stored on the host monitor when a matching printer is
available. Reports stored in the companion database (shown in gray on the Reports Job List)
must be manually sent to the printer. See “Checking Report Status and Printing Manually” on
page 236.
–Never will print no reports automatically; all reports stored in the host or companion database
must be manually sent to the printer. See “Checking Report Status and Printing Manually” on
page 236.
Printout Location
Depending on availability, reports can be printed:
• on printers connected to the Information Center,
• to an IntelliVue XDS Application print service,
• to an external PC-based print server with Philips server software,
• into the print database.
Print jobs stored in the database are automatically printed when a print device with a matching paper
size becomes available.
Print jobs in the print database are not deleted after a patient discharge. A new patient can be
admitted and their reports are saved in addition to the previous reports. Always admit your patient so
that reports can be clearly assigned to a patient.
19 Printing Patient Reports
232
Starting the Different Types of Report
Stopping Reports Printouts
• To stop Reports printing, in the Reports menu, select
–Delete Report to stop the current print job
–Delete All Repts to cancel all queued report printouts
–Scheduled Rep. to select Off and switch off scheduled reports.
Setting Up Reports
The content you define in the individual Setup Reports menus will be used in all reports of this type:
for example, if you set a print speed of 50 mm/sec in the ECG Reports menu, every ECG report will
be printed at this speed, irrespective of format.
ECG report layout and Auto Reports settings must be defined in Configuration Mode.
Setting Up ECG Reports
The settings you choose in the ECG Reports menu apply for all ECG-A and ECG-B reports printed.
To set up ECG Reports,
1Select Main Setup, Reports, then ECG Reports. Note the report layout configured for your
monitor, either Internat or Cabrera. This setting is inactive ("grayed-out") in Monitoring Mode
and can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
Report types Report contents How to start printing reports
Vital Signs Report Depends on selected trend group, data resolution,
and period.
In the Vital Signs window, select Print/ Record,
then select Print.
Graphic Trends Report In the Graphical Trends window, select Print.
ECG Reports Depends on format selected. Select the ECG Report A, or ECG Report B
SmartKeys, if configured, or the Print Reports
SmartKey followed by ECG Report A or ECG
Report B.
12-Lead Report Captured ECG waves, measurement values, ST Map
(optional) and analysis results from the Information
Center (PIIC iX only)
In an active 12-Lead application window, select the
Print Report pop-up key.
ST Map Report ST data in a transversal and/or horizontal multi-axis
diagram
In the ST Map (Current) or ST Map (Trend)
window, select Print.
Alarm Limits Report Graphic and numeric report of all current alarm
limits
In the Alarm Limits window, select Print
Limits.
Realtime Reports Patient data and numerics, and either:
all displayed waves OR all measured waves OR all
measured RT waves
Select the Realtime Report SmartKey, if
configured.
Battery Report Battery serial number, information on the currently-
measured and potential charge status of the battery
In the Battery Status window, select Print
Status.
Central Report A/B/C These are reports configured at the Information
Center. Monitors connected via the IntelliVue
Instrument Telemetry wireless network can have
these reports available.
In the Main Setup select Reports then Central
Report A, Central Report B or Central
Report C.
19 Printing Patient Reports
233
2Select ECG Gain and set the required ECG gain to define how ECG waves will appear on the ECG
report printouts.
3Select Speed and select the report print speed.
4Select Annotation and switch to On if the printed ECG wave should be annotated with beat labels.
See the “ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring” chapter for a list of beat labels. Pace pulse
marks are automatically printed beside the wave for paced patients.
Setting Up Vital Signs and Graphic Trend Reports
The settings you choose in the Vital Signs Report and Graphical Trend Report menus apply for all
Vital Signs and Graphic Trend reports printed.
To set up Vital Signs and Graphic Trend reports,
Select Main Setup, Reports, then Vital Signs Rep. or Graph Trend Rep..
1Select Trend Group and select the group you want to print on the report. The groups available
depend on your monitor's trend configuration.
2Select Period and select the period of time for which trend data should be printed on the report. If
Automatic Period is configured to On, all trend data for the current patient will be printed,
irrespective which trend period is selected.
3Select Interval (Vital Signs Reports only) and select the resolution of the trend data printed on the
report.
Setting Up Auto Reports
Auto Reports print automatically when a specified trigger occurs. There are two types of Auto Reports:
Scheduled Reports, which print at predefined intervals, and End Case Reports, which print when a
patient is discharged using the End Case function. An Auto Report can be both a Scheduled Report
and an End Case report.
To set up Auto Reports,
1Select Main Setup, Reports, then Auto Reports and select the Auto Report you want to set up (A,
B, C, or D).
2Select Report and assign a report type to the Auto Report.
3Select End Case Report and switch to On if you want the selected report to print automatically
when you select End Case to discharge a patient.
Switch End Case Report to Off if the report is a Scheduled Report only.
4Select Scheduled Rep. and toggle to On if you want the selected report to print at predefined
intervals, starting at a predefined time of day. The start time you set applies for every following day.
For example, if you set a start time of 07:00 and a repeat time of six hours, the first report will print
at 07:00 every day, the next at 13:00 and so on.
– To set the time of day at which you want the report to print every day: select Start Hour and
Start Minute and select the required time from the pop-up list
– To set the time interval in minutes between two scheduled reports: select Rep. Freq. (hrs) and
Rep. Freq. (min) and select the time interval from the pop-up list.
If you are setting up an end case report, these settings will be inactive ("grayed-out").
Switch Scheduled Rep. to Off if the report is an End Case Report only.
5Repeat the procedure for all Auto Reports you want to set up.
All Auto Reports or Scheduled Reports set to On print automatically at the predefined trigger.
19 Printing Patient Reports
234
Be aware that the monitor's memory for reports is limited. If the memory is full, Auto Reports cannot
be printed and the information may be lost.
Setting Up Individual Print Jobs
To adjust the appearance of individual print jobs, in the Reports menu,
Select Main Setup, Reports, then Setup Reports to enter the Setup Reports menu.
1Select Report and then select the report you want to set up.
2Select Report Type and then select the reports template you want the report selected in Step 2 to
use. The selection of templates listed depends on the report type selected.
Each template includes patient demographic data, and each Realtime Report also includes alarm
and INOP information. In addition, the templates include:
VisibleWaves: all waves currently visible, in the order they appear on the screen.
All Waves: all measured waves.
RT Waves: all currently measured realtime waves, according to the monitor's priority list.
Vital Signs: trend information in tabular form.
Graph Trend: trend information in graphic form.
ECG3X4, ECG6X2, ECG12X1, ECG4X2, ECG8X1,ECG12X1 (2P): ECG reports.
Alarm Limits: a list of all currently set alarm limits.
3Select Report Size to set the paper size to be used for the report: Unspecified to use the default
size for the template chosen, Universal, A4, Letter, LrgUniversal, A3, or Ledger. The list of
available sizes depends on the report type selected.
4Select Orientation to set the orientation of the report printout: Unspecified to use the default size
for the template chosen, Landscape or Portrait.
5Select Target Device and choose which printer the print job will be sent to: Unspecified to use
the default printer, or choose from the list of printer names defined at the Information Center or
in the monitor's Configuration Mode (for example, Remote 1 or Database).
Some settings may be inactive ("grayed-out") in this menu for reports that can only be started in a
special window.
Checking Printer Settings
The printer settings for your monitor are defined in Configuration Mode. The printer settings Paper
Size, Resolution, Color Support, and Duplex Option for the active printer are visible but inactive
("grayed-out") in the Setup Printers menu. When Print Database is selected as active printer only the
Paper Size setting will be shown.
• To enter the Setup Printers menu, in the Reports menu, select Setup Printers.
If you are using an IntelliVue XDS Application print service, you may see XDS printers in the Setup
Printers menu that have "Local" or "Remote" in their name. Their names and settings can only be
configured in the XDS Application. Refer to the IntelliVue XDS Application Installation and
Configuration Guide for full details about the configuration possibilities.
Printing a Test Report
A test report can be printed in Configuration mode, refer to the Service Guide for details.
19 Printing Patient Reports
235
Switching Printers On or Off for Reports
You can enable or disable printer status to switch individual printers on or off for report printouts.
1In the Setup Printers menu, select Printer and then select the name of the device you want to
switch on or off for Reports printing from the pop-up list.
2Select Printer Status to switch between the settings Enabled and Disabled. If you set this to
Disabled, no reports will be printed to the named printer.
If the monitor detects that no printer of a particular type is available, the Printer Status setting will
automatically be set to Disabled and "grayed out".
Local printers from the XDS Application print service are always enabled and cannot be disabled
here.
Dashed Lines on Reports
If a section of a wave on a report is drawn with dashed lines, this tells you that a setting that affects the
appearance of the wave on the screen was changed while the report was printing.
For example, if you change the wave scale while a report is printing, the wave scale and wave size are
changed immediately on the monitor screen and on the report. To indicate that the scale information
printed at the beginning of the report no longer matches the currently used scale, the wave will be
printed using dashed lines, starting from the moment the change took place.
Some examples of settings that cause dashed lines in reports if changed during printing are: Filter
mode, ECG lead placement, wave scale, measurement unit, paced/non-paced setting, and
measurement mode. Note that as ECG waves are drawn with a fixed gain on reports (either 10 mm/
mV or 20 mm/mV), changing the ECG wave scale will not cause dashed-line reports.
To avoid dashed lines on reports, wait 15 seconds after changing a setting before you trigger a report.
Unavailable Printer: Re-routing Reports
If you send a report to be printed on a printer that is not available, for example, because it has run out
of paper, this print job is suspended and stored in the monitor's memory.
If the target device of this print job was set to Unspecified, the monitor will periodically try to resend
the print job to the first printer listed in the Setup Printers menu under Printer that is set to Enabled
and that has paper of the correct size.
To allow the report to print, you must either solve the problem with the target printer, or re-route the
print job to another printer with paper of the correct size. To re-route a print job,
• Enable the new target printer by selecting it in the Setup Printers menu and toggling to Enabled.
As the monitor tries to send the report to the printers in the order they are listed, you must make
sure that all the printers above the new target printer are disabled.
If the target device of the print job was set to a specific printer, re-routing is not possible.
19 Printing Patient Reports
236
Checking Report Status and Printing Manually
A list of all print requests which are waiting, printing or stored can be viewed in the Reports Job List.
To view the list, in the Reports menu, select Reports Job List.
The following information is displayed for each print request:
• Report title
• Patient name (except for system reports such as the battery status report)
• Request date and time
• Report paper format
•Job status: Preparing, Printing, Waiting, In Database, In Companion, Retry, Cancelling, Error.
Individual reports can be deleted from the list with the Delete Report key, and all reports with the
Delete All Repts key.
CAUTION
The Reports Job List includes privacy information, in the form of the patient name with the related
report title and date. It is advisable to provide controlled access to this data to ensure confidentiality.
Printing Manually
Those jobs shown in black will be printed automatically when a matching printer is available. If the
Auto Print Dbs setting is Host Only or Never, some or all reports will not be printed automatically and
will be shown in gray. Any jobs shown in gray must be printed manually; to do this,
1In the Reports Job List, select the required report
2Select Print Report.
Selecting Print All Reps will send all reports to the printer.
19 Printing Patient Reports
237
Printer Status Messages
Printer Status Message Possible causes and suggested action
Print job queued for
<Printer Name>
The report has been placed in the queue for the named printer.
Print job can't
queue;resources?
Print job can't queue;queue
full
Print job can't queue;no
printer
The printer queue is full and the monitor cannot accept another
report request. Wait until some more reports have been printed, then
try again, OR
A report has been triggered that uses a paper size unavailable with the
target printer. Try another printer, if available, or change the paper
size of the print request.
Cancelling all print jobs Delete All Reps has been selected in the Reports menu, OR
The Operating Mode has been changed from Monitoring Mode to
Demonstration or Service Mode.
Cancelling the active print
job
The current report is being canceled as the result of a user request.
Deleted # print
jobs;discharge
When a patient is discharged, all queued reports are canceled except
those stored in the print database. "#" is the number of reports
canceled.
Deleted # print jobs;
hotstart
The monitor has restarted and all report requests have been canceled
except those stored in the print database. "#" is the number of reports
canceled.
Print failed;No report
configurd
A report has been triggered which has not been correctly set up. Enter
the setup menu for the report type to set up the report.
Printing on <Printer
Name>...
A report is in progress, or the monitor is waiting for the central printer
to accept the print job.
NoPrinter <Printer
Name>;job susp.
The chosen device is unavailable. Check that the printer is properly
connected and that paper is available. The requested report will start
printing when the printer becomes available.
Print database full->job
suspnd.
The requested report does not fit into the print database. You can
select another printer to print the report (see “Unavailable Printer: Re-
routing Reports” on page 235). Alternatively you can delete another
report from the Reports Job List (using the Delete Report key) to
create space for your report.
Job <Printer Name> failed;
no data
Job <Printer Name> fail;no
printer
Job <Printer Name>
fail;data error
A report cannot be started on the requested printer.
One of three reasons is shown in the status message:
• data unavailable - the connected X2 or MP5 has been removed
before the data for the report was transferred.
• printer unavailable - make sure the printer is plugged in, switched
on, and has paper loaded.
• data requisition error - an internal error has caused data required
for the report to be unavailable, try starting the report again.
Print job on <Printer
Name> done
The report has been printed.
19 Printing Patient Reports
238
Sample Report Printouts
Each report header contains the patient's bed label, last name and first name, middle name (if there is
enough space) the patient ID, the date and time, and the name of the report. The report footer
contains the hospital label and page number, and the last page contains a note to mark the report end.
The monitor may be configured to leave a space on the top left or right of the report printout to enable
you to stick a patient address label on it. This setting is called the Addressograph and it can only be
changed in the monitor's Configuration Mode.
Alarm Limits Report
1Measurement labels, with alarms off symbol where alarms are switched off
2Graphic view of current alarm limits in relation to currently monitored measurement value
Realtime Report
1Patient demographic information, time stamp
2Active Alarms and INOPs, followed by vital signs
3Measurement waves section
19 Printing Patient Reports
239
ECG Reports
1Patient information
2Numeric block
3Wave area
Below the header on ECG Reports, the numeric block shows the current HR, PVC, and ST values.
The wave area shows the printed waves for all available ECG leads. A 1 mV calibration bar is printed
at the beginning of each wave. With the 3X4, 6X2, and 2X4 formats, a rhythm stripe prints a longer
section of the ECG wave from the primary ECG lead for ECG rhythm evaluation. The ECG signal
bandwidth, the patient's paced status, the ECG gain, and the print speed are printed at the bottom of
the wave area. Pace pulse marks are automatically printed beside the wave for paced patients. Beat
labels can be set to print on the rhythm stripe. The 12X1 (2P) format prints the report over two pages.
ECG Report type Available Formats Available Paper Sizes
12-Lead ECG 3X4 landscape A4, letter, A3, ledger
6X2 landscape A4, letter, A3, ledger
12X1 portrait A4 and letter only
12X1 landscape A4, letter, A3, ledger
12X1 (2P) landscape A4, letter (2 pages)
Multi-lead ECG 2X4 landscape A4, letter, A3, ledger
8X1 portrait A4 and letter only
8X1 landscape A4, letter, A3, ledger
19 Printing Patient Reports
240
12-Lead ECG Report
1Patient data
2Analysis data from the Information Center (PIIC iX only)
312-Lead wave area
4Data related to the wave presentation
5ST Map with related ST numerics (optional)
6Administrative data - including optional custom text fields
7Hospital ID data - Institution, facility and department, if configured
Other Reports
See the sections on Trends for other example reports.
20
241
20Care and Cleaning
Use only the Philips-approved substances and methods listed in this chapter to clean or disinfect your
equipment. Warranty does not cover damage caused by using unapproved substances or methods.
Philips makes no claims regarding the efficacy of the listed chemicals or methods as a means for
controlling infection. Consult your hospital's Infection Control Officer or Epidemiologist. For
comprehensive details on cleaning agents and their efficacy refer to "Guidelines for Prevention of
Transmission of Human Immunodeficiency Virus and Hepatitis B Virus to Health Care and Public-
Safety Workers" issued by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service,
Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Georgia, February 1989. See also any local policies that apply
within your hospital, and country.
General Points
Keep your monitor, cables and accessories free of dust and dirt.
After cleaning and disinfection, check the equipment carefully. Do not use if you see signs of
deterioration or damage. If you need to return any equipment to Philips, decontaminate it first.
Observe the following general precautions:
• Always dilute according to the manufacturer's instructions or use lowest possible concentration.
• Do not allow liquid to enter the case.
• Do not immerse any part of the equipment or any accessories in liquid.
• Do not pour liquid onto the system.
• Never use abrasive material (such as steel wool or silver polish).
• Never use bleach.
WARNING
If you spill liquid on the equipment, battery, or accessories, or they are accidentally immersed in liquid,
contact your service personnel or Philips service engineer. Do not operate the equipment before it has
been tested and approved for further use.
20 Care and Cleaning
242
Cleaning the Monitor
Clean with a lint-free cloth, moistened with warm water (40°C/104°F maximum) and soap, a diluted
non-caustic detergent, tenside, ammonia- or alcohol-based cleaning agent. Do not use strong solvents
such as acetone or trichloroethylene.
Take extra care when cleaning the screen of the monitor because it is more sensitive to rough cleaning
methods than the housing. Do not permit any liquid to enter the monitor case and avoid pouring it on
the monitor while cleaning. Do not allow water or cleaning solution to enter the measurement
connectors. Wipe around, not over, connector sockets.
CAUTION
To clean the touch-enabled display, disable the touch operation by switching off the monitor during
the cleaning procedure, or by pressing and holding the Main Screen key for two seconds. Press the
Main Screen key again to re-enable touch operation.
Recommended cleaning agents are:
Disinfecting the Monitor
CAUTION
Solutions: Do not mix disinfecting solutions (such as bleach and ammonia) as hazardous gases may
result.
Clean equipment before disinfecting. Recommended types of disinfecting agents are:
Tensides (dishwasher detergents) Edisonite Schnellreiniger®, Alconox®
Ammonias Dilution of Ammonia <3%, Window cleaner
Alcohol Ethanol 70%, Isopropanol 70%, Window cleaner
Product Name Product Type Ingredients
Isopropanol liquid Isopropanol 80%
Bacillol® AF liquid, spray 100 g concentrate contains:
Propan-1-ol 45.0 g;
Propan-2-ol 25.0 g;
Ethanol 4.7 g
Bacillol® 25 liquid Ethanol 100 mg/g
Propan-2-ol (= 2-Propanol) 90 mg/g; Propan-1-ol (= 1-
Propanol) 60 mg/g
Meliseptol®spray 50% 1-Propanol
Accel TB RTU liquid 0.5% accelerated hydrogen peroxide
Oxivir® Tb Cleaner Disinfectant spray 0.5% accelerated hydrogen peroxide
Oxivir® Tb Wipes wipes 0.5% accelerated hydrogen peroxide
20 Care and Cleaning
243
Sterilizing the Monitor
Sterilization is not allowed for this monitor, related products, accessories or supplies unless otherwise
indicated in the Instructions for Use that accompany the accessories and supplies.
Cleaning, Sterilizing and Disinfecting Monitoring
Accessories
To clean, disinfect and sterilize reusable transducers, sensors, cables, leads, and so forth, refer to the
instructions delivered with the accessory.
Cleaning Batteries and the Battery Compartment
Wipe with a lint-free cloth, moistened with warm water (40°C/104°F maximum) and soap. Do not use
strong solvents. Do not soak the battery.
Carpe DiemTM/MC Tb
Ready-to-Use General Virucide,
Bactericide, Tuberculocide,
Fungicide, Sanitizer
spray 0.5% accelerated hydrogen peroxide
Carpe DiemTM/MC Tb Wipes wipes 0.5% accelerated hydrogen peroxide
Super Sani-Cloth
Germicidal Disposable Wipes
wipes isopropanol 55%
quaternary ammonium chlorides 0.5%
SANI-CLOTH® PLUS
Germicidal Disposable Wipes
wipes isopropanol 15%
quaternary ammonium chlorides 0.25%
SANI-CLOTH® HB Germicidal
Germicidal Disposable Wipes
wipes isopropanol < 0.15%
quaternary ammonium chlorides 0.14%
Product Name Product Type Ingredients
20 Care and Cleaning
244
21
245
21Using Batteries
The Lithium Ion batteries used in your monitor store a large amount of energy in a small package. This
allows reliable battery-operated monitoring but also requires care in use and handling of the batteries.
Follow the instructions in this chapter and refer for further details to the Application Note Lithium Ion
Battery Management and Safety Practices included on your Documentation DVD.
When monitoring a patient, one Philips M4607A rechargeable Lithium Ion battery must always be
inserted into the battery compartment on the right side of the monitor. This applies even when you are
running the monitor from the external power supply.
The battery seals the battery compartment, preventing the ingress of fluids or foreign bodies. A severe
yellow INOP (!! Insert Battery) will be issued if the monitor is connected to AC mains without a
battery fully inserted in the battery compartment. This INOP will persist until a battery is inserted.
To use the monitor with battery power, disconnect the external power supply, by removing the MSL
cable from the monitor.
You can switch between battery-powered and mains-powered (AC) operation without interrupting
monitoring.
The battery recharges automatically when the monitor is connected to the external power supply
(M8023A).
1Battery compartment
21 Using Batteries
246
Battery Power Indicators
The battery LED and battery status information on the Main Screen, in combination with INOP
messages and prompts, help you keep track of the battery power status. The indicators always show
the remaining capacity in relation to the battery's actual maximum capacity, which may lessen as the
battery ages. You can see the actual capacity in the Battery Status window.
Battery LED
The battery LED on the front panel of the monitor is indicated by a battery symbol.
The battery LED is off during regular monitoring, when none of the following situations is present:
Battery Status on the Main Screen
Battery status information can be configured to display permanently on all Screens. It shows the status
of the battery, with the battery power remaining and, when the battery is not charging, an estimate of
the monitoring time this represents.
Battery power gauge:
This shows the remaining battery power. It is divided into sections, each representing 20% of the total
power. If three sections are filled, as in this example, this indicates that 60% battery power remains. If
no battery is detected, a blank battery gauge marked with a flashing red X is displayed. If no data is
available from the battery, a question mark is shown in the gauge. If the monitor is powered from the
1Battery LED
Battery LED Colors If the monitor is connected to
the external power supply
(M8023A), this means
If the monitor is running on
battery power, this means
Yellow battery charging
Red, flashing less than 10 minutes power
remaining
Red, flashes
intermittently
battery or charger malfunction battery malfunction
21 Using Batteries
247
Battery Extension, the battery gauge shows the remaining power for the battery in the Battery
Extension.
Battery status/malfunction indicator: Normal battery function is indicated by the battery power
gauge, together with the remaining operating time, on the Main Screen. However, if there are problems
or changes in the status of the battery this is indicated by the battery status/malfunction indicator on
the Main Screen. This consists of a blank battery gauge containing a symbol. If the symbol is red, this
indicates a critical situation. You can check the specific cause of the problem by looking at the
symbol(s) displayed in the Battery Status window (see “Battery Status Window” on page 247).
Monitoring Time Available: While the monitor is running on battery power, a time is displayed
below the battery power gauge. No time is displayed when the monitor is running on external power.
This is the estimated monitoring time available with the current battery power. Note that this time
fluctuates depending on the system load (the display brightness and how many measurements you
carry out). If the remaining operating time is 00:00, the monitor shuts down automatically.
Battery Status Window
To access the Battery Status window and its associated pop-up keys, select the battery status
information on the Screen, or select Main Setup then select Battery.
If you are using a Battery Extension, status information for both batteries will be shown in the Battery
Status window. If the battery in the Battery Extension is completely discharged, there may be no status
information available for it.
Capacity, remaining tells you how much power is left in the battery.
Capacity, fullCharge tells you how much power the battery can hold when fully charged.
Battery status indicator Battery malfunction indicator
Alternates with the battery gauge on
the Main Screen.
Check in the Battery Status window
to see which status symbol is displayed
for which battery to identify the cause.
The red ! flashes. Critical
battery situation or
malfunction. Check in the
Battery Status window to
see which malfunction
indicator is displayed, or refer
to the INOP, to identify the
cause.
Indicator for missing battery
(flashing red X). An !! Insert
Battery INOP is issued when
the battery compartment is
empty, and the monitor is
connected to external power.
This INOP is suppressed for
15 seconds while the monitor is
connected to external power,
allowing you sufficient time to
insert new battery. After
silencing, the INOP reappears
every 10 seconds until a battery
is inserted.
21 Using Batteries
248
TimeToEmpty tells you approximately how long you can continue to use the monitor with this battery.
Note that this time fluctuates depending on the system load (the display brightness and how many
measurements you carry out).
TimeToFull is shown in place of TimeToEmpty if the monitor is connected to mains power via a host
monitor or the M8023A external power supply, and tells you how much time is left until the battery is
charged to 90%. You can use the 865432 Smart Battery Conditioner (previously M8043A) to charge
the batteries externally.
Battery status/malfunction symbols: If a problem is detected with the battery, an INOP may be
issued, and the following symbols are displayed in the Battery Status window, where they may be
accompanied by a battery status message providing more details. Messages appear in the line where
TimeToFull/TimeToEmpty is shown.
Symbols indicating critical situations are colored red.
Printing Battery Reports
To print the information in the Battery Status window on a connected printer,
1Select the battery status information on the Screen to open the Battery Status window
2Select the Print Status pop-up key.
Checking Battery Charge
To check the charge status of a battery, refer to the battery power gauge on the screen or open the
Battery Status window.
When Battery Lifetime is Expired
When the battery is aged, either after 3 years from manufacturing date or after 500 charge/discharge
cycles, it is recommended to replace the battery. To remind you of this, a message will appear in the
Battery Status window. This message will only be displayed at the appropriate time when the date and
time on the monitor is correct.
Battery status symbols Battery malfunction symbols
battery is empty (red) incompatible battery
battery not charging as the temperature is
above or below the specified range
(red) battery malfunction
battery requires maintenance (red) battery has no power left
charging stopped to protect the battery (red) battery temperature too high
21 Using Batteries
249
Replacing a Battery
To replace the battery,
1Press the battery eject button (1). This releases the battery.
The INOP !! Insert Battery is suppressed for 15 seconds, allowing you sufficient time to insert a
new battery.
2Remove the battery from the compartment.
3Slide the new battery into position with the contacts facing downwards. It should 'click' into
position when it is fully inserted.
WARNING
Do not insert your fingers or any objects into the open battery compartment.
21 Using Batteries
250
Replacing the Battery in the Battery Extension
To replace the battery,
1Push the battery cover downwards, so that it opens.
2Remove the battery from the compartment.
3Slide the new battery firmly into position with the label facing downwards.
4Close the battery cover and push it upwards, so that it remains closed.
Optimizing Battery Performance
The performance of rechargeable batteries may deteriorate over time. Battery maintenance as
recommended here can help to slow down this process.
21 Using Batteries
251
Display Brightness Setting
In the Main Setup menu, select User Interface, Brightness, then Optimum. This selects a level of
brightness suitable for most monitoring locations that uses less battery power than brighter settings.
Ensure that the current level of brightness is suitable for your monitoring location.
Charging a Battery
A battery can be charged in a monitor during monitoring. You can also use the 865432 Smart Battery
Conditioner (previously M8043A) to charge batteries.
1Insert the battery into a monitor connected to the external power supply (M8023A).
2Charge the battery until it is full, the battery LED goes out, and the battery power gauge is filled.
In certain situations, internal temperature conditions may mean that the battery will not charge. This is
sometimes necessary to protect the battery from damage, and does not indicate a malfunction. In this
case you must use the 865432 Smart Battery Conditioner (previously M8043A Smart Battery
Conditioner) to charge the battery.
Conditioning a Battery
You must condition a battery when its "battery requires maintenance" symbol shows on the Screen.
Do not interrupt the charge or discharge cycle during conditioning. You can condition a battery in a
monitor.
CAUTION
Do not use a monitor that is being used to condition batteries to monitor patients. The monitor
switches off automatically when there is no battery power left.
It is, however, preferable to use the 865432 Smart Battery Conditioner (previously M8043A) for
external battery conditioning. The Smart Battery Conditioner automatically performs the correct
charge or conditioning process and evaluates the capacity when fully charged. For details please see the
Instructions for Use for the Smart Battery Conditioner. Do not use any other battery chargers or
conditioners.
To condition a battery using a monitor,
1Insert the battery into a monitor connected to the external power supply (M8023A) that is
connected to mains power.
2Switch the monitor power off.
3Charge the battery until it is completely full. Open the Battery Status window.
Check that the Batt Fully Charged message is displayed.
4Disconnect the monitor from mains power and let the monitor run until there is no battery power
left and the monitor switches itself off.
5Reconnect the monitor to mains power and charge the battery until it is full for use or charge to
50% for storage.
To condition the battery from a Battery Extension, use the 865432 Smart Battery Conditioner.
21 Using Batteries
252
Storing a Battery
A battery should not remain inside the monitor or Battery Extension if it is not used for a longer
period of time. Batteries should be charged to a maximum of 50% for storage.
NOTE
The battery will discharge over time if it is stored inside the monitor or Battery Extension when not
connected to AC power via the external power supply (M8023A). The reported values for "remaining
capacity" and "runtime" will become less accurate when the battery is stored in this way for a longer
period of time (that is, several weeks).
Disposing of Used Batteries
Dispose of used batteries promptly and in an environmentally-responsible manner. Discharge the
batteries and insulate the terminals with tape before disposal. Do not dispose of the battery in normal
waste containers. Consult your hospital administrator to find out about local arrangements.
Battery Safety Information
WARNING
• Use only Philips batteries specified in the chapter on “Accessories”. Use of a different battery may
present a risk of fire or explosion.
• Do not open batteries, heat above 60°C (140°F), incinerate batteries, or cause them to short
circuit. They may ignite, explode, leak or heat up, causing personal injury.
• If battery leakage should occur, use caution in removing the battery. Avoid contact with skin. Refer
to qualified service personnel.
• Do not expose batteries to liquids.
• Do not crush, drop or puncture batteries - mechanical abuse can lead to internal damage and
internal short circuits which may not be visible externally.
• If a battery has been dropped or banged against a hard surface, whether damage is visible
externally or not:
– discontinue use
– dispose of the battery in accordance with the disposal instructions above.
• Keep batteries out of the reach of children
• Keep batteries in their original package until you are ready to use them.
22
253
22Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Schedule: Failure on the part of the responsible individual hospital or institution employing the use of
this equipment to implement a satisfactory maintenance schedule may cause undue equipment failure
and possible health hazards.
Contact: If you discover a problem with any of the equipment, contact your service personnel, Philips,
or your authorized supplier.
Inspecting the Equipment and Accessories
You should perform a visual inspection before every use, and in accordance with your hospital's policy.
With the monitor switched off:
1Examine unit exteriors for cleanliness and general physical condition. Make sure that the housings
are not cracked or broken, that everything is present, that there are no spilled liquids and that there
are no signs of abuse.
2Inspect all accessories (cables, transducers, sensors and so forth). If any show signs of damage, do
not use.
3Switch the monitor on and make sure the backlight is bright enough. Check that screen is at its full
brightness. If the brightness is not adequate, contact your service personnel or your supplier.
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard: Do not open the monitor or measurement device. Contact with exposed
electrical components may cause electrical shock. Always turn off and remove power before cleaning
the sensor, monitor or measurement device. Do not use a damaged sensor or one with exposed
electrical contacts. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
22 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
254
Inspecting the Cables and Cords
1Examine all system cables, the power plug and cord for damage. Make sure that the prongs of the
plug do not move in the casing. If damaged, replace it with an appropriate Philips power cord.
2Inspect the patient cables, leads and their strain reliefs for general condition. Make sure there are
no breaks in the insulation. Make sure that the connectors are properly engaged at each end to
prevent rotation or other strain.
3Apply the transducer or electrodes to the patient, and with the monitor switched on, flex the
patient cables near each end to make sure that there are no intermittent faults.
Maintenance Task and Test Schedule
The following tasks are for Philips-qualified service professionals only. All maintenance tasks and
performance tests are documented in detail in the service documentation supplied on the monitor
documentation DVD.
Ensure that these tasks are carried out as indicated by the monitor's maintenance schedule, or as
specified by local laws. Contact a Philips-qualified service provider if your monitor needs a safety or
performance test. Clean and disinfect equipment to decontaminate it before testing or maintaining it.
Troubleshooting
If you suspect a problem with an individual measurement, read the Instructions for Use and double-
check that you have set up the measurement correctly.
Maintenance and Test Schedule Frequency
Monitor Tests
Safety checks. Selected tests on the
basis of IEC 60601-1
At least once every two years, or as needed, after any repairs
where the power supply is removed or replaced, or if the
monitor has been dropped.
Monitor Maintenance
Check ECG synchronization of the
monitor and defibrillator (only if
hospital protocol requires use of
monitor during defibrillation)
At least once every two years, or as needed.
Measurement Tests
Performance assurance for all
measurements not listed below.
At least once every two years, or if you suspect the
measurement values are incorrect.
Measurement Maintenance
NBP calibration At least once every two years, or as specified by local laws.
Microstream CO2 calibration and
performance test
At least once a year or after 4000 operating hours.
Mainstream and sidestream CO2
calibration check
At least once a year, or if you suspect the measurement
values are incorrect.
Battery Maintenance
Battery See the section on Maintaining Batteries
22 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
255
If you suspect an intermittent, system-wide problem call your service personnel. You may be asked for
information from the status log. To view the status log,
In the Main Setup menu, select Revisions.
1Select Status Log.
Disposing of the Monitor
WARNING
To avoid contaminating or infecting personnel, the environment or other equipment, make sure you
disinfect and decontaminate the monitor appropriately before disposing of it in accordance with your
country's laws for equipment containing electrical and electronic parts. For disposal of parts and
accessories such as thermometers, where not otherwise specified, follow local regulations regarding
disposal of hospital waste.
You can disassemble the monitor as described in the Service Guide.
You will find detailed disposal information on the following web page:
http://www.healthcare.philips.com/main/about/Sustainability/Recycling/pm.wpd
The Recycling Passports located there contain information on the material content of the equipment,
including potentially dangerous materials which must be removed before recycling (for example,
batteries and parts containing mercury or magnesium).
Do not dispose of waste electrical and electronic equipment as unsorted municipal waste. Collect it
separately, so that it can be safely and properly reused, treated, recycled, or recovered.
Disposing of Empty Calibration Gas Cylinders
1Empty the cylinder completely by pushing in the pin of the regulator valve or by pulling out the
pin of the fill valve using a tire valve stem wrench or a pair of needle nose pliers.
2When the cylinder is empty, either remove the valve stem from the fill (or regulator) hole, or drill a
hole in the cylinder.
3Write "Empty" on the cylinder and dispose of it appropriately for scrap metal.
WARNING
Ensure that the cylinder is completely empty before trying to remove the valve stem or drill a hole in
the cylinder.
22 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
256
23
257
23Accessories
This chapter lists Philips-approved accessories for use with patient monitors as described in this
document. You can order parts and accessories from Philips supplies at www.medical.philips.com or
consult your local Philips representative for details.
WARNING
Reuse: Never reuse disposable transducers, sensors, accessories and so forth that are intended for
single use, or single patient use only. Reuse may compromise device functionality and system
performance and cause a potential hazard.
Philips' approval: Use only Philips-approved accessories. Using non-Philips-approved accessories
may compromise device functionality and system performance and cause a potential hazard.
Packaging: Do not use a sterilized accessory if its packaging is damaged.
ECG/Resp Accessories
This symbol indicates that the cables and accessories are designed to have special protection
against electric shocks (particularly regarding allowable leakage currents), and are defibrillator proof.
The following cables may not all be available in all countries. Please check availability with your local
Philips supplier.
Recommended Cables
Trunk Cables
For use with: Part No. Length
3-Electrode Cable Set M1669A 2.7 m
3-Electrode Cable Set, OR 989803170171 2.7 m
5-Electrode Cable Set M1668A 2.7 m
23 Accessories
258
3-Electrode Cable Sets
Single Patient 3-Electrode Cable Sets
5-Electrode Cable Sets
Single Patient 5-Electrode Cable Sets
5-Electrode Cable Set, OR 989803170181 2.7 m
6-Electrode Cable Set M1667A 2.7 m
10-Electrode Cable set
(5+5)
M1663A 2.7 m
10-Electrode Cable set
(6+4)
M1665A 2.7 m
For use with: Part No. Length
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
OR Grabber shielded 1.0 m M1675A M1678A
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0 m M1671A M1672A
ICU snap shielded 1.0 m M1673A M1674A
ICU Clip non-shielded 0.45 m M1622A --
ICU Clip non-shielded 0.7 m M1624A M1626A
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0 m 989803173121 989803174201
ICU Grabber shielded 0.84 m 989803173141 -
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
OR Grabber shielded 1.0 m/1.6 m M1973A M1974A
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0 m/1.6 m M1968A M1971A
ICU Snap shielded 1.0 m/1.6 m M1644A M1645A
ICU Miniclip non-shielded 0.7 m/1.3 m M1647A M1648A
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0 m 989803173131 989803174211
ICU Grabber shielded 0.85 m 989803173151 -
23 Accessories
259
6-Electrode Cable Sets
10-Electrode (5+5) Cable Sets
10-Electrode (6+4) Cable Sets
One-piece Cables
Radio-translucent Cables
Pack of five single wires, radio-translucent, 0.9 m, M1649A
Set Combiners and Organizers
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
OR Grabber 1.0 m/1.6 m M1684A M1685A
ICU Grabber 1.0 m/1.6 m M1680A M1681A
ICU Snap 1.0 m/1.6 m M1682A M1683A
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
ICU Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0 m M1976A M1978A
ICU Snap, chest, shielded 1.0 m M1602A M1604A
OR Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0 m M1979A M1984A
For Limb Leads see 5-electrode cable sets
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
ICU Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0 m M1532A M1533A
ICU Snap, chest, shielded 1.0 m M1537A M1538A
OR Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0 m M1557A M1558A
For Limb Leads see 6-electrode cable sets
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
3-lead Grabber, ICU 1.0 m 989803143181 989803143171
5-lead Grabber, ICU 1.0 m 989803143201 989803143191
Description Part No.
Set combiner 3-electrode M1501A
5-electrode M1502A
Set organizer for shielded leadsets - grabber and snap 3-electrode M1503A
4-electrode M1664A
5-electrode M1504A
6-electrode M1679A
23 Accessories
260
Supported Cables
Trunk Cables
3-Electrode Cable Sets
5-Electrode Cable Sets
3-Electrode One Piece Cables
Set organizer for non-shielded lead sets - miniclip 3-electrode M1636A
5-electrode M1638A
Bedsheet clip M1509A
Replacement red cover for trunk cable (for 5-electrode cable sets) 989808148861
Description Part No.
Length 3-Electrode Cable Set 5-Electrode Cable Set
AAMI Part No. IEC Part No. AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
0.9 m M1540C M1550C M1560C M1570C
2.7 m M1500A M1510A M1520A M1530A
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
OR 1.0 m M1601A M1611A
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0 m M1603A M1613A
ICU snap shielded 1.0 m M1605A M1615A
ICU Clip non-shielded 0.45 m M1608A M1618A
ICU Clip non-shielded 0.7 m M1609A M1619A
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
OR Grabber shielded 1.0 m/1.6 m M1621A M1631A
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0 m/1.6 m M1623A M1633A
ICU Snap shielded 1.0 m/1.6 m M1625A M1635A
ICU Clip non-shielded 0.7 m/1.3 m M1629A M1639A
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
OR Grabber 1.9 m M1970A M1980A
ICU Snap 1.9 m M1972A M1981A
23 Accessories
261
Invasive Pressure Accessories
These transducers and accessories are designed to have special protection against electric
shocks (particularly regarding allowable leakage currents), and are defibrillator proof.
5-Electrode One Piece Cables
Set Combiners and Organizers
Transducer, accessories, sensor kits Part No
Reusable pressure transducer 5 mV/.V/mmHg sensitivity CPJ840J6
Sterile disposable pressure domes for CPJ840J6 (pack of 50) CPJ84022
Transducer holder for CPJ840J6 (pack of 4) CPJ84046
IV pole mount for CPJ840J6 CPJ84447
Single channel disposable sensor kit (20) - (EU/EFTA only) M1567A
Dual channel disposable sensor kit (20) (EU/EFTA only) M1568A
Transducer holder for M1567/8A (EU/EFTA only) M2271A
IV pole mount for M1567/8A (EU/EFTA only) M2272C
Adapter cable for disposable sensor kit 3,0m for M1567/8A M1634A
Monitoring Line Set CPJ84026
Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
OR Grabber 2.5 m M1975A M1985A
ICU Snap 2.5 m M1977A M1986A
Description Part No.
Set combiner 3-electrode M1501A
5-electrode M1502A
Set organizer Shielded 3-electrode M1503A
Shielded 5-electrode M1504A
Bedsheet clip M1509A
23 Accessories
262
NBP Accessories
These cuffs and tubings are designed to have special protection against electric shocks
(particularly regarding allowable leakage currents), and are defibrillator proof. You can use them during
electrosurgery.
Adult/Pediatric Reusable Comfort Cuffs
Adult/Pediatric Reusable Comfort Cuff Kits
Adult/Pediatric Reusable EasyCare Cuffs
Patient Category Limb Circumference Part No. Tubing
Adult (Thigh) 42 to 54 cm M1576A M1598B (1.5 m)
or
M1599B (3 m)
Large Adult 34 to 43 cm M1575A
Adult 27 to 35 cm M1574A
Small Adult 20.5 to 28 cm M1573A
Pediatric 14 to 21.5 cm M1572A
Infant 10 to 15 cm M1571A
Cuff Kits Part No.
Infant, pediatric, small adult, adult M1577A
Small adult, adult, large adult, thigh M1578A
Infant, pediatric, small adult, adult, large adult, thigh M1579A
Patient Category Limb Circumference Part No.
(Pack of five)
Tubing
Adult Thigh 44 - 56 cm M4559B (M4559B5) M1598B (1.5 m)
or
M1599B (3 m)
Large Adult X-Long 35 - 45 cm M4558B (M4558B5)
Large Adult 35 - 45 cm M4557B (M4557B5)
Adult X-Long 27.5 - 36 cm M4556B (M4556B5)
Adult 27.5 - 36 cm M4555B (M4555B5)
Small Adult 20.5 - 28.5 cm M4554B (M4554B5)
Pediatric 14 - 21.5 cm M4553B (M4553B5)
Infant 10 - 15 cm M4552B (M4552B5)
23 Accessories
263
Adult/Pediatric Single Patient, Soft Cuffs
Neonatal/Infant Single Patient Cuffs
Single Patient Cuff Kits
IntelliVue CL NBP Pod Accessories
Patient Category Limb Circumference Part No. Tubing
Adult (Thigh) 44 - 56 cm M4579B M1598B (1.5 m)
or
M1599B (3 m)
Large Adult X-Long 35 - 45 cm M4578B
Large Adult 35 - 45 cm M4577B
Adult X-Long 27.5 - 36 cm M4576B
Adult 27.5 - 36 cm M4575B
Small Adult 20.5 - 28.5 cm M4574B
Pediatric 14.0 - 21.5 cm M4573B
Infant 10 - 15 cm M4572B
Cuffs Limb Circumference Part No.
A - Luer connector
B - ISO 80369-1 compliant
connector
Tubing
Size 1 3.1 to 5.7 cm M1866A/B For A-version cuffs:
M1596B (1.5 m) or M1597B
(3 m)
For B-version cuffs:
M1596C (1.5 m) or M1597C
(3 m)
Size 2 4.3 to 8.0 cm M1868A/B
Size 3 5.8 to 10.9 cm M1870A/B
Size 4 7.1 to 13.1 cm M1872A/B
Size 5 (Infant) 10 to 15 cm M1873B
Cuff Kits Part No.
Neonatal (10 x M1866A, 10 x M1868A, 10 x M1872A and 20 x M1870A) M1820-60020
Order Number Description Limb
Circumference
Range
Bladder Width Contents
989803163171 Mobile CL Reusable Small
Adult Cuff
21 - 27 cm 10.5 cm 1 cuff
989803163191 Mobile CL Reusable Adult Cuff 26.0 - 34.5 cm 13.0 cm 1 cuff
989803163211 Mobile CL Reusable Large
Adult Cuff
33.5 - 45.0 cm 16.0 cm 1 cuff
989803163181 Mobile CL Single-Patient Small
Adult Cuff
21 - 27 cm 10.5 cm 20 cuffs
23 Accessories
264
SpO2 Accessories
Some Nellcor sensors contain natural rubber latex which may cause allergic reactions. See the
Instructions for Use supplied with the sensors for more information.
M1901B, M1902B, M1903B and M1904B disposable sensors are not available in USA from Philips.
Purchase Nellcor sensors and adapter cables directly from Nellcor/Covidien.
Do not use more than one extension cable with any sensors or adapter cables. Do not use an extension
cable with:
• Masimo adapter cables,
• Philips reusable sensors or adapter cables with part numbers ending in -L (indicates "Long"
version) or with a cable longer than 2 m.
All listed sensors operate without risk of exceeding 41°C on the skin, if the initial skin temperature
does not exceed 35°C.
Make sure that you use only the accessories that are specified for use with this device, otherwise patient
injury can result.
989803163201 Mobile CL Single-Patient Adult
Cuff
26.0 - 34.5 cm 13.0 cm 20 cuffs
989803163221 Mobile CL Single-Patient Large
Adult Cuff
33.5 - 45.0 cm 16.0 cm 20 cuffs
989803163251 Mobile CL NBP Cradle Kit - - 20 cradles
989803163131 Mobile CL Extension Air Hose,
1.0 m
- - 1 extension air hose
989803163261 Mobile CL NBP Battery Kit - - 1 Battery
1 disassembly tool
1 front housing
989803137831 Telemetry Pouch with window - - 50 pouches
989803140371 Telemetry Pouch with window - - 4 boxes of 50
pouches
989803101971
(9300-0768-050)
White Telemetry Pouch with
Snaps; box of 50.
- - 50 pouches
989803101981
(9300-0768-200)
White Telemetry Pouch with
Snaps; 4 boxes of 50.
- - 4 boxes of 50
pouches
Order Number Description Limb
Circumference
Range
Bladder Width Contents
23 Accessories
265
Product Number Description Comments
Philips reusable sensors.
M1191A/B Adult sensor (2m cable), for patients over 50 kg. Any finger,
except thumb.
No adapter cable required.
M1191AL/BL M1191A/B with longer cable (3 m)
M1192A Small adult, pediatric sensor (1.5 m cable) for patients between
15 kg and 50 kg. Any finger except thumb.
M1193A Neonatal sensor (1.5 m cable) for patients between 1kg and 4 kg.
Hand or foot.
M1194A Ear sensor (1.5 m cable) for patients more than 40 kg.
M1195A Infant sensor (1.5 m cable) for patients between 4 kg and 15 kg.
Any finger except thumb.
M1196A Adult clip sensor (3 m cable) for patients over 40 kg. Any finger
except thumb.
M1191T Adult sensor (0.45 m cable), for patients over 50 kg. Any finger,
except thumb.
Requires M1943 (1 m) or
M1943AL (3 m) adapter
cable.
M1192T Small adult, pediatric sensor (0.45 m cable) for patients between
15 kg and 50 kg. Any finger except thumb.
M1193T Neonatal sensor (0.9 m cable) for patients between 1 kg and 4 kg.
Hand or foot.
M1196T Adult clip sensor (0.9 m cable) for patients over 40 kg. Any finger
except thumb.
Philips disposable sensors. Not available in the USA and Canada.
M1904B Identical to OxiMax MAX-A. Use adapter cable M1943A or
M1943AL.
M1903B Identical to OxiMax MAX-P.
M1902B Identical to OxiMax MAX-I.
M1901B Identical to OxiMax MAX-N.
Philips disposable sensors. Available worldwide.
M1131A Adult/Pediatric finger sensor, 0.45 m cable (patient size > 20 kg). Use adapter cable M1943A or
M1943AL.
M1132A Infant finger or toe sensor, 0.9m cable (patient size 3 - 10 kg).
M1133A Adult/Infant/Neonatal, 0.9 m cable
Foot or hand for neonates < 3 kg.
Big toe or thumb for patients between 10 kg and 20 kg.
Any finger except thumb for patients > 40 kg.
M1134A Adhesive-free, Adult/Infant/Neonatal, 0.9 m cable.
Foot or hand for neonates < 3 kg.
Big toe or thumb for patients between 10 kg and 20 kg.
Any finger except thumb for patients > 40 kg.
23 Accessories
266
NELLCOR disposable sensors (must be ordered from Nellcor)
OxiMax MAX-A Adult finger sensor (patient size > 30 kg). Use adapter cable M1943A or
M1943AL.
OxiMax
MAX-AL
OxiMax MAX-A with long cable.
OxiMax MAX-P Pediatric foot/hand sensor (patient size 10-50 kg).
OxiMax MAX-I Infant foot/hand sensor (patient size 3-20 kg).
OxiMax MAX-N Adult finger or neonatal foot/hand sensor (patient size > 40 kg
or < 3 kg).
Oxisensor II D-25 Adult sensor (patient size > 30 kg). Use adapter cable M1943A or
M1943AL.
Oxisensor II D-20 Pediatric sensor (patient size 10-50 kg).
Oxisensor II I-20 Infant sensor (patient size 3-20 kg).
Oxisensor II N-25 Neonatal sensor (patient size < 3 kg or > 40 kg).
OxiCliq A See OxiMax MAX-A. Use adapter cable M1943A or
M1943AL together with OC-
3 adapter cable.
OxiCliq P See OxiMax MAX-P.
OxiCliq I See OxiMax MAX-I.
OxiCliq N See OxiMax MAX-N.
Extension / Adapter Cables for Philips and Nellcor Sensors
M1941A Extension cable (2 m). For use with Philips reusable
sensors (with a cable length
≤2 m) and M1943A adapter
cable.
M1943A Adapter cable (1.1 m cable). Adapter cable for Philips/
Nellcor disposable sensors.
M1943AL Adapter cable (3 m cable).
OC-3 Adapter Cable for OxiCliq sensors. Available from Nellcor only.
Product
Number
Description Philips Part Number
MASIMO LNOP® reusable sensors
LNOP DCI Adult Finger Sensor (> 30 kg) n/a
LNOP DCIP Pediatric Finger Sensor (10 - 50 kg) n/a
LNOP YI Multi-Site Sensor (> 1kg) n/a
LNOP TC-I Ear Sensor (> 30 kg) n/a
MASIMO LNCS® reusable sensors.
LNCS DCI Adult Finger Sensor (> 30 kg) n/a
LNCS DCIP Pediatric Finger Sensor (10 - 50 kg) n/a
LNCS YI Multi-Site Sensor (> 1kg) n/a
LNCS TC-I Ear Sensor (> 30 kg) n/a
MASIMO LNCS® disposable adhesive sensors.
LNOP Adt Adult Sensor (> 30 kg) n/a
Product Number Description Comments
23 Accessories
267
The Philips M8102A with Philips FAST SpO2 Technology uses Masimo certified pulse oximetry for
reduced noise and low perfusion performance with Masimo Sensors under the Masimo NR&LP
protocol available from Masimo.
IntelliVue CL SpO2 Pod Accessories
All listed sensors operate without risk of exceeding 41°C on the skin, if the initial skin temperature
does not exceed 35°C.
Make sure that you use only the accessories that are specified for use with this device, otherwise patient
injury can result.
LNOP Adtx Adult Sensor (> 30 kg) n/a
LNOP Pdt Pediatric Sensor (10 - 50 kg) n/a
LNOP Pdtx Pediatric Sensor (10 - 50 kg) n/a
LNOP Inf-L Infant Toe Sensor (3 - 20 kg) n/a
LNOP Neo-L Neonatal Sensor (< 3 kg)
or Adult adhesive Sensor (> 40 kg)
n/a
LNOP NeoPt-L Neonatal Pre-Term Sensitive Skin Sensors (< 1 kg) n/a
MASIMO LNCS® disposable adhesive sensors.
LNCS Adtx Adult Finger Sensor, 18 inch (> 30 kg) n/a
LNCS Adtx-3 Adult Finger Sensor, 3 feet (> 30 kg) n/a
LNCS Pdtx Pediatric Finger Sensor, 18 inch (10 - 50 kg) n/a
LNCS Pdtx-3 Pediatric Finger Sensor, 3 feet (10 - 50 kg) n/a
LNCS Inf Infant Toe Sensor, 18 inch (3 - 20 kg) n/a
LNCS Inf-3 Infant Toe Sensor, 3 feet (3 - 20 kg) n/a
LNCS Neo Neonatal Foot Sensor, 18 inch (< 3 kg)
or Adult Finger Sensor 18 inch(> 40 kg)
n/a
LNCS Neo-3 Neonatal Foot Sensor, 3 feet (< 3 kg)
or Adult Finger Sensor, 3 feet(> 40 kg)
n/a
LNCS NeoPt Neonatal pre-term sensitive skin Sensor 18 inch (< 1 kg) n/a
LNCS NeoPt-3 Neonatal pre-term sensitive skin Sensor 3 feet (< 1 kg) n/a
Adapter Cable for MASIMO sensors.
LNOP MP12 LNOP MP Series Patient Cable (3.6 m) Adapter Cable for
Masimo LNOP Sensors
n/a
LNC MP10 LNCS MP Series Patient Cable (3.0 m) Adapter Cable for
Masimo LNCS Sensors
n/a
Product
Number
Description Philips Part Number
23 Accessories
268
1 May not be available in all geographies
Temperature Accessories
Order Number Description Contents
989803165941 Mobile CL 20 single patient SpO2 Sensors
and Cradles for use on pediatric and adult
patients >10 kg
20 Single-Patient Mobile CL DSpO2-1A
Sensors
20 Single-Patient Wristbands
20 Single-Patient Cradles
pre-assembled
989803165921 Mobile CL 20 single patient SpO2 Sensors
for use on pediatric and adult patients >10 kg
20 Single-Patient Mobile CL DSpO2-1A
Sensors
9898031659311Mobile CL reusable SpO2 sensor and Cradles
for use on pediatric and adult patients > 15 kg
1 Reusable Mobile CL RSpO2-1A Sensor
20 Single-Patient Cradles with pre-attached
Wristbands
989803165951 Mobile CL 20 SpO2 Cradles (single patient) 20 Single-Patient Cradles with pre-attached
Wristbands
989803165961 Mobile CL 50 SpO2 Wristbands (single
patient)
50 Single-Patient Wristbands
989803168861 Mobile CL SpO2 Battery Kit 1 Battery
1 disassembly tool
1 front housing
Temperature Probes Part No. Minimum measurement
time for accurate
readings
Reusable
General purpose probe 21075A 90 sec
Small flexible vinyl probe (Infant/Pediatric) 21076A 60 sec
Attachable surface probe 21078A 60 sec
Disposable
General purpose probe M1837A 90 sec
Skin probe 21091A 60 sec
Esophageal/Stethoscope Probe (French 12) 21093A 180 sec
Esophageal/Stethoscope Probe (French 18) 21094A 210 sec
Esophageal/Stethoscope Probe (French 24) 21095A 310 sec
Esophageal/Rectal Probe (French 12) 21090A 90 sec
Foley Catheter Probe (12 French) M2255A 180 sec
Foley Catheter Probe (16 French) 21096A 180 sec
Foley Catheter Probe (18 French) 21097A 180 sec
Adapter cable 1.5 m 21082B --
Adapter cable 3.0 m 21082A --
23 Accessories
269
Mainstream CO2 Accessories
Sidestream CO2 Accessories
Description Part No.
CO2 Sensor M2501A
Adult/Pediatric Airway Adapter (reusable) M2513A
Infant Airway Adapter (reusable) M2516A
Adult Airway Adapter (single-patient use) M2533A
Infant Airway Adapter (single-patient use) M2536A
Description Part No.
CO2 Sensor M2741A
Nasal and Oral-Nasal Cannulas
CO2 Nasal Cannula, Adult M2744A
CO2 Nasal Cannula, Pediatric M2745A
CO2 Nasal Cannula, Infant M2746A
CO2/O2 Nasal Cannula, Adult M2750A
CO2/O2 Nasal Cannula, Pediatric M2751A
CO2/O2 Nasal Cannula, Infant 989803144471
CO2 Oral-Nasal Cannula, Adult M2756A
CO2 Oral-Nasal Cannula, Pediatric M2757A
CO2/O2 Oral-Nasal Cannula, Adult M2760A
CO2/O2 Oral-Nasal Cannula, Pediatric M2761A
Airway Adapters
Airway Adapter Set, ET > 4.0 mm M2768A
Airway Adapter Set, ET =< 4.0 mm 989803144531
Airway Adapter Set H, ET > 4.0 mm M2772A
Airway Adapter Set H, ET =< 4.0 mm M2773A
Straight Sample Lines
Straight Sample Line M2776A
Straight Sample Line H M2777A
23 Accessories
270
Mainstream CO2 Accessories (for M3016A)
Microstream CO2 Accessories
• "FilterLine Set" is a combination of a FilterLine with an Airway Adapter.
• "H" in the accessory name indicates suitability for humidified ventilation and longer usage due to
the active removal of humidity from the sample line.
• "Smart CapnoLine" is a combined oral-nasal FilterLine.
• "Smart CapnoLine O2" is a combined oral-nasal-O2-CO2 FilterLine.
• "NIV Line" is a nasal FilterLine suitable for mask ventilation (for example, C-PAP).
• The accessories are supplied in packs of 25.
NOTE
Not all accessories are available in all countries.
Description Part No.
CO2 Sensor M1460A
Standard Airway Adapter (reusable) M1465A
Small Airway Adapter (reusable) 14363A
Description Part Number Part Number for
Long Version
Accessories for Intubated Patients
FilterLine® SET Adult/Pediatric M1920A 989803160241
FilterLine® H SET Adult/Pediatric M1921A 989803160251
FilterLine® H SET Infant/Neonatal M1923A 989803160261
VitaLine™ H SET Adult/Pediatric 989803159571
VitaLine™ H SET Infant/Neonate 989803159581
Accessories for Non-Intubated Patients
CapnoLine® H Adult M4689A
CapnoLine® H Pediatric M4690A
CapnoLine® H Infant/Neonatal M4691A 989803178011
CapnoLine® H O2 Adult M4680A
CapnoLine® H O2 Pediatric M4681A
CapnoLine® H O2 Infant/Neonatal 989803178001
NIV Line™ Adult M4686A
NIV Line™ Pediatric M4687A
Nasal FilterLine® Infant/Neonatal 989803178021
Nasal Filterline® O2 Adult 989803179101 989803179111
Nasal Filterline® O2 Pediatric 989803179121
23 Accessories
271
Battery Accessories
Smart CapnoLine® O2 Adult M2522A 989803160281
Smart CapnoLine® H O2 Adult 989803177951 989803177961
Smart CapnoLine® O2 Pediatric M2520A 989803160271
Smart CapnoLine® H O2 Pediatric 989803177971 989803177981
Smart CapnoLine® Adult M2526A 989803160301
Smart CapnoLine® Pediatric M2524A
Accessories for Endoscopic Procedures
Smart CapnoLine® Guard 989803178031
Smart CapnoLine® Guard O2989803178041 989803178051
Hook and Loop Strap 989803178071
Description Part Number Part Number for
Long Version
Description Part No.
Lithium Ion Smart Battery 1Ah (internal battery for X2/MP2) M4607A
Lithium Ion Smart Battery 6Ah (for 865297 Battery Extension) M4605A
Battery Charger and Conditioner (requires size adapter 4512 610 17451 to charge
M4607A battery)
865432
Size adapter for M4607A battery 4512 610 17451
23 Accessories
272
24
273
24Specifications
The specifications in this section apply to the MP2 patient monitor.
Indications for Use
The monitor is indicated for use by healthcare professionals whenever there is a need for monitoring
the physiological parameters of patients.
The monitor is intended to be used for monitoring and recording of, and to generate alarms, for,
multiple physiological parameters of adults, pediatrics, and neonates. The monitor is intended for use
by trained healthcare professionals in a hospital environment.
The monitor is also intended for use during patient transport inside and outside of the hospital
environment.
The monitor is only for use on one patient at a time. It is not intended for home use. Not a therapeutic
device. The monitor is for prescription use only.
The ECG measurement is intended to be used for diagnostic recording of rhythm and detailed
morphology of complex cardiac complexes (according to AAMI EC 11).
ST segment monitoring is intended for use with adult patients only and is not clinically validated for
use with neonatal and pediatric patients.
The Integrated Pulmonary Index (IPI) is intended for use with adult and pediatric (1 to 12 years)
patients only. The IPI is an adjunct to and not intended to replace vital sign monitoring.
Use Environment
Hospital Environment
The monitor is suitable for use in all medically used rooms which fulfill the requirements regarding
electrical installation according to IEC60364-7-710 "Requirements for special installations or locations
- Medical locations", or corresponding local regulations.
EMC Environment
All measurements (except the sidestream CO2 measurement with M2741A sensor) and system
interfaces (except short range radio and wireless LAN) are, in addition, suitable for use in
establishments directly connected to the public low-voltage supply network that supplies buildings
used for domestic purposes (see table in “Electromagnetic Emissions” on page 300).
The monitor is indicated for use by health care professionals whenever there is a need for monitoring
the physiological parameters of patients.
24 Specifications
274
WARNING
The monitor is not intended for use in an MRI environment or in an oxygen-enriched environment
(for example, hyperbaric chambers).
Restricted Availability
Following new features and functionality may not be available in all geographies:
• Integrated Pulmonary Index for Microstream CO2
• Smart Alarm delays
• IntelliVue Information Center iX
Manufacturer's Information
You can write to Philips at this address
Philips Medizin Systeme Boeblingen GmbH
Hewlett-Packard-Str. 2
71034 Boeblingen
Germany
Visit our website at: www.healthcare.philips.com/us/.
© Copyright 2012. Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. All Rights Reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgement
Microstream®, FilterLine®, and Smart CapnoLine® are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Oridion Systems Ltd.
The following are trademarks of Nellcor Puritan Bennett Incorporated: Nellcor®, Durasensor®, Dura-
Y®, Oxiband®, Oxicliq®, OxiMax®. MAX-FAST® is a trademark of Mallinckrodt Inc.
Masimo®, Masimo SET®, and LNOP are federally registered trademarks of the Masimo Corporation.
Other product and company names mentioned in this book may be trademarks of their respective
owners.
24 Specifications
275
Symbols
These symbols can appear on the monitor and its associated equipment (depending on options).
Symbols
Caution, refer to
accompanying
documents
On/Off/Standby DC power source
Alternating current Rechargeable battery
symbol
Battery Eject
ECG Sync Pulse
Output indicator
Connection
direction indicator
Connection direction
indicator
Pressure connector Temperature
connector
Connector has
special protection
against electric
shocks and is
defibrillator proof
NBP connector SpO2 connector Uses FAST SpO2
algorithm
Masimo SET
technology
Nellcor OxiMax
compatible
LAN connection
indicator for
connection to a
wired network
Silence Alarms Alarms On/Off Alarms Switched Off
ECG connector Error LED Identifies year and
month of
manufacture
IntelliVue
Instrument
Telemetry wireless
network
Always use separate
collection for waste
electrical and
electronic
equipment (WEEE)
Monitor supports
12-lead ECG
Built-in short range
radio interface
Built-in wireless
network
Indicates location of
the date of
manufacture and/or
name and address of
manufacturer
24 Specifications
276
Installation Safety Information
WARNING
If multiple instruments are connected to a patient, the sum of the leakage currents may exceed the
limits given in IEC/EN60601-1, IEC60601-1-1, UL60601-1. Consult your service personnel.
Connectors
The actual placement of boards and configuration of connections for your monitor depends on how
your hardware has been configured. See the symbols table in this chapter to see which symbols are
used to mark the connections.
WARNING
• Connect only medical devices to the ECG output connector socket.
• Connecting the ECG sync out to external equipment should only be done by a qualified user. Do
not touch the patient when you have contact to the ECG output connector socket.
• Always connect the ECG sync cable first to the external device and then to the monitor. Wherever
possible, pre-install the cable before the patient is brought into the vicinity of the equipment.
Followed by two
alphanumeric
characters, indicates
ingress protection
grade
Indicates location of
serial number
Indicates location of
catalog number
Indicates location
of service number
SmartKeys Main Screen
Electrical input
indicator
(In some cases gas
input indicator)
Electrical output
indicator
(In some cases gas
output indicator)
LAN connection
indicator for
connection to a
wired network
Non-ionizing
radiation symbol
Symbols
Earthing The monitor must be earthed during operation. The earthing is for functional purposes and
does not provide protection against electric shock. The protection against electric shock in this
device is provided by double and/or reinforced insulation. If a three-wire receptacle is not
available, consult the hospital electrician. Never use a three-wire to two-wire adapter.
Combining equipment Combinations of medical equipment with non-medical equipment must comply with IEC
60601-1-1. Never use a multiple portable socket-outlet or extension cord when combining
equipment unless the socket outlet is supplied specifically for use with that equipment.
Network Cables All network cables must be unshielded.
24 Specifications
277
Monitor Mounting Precautions
Mount the monitor using either the Philips Quick Mount or Fix Mount solution or another approved
mounting solution. Select the mounting equipment and the mounting position so that no patient,
operator or other person can be harmed by a monitor removed intentionally or released accidentally
from the mount. When using the Quick Mount, be aware of the danger of accidental activation of the
Quick Mount release button when lifting or moving items located under the monitor, such as pole
mounts, etc. If in doubt, use the Philips Fix Mount solution to avoid such situations. Refer to the
respective IntelliVue Monitor Service Manual, Installation Instructions chapter, for more details.
Repositioning a Monitor on the Mounting Arm
Attempts to reposition the monitor should only be performed as described in the mounting hardware
manufacturer’s user documentation. If the mounting arm has a locking mechanism, ensure the locking
mechanism is unlocked before attempting to reposition the monitor. Never pull on the monitor to tilt,
swivel or otherwise reposition it - always hold on to the mounting hardware itself.
WARNING
Not adhering to these instructions when repositioning the monitor can cause damage to the monitor.
In extreme cases, when force is applied to the monitor, it can result in the monitor falling from the
mounting arm.
If, at any time, the monitor appears to be loose or insecurely mounted, contact your service personnel.
Altitude Setting
Altitude affects CO2 measurements. The monitor must be configured at installation to the correct
altitude.
Monitor Safety Specifications
The monitor and MMS Extensions comply with the Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
In addition, the product complies with:
IEC 60601-1:1988 + A1:1991 + A2:1995; EN60601-1:1990 + A1:1993 + A2:1995; UL 60601-1:2003;
CAN/CSA C22.2#601.1-M90 +Suppl. No. 1-94 + Am. 2; IEC 60601-1-1:2000; EN 60601-1-1:2001;
IEC 60601-1-2:2001 + A1:2004; EN 60601-1-2:2001 + A1:2006.
The possibility of hazards arising from software errors was minimized in compliance with ISO
14971:2007, EN60601-1-4:1996 + A1:1999 and IEC 60601-1-4:1996 + A1:1999.
Classification (according to IEC 60601-1): Class II, Type CF, Continuous Operation.
24 Specifications
278
EMC And Radio Regulatory Compliance
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001. Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-
001 du Canada.
The MP2 including IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry WMTS (US only))
The MP2 including IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry WMTS complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. Operation
of this equipment requires the prior coordination with a frequency coordinator designated by the FCC
for the Wireless Medical Telemetry Service.
The MP2 including IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry ISM (2.4 GHz)
FCC and Industry Canada Radio Compliance: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by Philips Medical Systems may cause harmful radiofrequency interference and
void your authority to operate this equipment.
The radio device used in this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications
Terminal Equipment Directive). Class 2 radio equipment. Member states may apply restrictions on
putting this device into service or placing it on the market. This product is intended to be connected to
the Publicly Available Interfaces (PAI) and used throughout the EEA.
The MP2 Including the IntelliVue 802.11 Wireless Network Adapter
FCC and Industry Canada Radio Compliance: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by Philips Medical Systems may cause harmful radiofrequency interference and
void your authority to operate this equipment.
The maximum antenna gain permitted (for devices in the 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz bands)
complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as stated in RSS-210.
The maximum antenna gain permitted (for devices in the 5725-5825 MHz band) complies with the
e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point operation, as stated in RSS-210.
The device for the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful
interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems.
CAUTION
High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250-5350 MHz and
5650-5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and /or damage to LE-LAN devices.
The radio device used in this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. This product is intended to be connected to the Publicly
Available Interfaces (PAI) and used throughout the EEA.
24 Specifications
279
The radio component contained in this device is in compliance with Council Directive
1999/5/EC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive)
In addition the product complies with: ETSI EN 300 328; ETSI EN 301 893; AS/NZS 4771+A1;
ARIB STD-T66.
Radiofrequency Radiation Exposure Information
For body worn operation, this equipment has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines
when used with the accessories supplied or those approved for use with this product. Use of other
accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines.
The MP2 and 865244 Remote Control Including the Short Range
Radio Interface
FCC and Industry Canada Radio Compliance: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by Philips Medical Systems may cause harmful radiofrequency interference and
void your authority to operate this equipment.
The radio component contained in this device is in compliance with the essential requirements
and other relevant provisions of Council Directive 1999/5/EC (Radio Equipment and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive)
In addition the product complies with: ETSI EN 300 328; AS/NZS 4771+A1; ARIB STD-T66.
Class 1 radio equipment.
Out-Of-Hospital Transport - Standards Compliance
The MP2 patient monitor with measurements and interfaces other than those listed below cannot be
used for patient transport outside of the hospital environment.
The MP2 patient monitor, with the following measurements and interfaces:
– ECG/Respiration, NBP, SpO2, Pressure, Temperature, CO2 (only Mainstream Sensor
M2501A)
– LAN, internal Battery
can be used in a transport environment such as a road ambulance, airplane or helicopter. For this
purpose the monitor fulfils the following additional mechanical, EMC and environmental
requirements:
•Shock Tests according to IEC TR 60721-4-7, Class 7M3. Test procedure according to IEC/EN
60068-2-27 (peak acceleration up to 100g).
•Random Vibration according to IEC TR 60721-4-7, Class 7M3. Test procedure according to
IEC/EN 60068-2-64 (RMS acceleration 5g).
•Sinusoidal Vibration according to IEC TR 60721-4-7, Class 7M3. Test procedure according to
IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (acceleration up to amplitude 2g).
•Bump Test according to IEC/EN60068-2-29 (peak acceleration 15 g, 1000 bumps).
24 Specifications
280
•Free Fall Test according to EN1789 (covers also IEC TR 60721-4-7 and Class 7M3). Test
procedure according to EN 60068-2-32 (height 0.75 m).
•Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures according to IEC/EN 60529: IP
32.
• EN 1789 +A1:2003 Medical vehicles and their equipment - Road ambulances (chapter 6 - Medical
Devices).
•Radiated susceptibility 20 V/m according to EN ISO 9919 (SpO2) and EN ISO 21647 (CO2).
•Altitude Range from -500 to 3000 m operating and -500 to 4600 m storage and transportation.
•Extended radiated susceptibility tests
The MP2 patient monitor with its out-of-hospital parameter set provides a general immunity level
of 20 V/m with only few restrictions. Details are as listed below:
– GSM 900: Immunity at 900 MHz (uplink mobile phone), 20 V/m (ECG:10 V/m), duty cycle
1:8.
– GSM 1800: Immunity at 1800 MHz (uplink mobile phone), 20 V/m, duty cycle 1:8.
– DECT: Immunity at 1800 MHz (digital cordless phone), 20 V/m, duty cycle 1:24.
– AM: 1 kHz Immunity from 80 MHz to 1.0 GHz (any radio communication unit, broadcasting
and TV transmitter), 20 V/m, modulation factor 80%. (ECG: 20 V/m except 600-950 MHz
where it is 10 V/m and Temperature which holds 3 V/m over the full range).
CAUTION
Temperature measurement accuracy may be compromised in the presence of strong electromagnetic
fields (>3V/m) in certain small frequency bands.
•Magnetic Field emission according to MIL STD 461E, Chapter RE101: Radiated emissions,
magnetic field, 30 Hz to 100 kHz. Limit class: Army.
•Magnetic Field susceptibility: Radiated susceptibility, magnetic field, 50, 60 and 400 Hz,
18 µT(15 A/m).
•Operating ambient temperature testing over the range from 0 to 40°C (32 to 100°F).
•Operating ambient humidity testing up to 95 % RH at 40°C (100°F), non condensing.
NOTE
There may be additional requirements for transport situations in air, on water or in difficult terrain in
certain countries, e.g. EU.
Physical Specifications
Specification Comments
Maximum Weight
1.25 kg (2.8 lb) including battery, without options
Size (W x H x D)
188 x 99 x 86 mm
7.4 x 3.9 x 3.4 in
without handle and options
24 Specifications
281
Environmental Specifications
The monitor may not meet the performance specifications given here if stored or used outside the
specified temperature and humidity ranges.
The monitor is protected against ingress of objects and fluids according to IEC 60529 IP32 (applies to
all options intended for out-of-hospital use). However, do not expose the monitor directly to heavy
rain.
When the monitor and related products have differing environmental specifications, the effective
range for the combined products is that range which is common to the specifications for all products.
M8023A External Power Supply Weight and Dimensions
Maximum Weight
700 g ±10% (1.5 lb ±10%)
Size (W x H x D)
207 x 70 x 113 mm
8.1 x 2.8 x 4.4 in
865297 Battery Extension Weight and Dimensions
Maximum Weight
1.4 kg ±10%, including battery (3.1 lb ±10%)
Size (W x H x D)
190 x 140 x 135 mm
7.5 x 5.5 x 5.3 in
Item Condition Range
Temperature Range Operating 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)
Storage including transportation -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Temperature Range with
the Wireless IntelliVue
Adapter or IntelliVue
Instrument Telemetry
Wireless Network or when
charging the battery
Operating 0 to 35°C (32 to 95°F)
Humidity Range Operating 15% to 95% Relative Humidity (RH)
Storage including transportation 5% to 95% Relative Humidity (RH)
Altitude Range Operating -500 m to 3000 m (10000 ft)
Storage including transportation -500 m to 4600 m (15000 ft)1
24 Specifications
282
1 Sufficient for flight altitudes up to 12,000 m with pressurized cabins
Monitor Performance Specifications
Ingress Protection Monitor IP32 (protected against ingress of water when the water is
dripping vertically and the monitor is tilted up to 15°)
External Power Supply (M8023A) IP31(protected against the ingress of solid foreign objects 2.5 mm
in diameter or larger, and the ingress of water when the water is
dripping vertically) when rested on its rubber feet on a flat, level
surface.
IP32 when mounted as shown in the section "“Mounting the
External Power Supply (M8023A)” on page 13 in the Installation
chapter and as described in the Service Guide.
Battery Extension (865297) IP32 (protected against ingress of water when the water is
dripping vertically and the monitor is tilted up to 15°, not
protected against heavy rain.)
Item Condition Range
Performance Specifications
Power Specifications Power consumption <12 W average
<30 W while battery is loading
Operating Voltage 36 to 60 V DC floating
Battery Specifications Operating Time
(with new, fully charged battery at 25°C)
Basic monitoring configuration: 2.5 hours
(Brightness set to Optimum, ECG/Resp, SpO2
measurements in use, NBP measurement every 15 minutes)
Charge Time When monitor is off: 2 hours
When monitor is in use, and connected to the external power
supply (M8023A), without MMS extensions: 12 hours approx.
Indicators Alarms Off red or yellow LED with crossed out alarms symbol
Alarms red/yellow/light blue (cyan) LED
On/Standby / Error green / red LED
AC Power green LED
Battery yellow (charging)/red blinking (empty) LED
External Power green LED
Sounds Audible feedback for user input
Prompt tone
QRS tone, or SpO2 modulation tone
4 different alarm sounds
Trends Resolution 12 or 16 numerics @ 12 sec, 1 minute, 5 minute resolution.
Information Multiple choices of number of numerics, resolution and duration
depending on trend option and application area.
For example:
For neonatal, you can choose between 12 and 16 numerics.
24 Specifications
283
Alarm signal System alarm delay
The system alarm delay is the processing
time the system needs for any alarm to be
indicated on the monitor, after the
measurement has triggered the alarm.
less than 4 seconds
Delay for alarm availability on the network
This is the time needed after alarm
indication on the monitor until the alarm
signal is available on the network, to the
IntelliVue Information Center or for
transmission to other systems.
less than 4 seconds
Pause duration 1,2,3 minutes or infinite, depending on configuration
Extended alarm pause 5 or 10 minutes
Sound pressure range min. 0 dB(A)
max. 45-85 dB(A)
Review Alarms Information all alarms / inops, main alarms on/off, alarm silence and time of
occurrence
Capacity 300 items
Real Time Clock Range from: January 1, 1997, 00:00 to: December 31, 2080, 23:59
Accuracy <4 seconds per day (typically)
Hold Time infinite if powered by external power supply; otherwise at least
48 hours
Buffered Memory Hold Time if powered by external power supply: infinite
without power: at least 48 hours
Contents Active settings, trends, patient data, realtime reports, review
alarms
Performance Specifications
M8023A External Power Supply Performance Specifications
Power Specifications Power consumption <12 W average
<30 W peak
Line Voltage 100 to 240 V ~
Current 1.3 to 0.7 A
Frequency 50/60 Hz ~
Indicators AC Power green LED
Display Specifications
Integrated QVGA
Display
Sweep Speeds 6.25, 12.5, 25 and 50 mm/s
Resolution 320 x 240
Refresh frequency 60 Hz
Useful screen 72x54mm (2.8x2.1in)
Pixel size 0.22 x 0.22 mm
24 Specifications
284
Monitor Interface Specifications
Monitor Interface Specifications
Measurement Link
(MSL)
Connectors Female ODU (Proprietary)
Power 30 V to 60 V input
Power Sync. RS-422 compliant input 78.125kHz (typical)
LAN signals IEEE 802.3 10-Base-T compliant
Serial signals RS-422 compliant
Local signals Provided for connecting measurement extensions
ECG Sync Pulse
Output1Cable detection Yes
Marker In No
Wave Output No
Connector Binder Series 709/719
Output levels Output low <0.8 V @ I = -4 mA
Output high >2.4 V @ I = 4 mA
Isolation None
Pulse Width 100 +/-10 ms (high)
Delay from R-wave peak to start
of pulse
20 ms maximum per AAMI EC13
Minimum required R-wave
amplitude
0.5 V
IntelliVue 802.11
Bedside Adapter
(Wireless Network
Adapter)
Type Internal wireless adapter
Technology IEEE 802.11a/b/g
Frequency Band USA: 2.400 - 2.483GHz, 5.15 - 5.35GHz, 5.725 - 5.825GHz
Europe: 2.400 - 2.483GHz, 5.15 - 5.35GHz, 5.47 - 5.725GHz
Japan: 2.400 - 2.483GHz, 2.471 - 2.498GHz, 4.900 - 5.091GHz, 5.150 -
5.250GHz, 5.25 - 5.35GHz, 5.470 - 5.725GHz
China: 2.400 - 2.483GHz, 5.725 -5.85GHz
Modulation Technique 802.11b/g
DSSS (DBPSK, DQPSK, CCK)
OFDM (BPSK,QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM)
802.11a
OFDM (BPSK,QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM)
Effective radiated power max 18 dBm
Short Range Radio
Interface2Type Internal SRR interface
Technology IEEE 802.15.4
Frequency Band 2.4 GHz ISM (2.400 - 2.483 GHz)
Modulation Technique DSSS (O -QPSK)
Effective radiated power max. 0 dBm (1 mW)
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry Wireless Network (USA only)
24 Specifications
285
1 See “Connectors” on page 276 for safety-related information)
2 The short range radio interface is compatible with the IntelliVue Cableless Measurements and the following devices:
TRx4841A/TRx4851A IntelliVue Telemetry System Transceiver and MX40 Patient Wearable Monitor.
865297 Battery Extension Specifications
Internal WMTS
Adapter
Technology compatible with Philips IntelliVue Telemetry System (ITS), cellular
infrastructure
Frequency Band WMTS, 1395-1400 MHz and 1427-1432 MHz
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry Wireless Network
Internal ISM Adapter Technology compatible with Philips IntelliVue Telemetry System (ITS), cellular
infrastructure
Frequency Band 2.4 GHz ISM
Monitor Interface Specifications
M8023A External Power Supply Interface Specifications
Measurement Link
(MSL)
Connectors Male ODU (Proprietary)
Power 48 V output
Power Sync. RS-422 compliant output 78.125 kHz (typical)
LAN signals IEEE 802.3 10-Base-T compliant
Serial signals RS-422 compliant output 78.125 kHz (typical)
Local signals Not connected
865297 Battery Extension Interface Specifications
Measurement Link
(MSL)
Connectors Male ODU (Proprietary)
Power 36 -38 V output
Power Sync. RS-422 compliant output 78.125 kHz (typical)
LAN signals IEEE 802.3 10-Base-T compliant
Serial signals RS-422 compliant
Local signals Not connected
Measurement Link
(MSL)
Connectors Female ODU (Proprietary)
Power 30-60 V input
Power Sync. RS-422 compliant input 78.125 kHz (typical)
LAN signals IEEE 802.3 10-Base-T compliant
Serial signals RS-422 compliant
Local signals Not connected
865297 Battery Extension Battery Specifications
Battery Type M4605A
Indicators green power LED and green-yellow-red battery status LED
24 Specifications
286
M4607A Battery Specifications
One battery is required for battery operation of the monitor.
The battery lifetime is 3 years from manufacturing date or 500 charge/discharge cycles.
M4605A Battery Specifications
The battery lifetime is 3 years from manufacturing date or 500 charge/discharge cycles.
M4607A Battery Specifications
Physical Specifications
W x D x H 66 mm (2.36 in) x 80 mm (3.15 in) x 20 mm (0.79 in)
Weight 160 g ±5%
Performance Specifications
Nominal Voltage 10.8 Volt
Rated Capacity at discharge C/5 1000 mAh (typical)
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Range Discharge 0 to 60°C (32 to 122°F)
Charge 0 to 60°C (32 to 122°F)
Storage and Transportation: -20 to 65°C (-4 to 140°F)
Humidity Range Operating: 15% to 95% Relative Humidity (RH)
Storage and Transportation: 5% to 95% Relative Humidity (RH)
Battery Type Lithium Ion Mangan, 10.8 V, 1000 mAh
Safety complies with UL 2054
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) complies with the requirements for FCC Type B computing Device, and EN
61000-4-2 and EN 61000-3-2
Communication Standard complies with the SMBus specification v1.1
M4605A Battery Specifications
Physical Specifications
W x D x H 149 mm (5.866 in) x 89 mm (3.504 in) x 19.8 mm (0.78 in)
Weight 490 g (1.08 lb) per battery
Performance Specifications
Nominal Voltage 10.8 Volt
Rated Capacity at discharge C/5 6000 mAh
Continuous Discharge Capability 6.5 A
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Range Discharge 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Charge 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Storage and Transportation: -20 to 65°C (-4 to 140°F)
Humidity Range Operating: 15% to 95% Relative Humidity (RH)
Storage and Transportation: 5 % to 95 % Relative Humidity (RH)
24 Specifications
287
Measurement Specifications
See the Appendix on Default Settings for a list of the settings the monitor is initially shipped with.
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST/QT
Complies with IEC 60601-2-25:1993 + A1:1999 /EN60601-2-25:1995 + A1:1999, IEC 60601-2-
27:2005/EN60601-2-27:2006, IEC 60601-2-51:2003 /EN 60601-2-51:2003 and AAMI EC11/
EC13:1991/2002.
Battery Type Smart Battery 10.8 V, 6000 mAh, Lithium Ion
Safety complies with UL 2054
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) complies with the requirements for FCC Type B computing Device, and EN
61000-4-2 and EN 61000-3-2
Communication Standard complies with the SMBus specification v 1.1
M4605A Battery Specifications
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Performance Specifications
Cardiotach Range Adult/pedi: 15 to 300 bpm
Neo range: 15 to 350 bpm
Note: for rates equal to or less than 15 bpm, the displayed heart
rate is 0.
Accuracy ±1% of range
Resolution 1 bpm
Sensitivity 200 µVpeak
PVC Rate Range 0 to 300 bpm
Resolution 1 bpm
ST Numeric Range -20 to +20 mm
Accuracy ±0.5 mm or 15%, whichever is greater
Resolution 0.1 mm
QT Numeric Range 200 to 800 ms
Accuracy ±30 ms
Resolution 8 ms
QTc Numeric Range 200 to 800 ms
Resolution 1 ms
QTc Numeric Range -600 to +600 ms
Resolution 1 ms
QT-HR Numeric Range - adult 15 to 150 bpm
Range - pediatric and neonatal 15 to 180 bpm
24 Specifications
288
Sinus and SV Rhythm Ranges Brady Adult: 15 to 59 bpm
Pedi: 15 to 79 bpm
Neo: 15 to 89 bpm
Normal Adult: 60 to 100 bpm
Pedi: 80 to 160 bpm
Neo: 90 to 180 bpm
Tachy Adult: >100 bpm
Pedi: >160 bpm
Neo: >180 bpm
Bandwidth Diagnostic Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.05 to 150 Hz
Extended Monitoring Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.5 to 150 Hz
Monitoring Mode Adult: 0.5 to 40 Hz
Neo/pedi: 0.5 to 55 Hz
Filter Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.5 to 20 Hz
Bandwidth
when the ECG is transmitted from
a telemetry device via short range
radio
Diagnostic Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.05 to 40 Hz
Extended Monitoring Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.5 to 40 Hz
Monitoring Mode Adult: 0.5 to 40 Hz
Neo/pedi: 0.5 to 40 Hz
Filter Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.5 to 20 Hz
Differential Input Impedance >2 M RA-LL leads (Resp)
>5 M at all other leads (at 10 Hz including patient cable)
Common Mode Rejection Ratio Diagnostic mode: >86 dB (with a 51 k/47 nF imbalance).
Filter mode: >106 dB (with a 51 k/47 nF imbalance).
Electrode Offset Potential Tolerance ±500 mV
Auxiliary Current
(Leads off Detection)
Active electrode: <100 nA
Reference electrode: <900 nA
Input Signal Range ±5 mV
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Performance Specifications
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST/QT
Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment
HR 15 to 300 bpm
maximum delay: 10 seconds
according to AAMI EC 13-1992
standard
Adult:1 bpm steps (15 to 40 bpm)
5 bpm steps (40 to 300 bpm)
Pedi/Neo:1 bpm steps (15 to 50 bpm)
5 bpm steps (50 to 300 bpm)
Extreme Tachy Difference to high limit 0 to
50 bpm
5bpm steps
Clamping at 150 to 300 bpm 5 bpm steps
Extreme Brady Difference to low limit 0 to
50 bpm
5bpm steps
Clamping at 15 to 100 bpm 5 bpm steps
Run PVCs None, fixed setting 2 PVCs Not adjustable by user
PVCs Rate 1 to 99 PVCs/minute 1 PVC
Vent Tach HR 20 to 300 bpm 5 bpm
Vent Tach Run 3 to 99 PVCs/minute 1 PVC
Vent Rhythm Run 3 to 99 PVCs/minute 1 PVC
SVT HR 120 to 300 bpm 5 bpm
24 Specifications
289
SVT Run 3 to 99 SV beats 1 SV beat
ST High -19.8 to +20 mm 0.2 mm
ST Low -20 to +19.8 mm 0.2 mm
STE Limit -20 to +20 mm 0.2 mm
QTc High 200 ms to 800 ms 10 ms steps
QTc High 30 ms to 200 ms 10 ms steps
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST/QT
Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Supplemental Information as required by AAMI EC11/13, IEC 60601-2-27
Respiration Excitation Waveform Sinusoidal signal, 260 A, 40.5 kHz
Noise Suppression RL drive gain 44 dB max., max. voltage 1.8 Vrms
Time to Alarm for Tachycardia Vent Tachycardia
1mV
pp,206 bpm
Gain 0.5, Range 6.5 to 8.4 seconds, Average 7.2 seconds
Gain 1.0 Range 6.1 to 6.9 seconds, Average 6.5 seconds
Gain 2.0, Range 5.9 to 6.7 seconds, Average 6.3 seconds
Vent Tachycardia
2mV
pp,195 bpm
Gain 0.5, Range 5.4 to 6.2 seconds, Average 5.8 seconds
Gain 1.0, Range 5.7 to 6.5 seconds, Average 6.1 seconds
Gain 2.0, Range 5.3 to 6.1 seconds, Average 5.7 seconds
Tall T-Wave Rejection Capability Exceeds ANSI/AAMI EC 13 Sect. 3.1.2.1(c) minimum
recommended 1.2 mV T-Wave amplitude
Heart Rate Averaging Method Three different methods are used:
Normally, heart rate is computed by averaging the 12 most
recent RR intervals.
For runs of PVCs, up to 8 RR intervals are averaged to compute
the HR.
If each of 3 consecutive RR intervals is greater than 1200 ms
(that is, rate less than 50 bpm), then the 4 most recent RR
intervals are aver\-aged to compute the HR.
Response Time of Heart Rate Meter to Change in Heart Rate HR change from 80 to 120 bpm:
Range: [6.4 to 7.2 seconds] Average: 6.8 seconds
HR change from 80 to 40 bpm:
Range: [5.6 to 6.4 sec] Average: 6.0 seconds
Heart Rate Meter Accuracy and Response to Irregular Rhythm Ventricular bigeminy: 80 bpm
Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy: 60 bpm
Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy: 120 bpm
Bidirectional systoles: 90 bpm
Accuracy of Input Signal Reproduction Methods A and D were used to establish overall system error
and frequency response.
Pacemaker Pulse Rejection Performance Rejection of pacemaker pulses with amplitudes from ±2 mV to
±700 mV and widths from 0.1 ms to 2.0 ms (Method A)
Pacemaker Pulse Rejection of fast ECG signals 2.2 V/s RTI (Paced Mode)
Minimum input slew rate 2.2 V/s RTI
24 Specifications
290
Respiration
SpO2
Complies with ISO 9919:2005 / EN ISO 9919:2009 (except alarm system; alarm system complies with
IEC 60601-2-49:2001).
The SpO2 performance specifications in this section apply to devices with Philips SpO2 technology.
For SpO2 performance specifications valid for other SpO2 technologies, refer to the instructions for
use provided with these devices.
Measurement Validation: The SpO2 accuracy has been validated in human studies against arterial
blood sample reference measured with a CO-oximeter. Pulse oximeter measurements are statistically
distributed, only about two-thirds of the measurements can be expected to fall within the specified
accuracy compared to CO-oximeter measurements.
Display Update Period: Typical: 2 seconds, Maximum: 30 seconds. Maximum with NBP INOP
suppression on: 60 seconds.
Respiration Performance Specifications
Respiration Rate Range Adult/pedi: 0 to 120 rpm
Neo: 0 to 170 rpm
Accuracy at 0 to 120 rpm ±1 rpm
at 120 to 170 rpm ±2 rpm
Resolution 1 rpm
Bandwidth 0.3 to 2.5 Hz (-6 dB)
Noise Less than 25 m (rms) referred to the input
Respiration Alarm
Specifications Range Adjustment Delay
High Adult/pedi: 10 to 100 rpm
Neo: 30 to 150 rpm
under 20 rpm: 1 rpm steps
over 20 rpm: 5 rpm steps
max. 14 seconds
Low Adult/pedi: 0 to 95 rpm
Neo: 0 to 145 rpm
under 20 rpm: 1 rpm steps
over 20 rpm: 5 rpm steps
for limits from 0 to 20 rpm:
max. 4 seconds
for limits above 20 rpm: max.
14 seconds
Apnea Alarm 10 to 40 seconds 5 second steps
24 Specifications
291
SpO2 Performance Specifications
SpO2
The specified accuracy
is the root-mean-
square (RMS)
difference between the
measured values and
the reference values
Range 0 to 100%
Accuracy Philips Reusable Sensors:
M1191A, M1191AL, M1191B, M1191BL, M1192A, = 2% (70% to 100%)
M1193A, M1194A, M1195A, M1196A = 3% (70% to 100%)
M1191T, M1192T, M1193T (Adult), M1196T = 3% (70% to 100%)
M1193T (Neonate) = 4% (70% to 100%)
Philips Disposable Sensors with M1943A(L):
M1132A, M1133A (adult/infant), M1134A (adult/infant) = 2%
M1901B, M1902B, M1903B, M1904B, M1131A, M1133A (neonate), M1134A (neonate) =
3% (70% to 100%)
NellcorPB® Sensors with M1943A(L):
MAX-A, MAX-AL, MAX-P, MAX-I, MAX-N, D-25, D-20, I-20, N-25, OxiCliq A, P, I, N
= 3% (70% to 100%)
Masimo Reusable Sensors® with LNOP MP12 or LNC MP10:
LNOP DC-I, LNOP DC-IP, LNOP YI (adult/pedi/infant), LNCS DC-1, LNCS DC-IP,
LNCS YI (adult/pedi/infant) = 2% (70% to 100%)
LNOP YI (neonate), LNCS YI (neonate) = 3% (70% to 100%)
LNOP TC-I, LNCS TC-I: 3.5% (70% to 100%)
Masimo Disposable Sensors® with LNOP MP12 or LNC MP10:
LNOP Adt, LNOP Adtx, LNOP Pdt, LNOP Pdtx, LNOP Inf-L, LNOP Neo-L (adult),
LNCS Adtx, LNCS Adtx-3, LNCS Pdtx, LNCS Pdtx-3, LNCS Inf, LNCS Inf-3, LNCS
Neo (adult), LNCS Neo-3 (adult) = 2% (70% to 100%)
LNOP Neo-L (neonate), LNOP NeoPt-L, LNCS Neo (neonate), LNCS Neo-3 (neonate),
LNCS NeoPt, LNCS NeoPt-3 = 3% (70% to 100%)
Resolution 1%
Pulse Range 30 to 300 bpm
Accuracy ±2% or 1 bpm, whichever is greater
Resolution 1bpm
Sensors Wavelength range: 500 to 1000 nm
Emitted Light Energy: 15 mW
Information about the wavelength range can be especially useful to clinicians (for instance,
when photodynamic therapy is performed)
Pulse Oximeter Calibration Range 70% to 100%
SpO2 Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment
SpO2Adult: 50 to 100%
Pedi/Neo: 30 to 100%
1% steps
Desat Adult: 50 to Low alarm limit
Pedi/Neo: 30 to Low alarm limit
1% steps
Pulse 30 to 300 bpm Adult:
1 bpm steps (30 to 40 bpm)
5 bpm steps (40 to 300 bpm)
Pedi/Neo:
1 bpm steps (30 to 50 bpm)
5 bpm steps (50 to 300 bpm)
24 Specifications
292
1. Refer to “Monitor Performance Specifications” on page 282 for system alarm delay specification.
Tachycardia Difference to high limit 0 to 50 bpm 5 bpm steps
Clamping at 150 to 300 bpm 5 bpm steps
Bradycardia Difference to low limit 0 to 50 bpm 5 bpm steps
Clamping at 30 to 100 bpm 5 bpm steps
SpO2 Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment
SpO2 Alarm
Specifications (cont.) Standard Delay
Smart Alarm Delay (alternative to standard alarm delay)
Short Mode Medium mode Long Mode
SpO2 high and low limit
alarms
0 to 30 seconds (adjustable in
1 second steps) + system alarm
delay1
10 to 25 seconds +
system alarm delay
10 to 50 seconds
+system alarm delay
10 to 100 seconds +
system alarm delay
Desat 0 to 30 seconds (adjustable in
1 second steps) + system alarm
delay
not supported
Pulse 10 seconds + system alarm delay
Tachycardia 10 seconds + system alarm delay
Bradycardia 10 seconds + system alarm delay
SpO2 Smart Alarm Delay - Detailed Specifications
Deviation from violated
alarm limit Resulting alarm delay according to selected mode
Short Medium Long
1% 25 sec
(maximum delay)
50 sec
(maximum delay)
100 sec
(maximum delay)
2% 12 sec 25 sec 50 sec
3% 10 sec 16 sec 33 sec
4% 10 sec 12 sec 25 sec
5% 10 sec 10 sec 20 sec
6% 10 sec 10 sec 16 sec
7% 10 sec 10 sec 14 sec
8% 10 sec 10 sec 12 sec
9% 10 sec 10 sec 11 sec
>9% 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec
24 Specifications
293
NBP
Complies with IEC 60601-2-30:1999/EN60601-2-30:2000.
Measurement Validation: In adult and pediatric mode, the blood pressure measurements determined
with this device comply with the American National Standard for Electronic or Automated
Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10 - 1992) in relation to mean error and standard deviation,
when compared to intra-arterial or auscultatory measurements (depending on the configuration) in a
NBP Performance Specifications
Measurement Ranges Systolic Adult: 30 to 270 mmHg (4 to 36 kPa)
Pedi: 30 to 180 mmHg (4 to 24 kPa)
Neo: 30 to 130 mmHg (4 to 17 kPa)
Diastolic Adult: 10 to 245 mmHg (1.5 to 32 kPa)
Pedi: 10 to 150 mmHg (1.5 to 20 kPa)
Neo: 10 to 100 mmHg (1.5 to 13 kPa)
Mean Adult: 20 to 255 mmHg (2.5 to 34 kPa)
Pedi: 20 to 160 mmHg (2.5 to 21 kPa)
Neo: 20 to 120 mmHg (2.5 to 16 kPa)
Pulse Rate Adult: 40 to 300
Pedi: 40 to 300
Neo: 40 to 300
Accuracy Max. Std. Deviation: 8mmHg (1.1kPa)
Max. Mean Error: ±5 mmHg (±0.7 kPa)
Pulse Rate Measurement Accuracy 40 to 100 bpm: ±5 bpm
101 to 200 bpm: ±5% of reading
201 to 300 bpm: ±10% of reading
(average over NBP measurement cycle)
Pulse Rate Range 40 to 300 bpm
Measurement Time Typical at HR >60 bpm
Auto/manual/sequence: 30 seconds (adult)
25 seconds (neonatal)
Stat: 20 seconds
Maximum time: 180 seconds (adult/pediatric)
90 seconds (neonates)
Cuff Inflation Time Typical for normal adult cuff: Less than 10 seconds
Typical for neonatal cuff: Less than 2 seconds
Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure Adult: 165 ±15 mmHg
Pedi: 130 ±15 mmHg
Neo: 100 ±15 mmHg
Auto Mode Repetition Times 1 min, 2 min, 2.5 min, 3 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 45 min, 1h, 2h,
4h, 8h, 12h, 24h
STAT Mode Cycle Time 5minutes
Venipuncture Mode Inflation
Inflation Pressure Adult 20 to 120 mmHg (3 to 16 kPa)
Pediatric 20 to 80 mmHg (3 to 11 kPa)
Neonatal 20 to 50 mmHg (3 to 7 kPa)
Automatic deflation
after
Adult/pediatric 170 seconds
Neonatal 85 seconds
24 Specifications
294
representative patient population. For the auscultatory reference the 5th Korotkoff sound was used to
determine the diastolic pressure.
In neonatal mode, the blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the
American National Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10 -
1992 and AAMI/ANSI SP10A -1996) in relation to mean error and standard deviation, when
compared to intra-arterial measurements in a representative patient population.
Invasive Pressure and Pulse
Complies with IEC 60601-2-34:2000/EN60601-2-34:2000.
NBP Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment
Systolic Adult: 30 to 270 mmHg (4 to 36 kPa) 10 to 30 mmHg: 2 mmHg (0.5 kPa)
>30 mmHg: 5 mmHg (1 kPa)
Pedi: 30 to 180 mmHg (4 to 24 kPa)
Neo: 30 to 130 mmHg (4 to 17 kPa)
Diastolic Adult: 10 to 245 mmHg (1.5 to 32 kPa)
Pedi: 10 to 150 mmHg (1.5 to 20 kPa)
Neo: 10 to 100 mmHg (1.5 to 13 kPa)
Mean Adult: 20 to 255 mmHg (2.5 to 34 kPa)
Pedi: 20 to 160 mmHg (2.5 to 21 kPa)
Neo: 20 to 120 mmHg (2.5 to 16 kPa)
NBP Overpressure Settings
Adult >300 mmHg (40 kPa) >2 sec not user adjustable
Pediatric >300 mmHg (40 kPa) >2 sec
Neonate >150 mmHg (20 kPa) >2 sec
Invasive Pressure Performance Specifications
Measurement Range -40 to 360 mmHg
Pulse Rate Range 25 to 350 bpm
Accuracy ±1% Full Range
Resolution 1 bpm
Input Sensitivity Sensitivity: 5 µV/V/mmHg (37.5 µV/V/kPa)
Adjustment range: ±10%
Transducer Load Impedance: 200 to 2000 (resistive)
Output Impedance: 3000 (resistive)
Frequency Response dc to 12.5 Hz or 40 Hz
Zero Adjustment Range ±200 mmHg (±26 kPa)
Accuracy ±1 mmHg (±0.1 kPa)
Drift Less than 0.1 mmHg/°C (0.013 kPa/°C)
Gain Accuracy Accuracy ±1%
Drift Less than 0.05%/°C
Non linearity and
Hysteresis
Error of 0.4 %FS (@CAL 200 mmHg)
Overall Accuracy (including transducer) ±4% of reading or ±4 mmHg (±0.5 kPa), whichever is greater
Volume displacement of CPJ840J6 0.1 mm3 /100 mmHg
24 Specifications
295
Invasive Pressure Alarm Specifications
Temp
Complies with EN 12470-4:2000. Specified without transducer.
Invasive Pressure Alarm
Specifications Range Adjustment Delay
Pressure -40 to 360 mmHg
(-5.0 to 48 kPa)
-40 to 50 mmHg
2mmHg (0.5kPa)
>50 mmHg
5mmHg (1kPa)
max. 12 seconds
Extreme High Difference to high limit 0 to
25 mmHg
5 mmHg steps (0.5 kPa)
Clamping at -40 to 360 mmHg 5 mmHg steps (1.0 kPa)
Extreme Low Difference to low limit 0 to
25 mmHg
5 mmHg steps (0.5 kPa)
Clamping at -40 to 360 mmHg 5 mmHg steps (1.0 kPa)
Pulse 25 to 300 bpm Adult:
1 bpm steps (25 to 40 bpm)
5 bpm steps (40 to 300 bpm)
Pedi/Neo:
1 bpm steps (25 to 50 bpm)
5 bpm steps (50 to 300 bpm)
Tachycardia Difference to high limit 0 to
50 bpm
5 bpm steps max. 14 seconds
Clamping at 150 to 300 bpm 5 bpm steps
Bradycardia Difference to low limit 0 to
50 bpm
5 bpm steps max. 14 seconds
Clamping at 25 to 100 bpm 5 bpm steps
Temp Performance Specifications
Temp Range -1 to 45°C (30 to 113°F)
Resolution 0.1°C (0.2°F)
Accuracy ±0.1°C (±0.2°F)
Average Time Constant Less than 10 seconds
Temp Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment
Temp High/Low Alarms -1 to 45°C (30 to 113°F) -1 to 35°C (30 to 95°F), 0.5°C (1.0°F) steps
35 to 45°C (95 to 113°F), 0.1°C (0.2°F) steps
24 Specifications
296
CO2
The CO2 measurement in the monitor, M3014A and M3015A complies with EN ISO 21647:2004 +
Cor.1:2005 (except alarm system; alarm system complies with IEC 60601-2-49:2001).
Microstream CO2 Humidity Correction Factor
Either BTPS or ATPD can be selected as the humidity correction factor for the Microstream CO2
readings. The formula for the correction calculation is:
where:
PBTPS = partial pressure at body temperature and pressure, saturated
PATPD = partial pressure at ambient temperature and pressure, dry
M3015A Microstream CO2 Performance Specifications
CO2 Range 0 to 150 mmHg (0 to 20 kPa), or 20% CO2, whichever is lower
Accuracy Up to 5 minutes during warmup: ±4 mmHg or 12%, whichever is greater
After 5 minutes warmup:
0 to 40 mmHg (0 to 5.3 kPa):±2.2 mmHg (±0.3 kPa)
Above 40 mmHg (5.3 kPa):±(5.5% + (0.08%/mmHg above 40 mmHg)) of
reading
These specifications are valid for 21% O2 and N2 balance, up to 35°C ambient
temperature, up to 60 rpm in adult mode and 100 rpm in neonatal mode.
Outside of these conditions the accuracy reaches at a minimum ±4 mmHg or
±12% of the reading, whichever is greater.
Resolution Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1 mmHg (0.01 kPa)
Stability Included in Accuracy specifications
AwRR Range 0 to 150 rpm
Accuracy 0 to 40 rpm: ±1 rpm
41 to 70 rpm: ±2 rpm
71 to 100 rpm: ±3 rpm
>100 rpm: ±5% of reading
IPI Range 1 to 10
Resolution 1
Warm-up Time 5 minutes for full accuracy specification
Rise Time 190 ms for neonatal mode
(measured with FilterLine H for neonatal)
240 ms for adult mode
(measured with FilterLine H for adult)
Sample Flow Rate 50 + 15/-7.5 ml/minute
Gas Sampling Delay
Time
Maximum:
3 seconds (2m sample lines)
6 seconds (4m sample lines)
Sound Pressure Acoustic noise: <45 dBA
Total System Response
Time
The total system response time is the sum of the delay time and the rise time.
24 Specifications
297
M8102A/M3014A Mainstream and Sidestream CO2 Humidity Correction Factor
Either BTPS or ATPD can be selected as the humidity correction factor for the CO2 readings. The
formula for the correction calculation is:
Where p = partial pressure, Pabs = absolute pressure, and PH2O = 42 mmHg @35°C and 100% RH.
M3014A Mainstream CO2 Performance Specifications
CO2 Range 0 to 150 mmHg (0 to 20.0 kPa)
Accuracy after 2 minutes warmup:
For values between 0 and 40 mmHg: ±2.0 mmHg (±0.29 kPa)
For values from 41 to 70 mmHg: ±5% of reading
For values from 71 to 100 mmHg: ±8% of reading
The specifications are valid for standard gas mixtures, balance air, fully
hydrated at 35°C, Pabs = 760 mmHg, flow rate = 2 l/min.
Resolution Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1 mmHg (0.01 kPa)
Stability:
Short term drift
Long term drift
±0.8 mmHg over four hours
Accuracy specification will be maintained over a 120 hour period
awRR Range 2 to 150 rpm
Accuracy ±1 rpm
Warm-up Time 2minutes with CO
2 transducer attached for full accuracy specification
Response Time Less than 60 ms (with adult or infant reusable or disposable adapter)
M3014A Sidestream CO2 Performance Specifications
CO2 Range 0 to 150 mmHg (0 to 20.0 kPa)
Accuracy after 2 minutes warmup:
For values between 0 and 40 mmHg: ±2.0 mmHg (±0.29 kPa)
For values from 41 to 70 mmHg: ±5% of reading
For values from 71 to 100 mmHg: ±8% of reading
For values from 101 to 150 mmHg: ±10% of reading
At respiration rates above 80 rpm, all ranges are ±12% of actual. The
specifications are valid for gas mixtures of CO2, balance N2, dry gas at
760 mmHg within specified operating temperature range.
Resolution Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1mmHg (0.01kPa)
Stability:
Short term drift
Long term drift
±0.8 mmHg over four hours
Accuracy specification will be maintained over a 120 hour period
awRR Range 2 to 150 rpm
Accuracy ±1 rpm
Warm-up Time 2minutes with CO
2 sensor attached for full accuracy specification
Sample Flow Rate 50 ±10 ml/minute
Total System Response Time 3seconds
Operating Temperature 0 to 40°C (32 to 100°F)
24 Specifications
298
Mainstream CO2 Humidity Correction Factor
Either BTPS or ATPD can be selected as the humidity correction factor for the Mainstream CO2
readings. The formula for the correction calculation is:
Where p = partial pressure, Pabs = absolute pressure, and PH2O = 47 mmHg @37°C and 100% RH.
M3016A Mainstream CO2 Performance Specifications
CO2 Range –4 to 150 mmHg (-0.5 to 20.0 kPa)
Accuracy after 20 minutes warmup and calibration:
For values between 0 and 40 mmHg: ±2.2 mmHg (±0.29 kPa)
For values between 40 and 76 mmHg: ±5.5% of reading
The specifications are valid for 45% O2 and N2 or N2O balance. Outside
these conditions the accuracy reaches at a minimum the requirements of
EN864/ISO9918.
Resolution Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1 mmHg (0.01 kPa)
Stability ±1.0 mmHg over a 7 day period
awRR Range 0 to 150 rpm
Accuracy ±2 rpm
Warm-up Time 20 minutes with CO2 transducer attached for full accuracy specification
Response Time Less than 125 ms (for step from 10% to 90%)
CO2 Alarm
Specifications Range Adjustment Delay
etCO2 High 20 to 95 mmHg (2 to 13 kPa) 1 mmHg (0.1 kPa) M8102A/M3014A/M3016A: less than
14 seconds
M3015A: less than 21 seconds.
etCO2 Low 10 to 90 mmHg (1 to 12 kPa)
imCO2 High 2 to 20 mmHg
(0.3 to 3.0 kPa)
steps of 1 mmHg
(0.1 kPa)
M8102A/M3014A/M3016A: less than
14 seconds
M3015A: less than 21 seconds.
awRR High Adult/pedi: 10 to 100 rpm
Neo: 30 to 150 rpm
under 20 rpm: 1 rpm
steps
over 20 rpm:5 rpm
steps
M8102A/M3014A/M3016A: less than
14 seconds
M3015A: less than 21 seconds.
awRR Low Adult/pedi: 0 to 95 rpm
Neo: 0 to 145 rpm
M3015A:
settings <20 rpm: less than 8 seconds
>20 rpm: less than 21 seconds
M8102A/M3014A/M3016A
settings <20 rpm: less than 4 seconds
>20 rpm: less than 14 seconds
IPI Low
(M3015A/B
only)
Adult/pedi: 2 to 9 steps of 1 Maximum 14 seconds after displayed
value goes below the low alarm limit
setting.
Apnea delay 10 to 40 seconds 5 second steps set apnea delay time + 4 seconds
(M8102A/M3014A/M3016A) or
8 seconds (M3015A with 2 m sample
lines) or 11 seconds (M3015A with 4 m
sample lines).
24 Specifications
299
Interfering Gas and Vapor Effects On CO2 Measurement Values
The specified deviations for M8102A/M3014A are valid when the appropriate corrections are
switched on and set correctly.
Safety and Performance Tests
You must observe any national regulations on the qualification of the testing personnel and suitable
measuring and testing facilities. See the maintenance section for a list of required tests. Safety and
performance tests, and what to do if the instrument does not meet these specifications, are described
in the Service Guide.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Specifications
Take special precautions regarding electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) when using medical electrical
equipment. You must operate your monitoring equipment according to the EMC information
provided in this book. Portable and mobile radiofrequency (RF) communications equipment can affect
medical electrical equipment.
Accessories Compliant with EMC Standards
All accessories listed in the accessories section comply, in combination with the monitor, with the
requirements of IEC 60601-1-2:2001 + A1:2004.
WARNING
Using accessories other than those specified may result in increased electromagnetic emission or
decreased electromagnetic immunity of the monitoring equipment.
Gas or Vapor Gas Level
(% volume fraction)
M8102A/M3014A M3015A
Additional deviation due to gas interference,
measured at 0 - 40 mmHg CO2
Nitrous Oxide 60% ±1 mmHg ±5%
Halothane 4% ±2 mmHg ±5%
Enflurane 5% ±2 mmHg ±5%
Isoflurane 5% ±2 mmHg ±5%
Sevoflurane 5% ±2 mmHg ±5%
Xenon 80% -5 mmHg ±5%
Helium 50% ±1 mmHg ±5%
Metered dose inhaler
propellants
- not specified for use
Desflurane 15% +5 mmHg ±5%
Ethanol 0.1% ±1 mmHg ±5%
Isopropanol 0.1% ±1 mmHg ±5%
Acetone 0.1% ±1 mmHg ±5%
Methane 1.0% ±1 mmHg ±5%
24 Specifications
300
Electromagnetic Emissions
The monitor is suitable for use in the electromagnetic environment specified in the table below. You
must ensure that it is used in such an environment.
Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference (Resp)
The respiration (Resp) measurement is a very sensitive measurement that measures a very small signal.
Technological limitations do not allow higher immunity levels than 1 V/m for radiated RF
electromagnetic fields and 1 Vrms for conducted disturbances induced by RF fields. Electromagnetic
fields with field strengths above 1 V/m and conducted disturbances above 1 Vrms may cause
erroneous measurements. Therefore Philips recommends that you avoid using electrically radiating
equipment in the close proximity of this measurement.
WARNING
The monitor should not be used next to or stacked with other equipment. If you must stack the
monitor, you must check that normal operation is possible in the necessary configuration before you
start monitoring patients.
Emissions test Compliance Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference
Radiofrequency (RF) emissions Group 1 The monitor uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its RF
emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment
RF emissions CISPR 11 Class A The monitor is suitable for use in all establishments other than those directly
connected to the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies
buildings used for domestic purposes.
RF emissions CISPR 11 Class B The monitor, with the following measurements and interfaces:
ECG/Respiration, NBP, SpO2, Pressure, Temperature, CO2 (only Mainstream
Sensor M2501A), LAN
is suitable for use in all establishments including those directly connected to the
public low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for
domestic purposes.
24 Specifications
301
Electromagnetic Immunity
The monitor is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The user must ensure
that it is used in the appropriate environment as described below.
In this table, UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Recommended Separation Distance
WARNING
• This equipment generates, uses and radiates radio-frequency energy, and if it is not installed and
used in accordance with its accompanying documentation, may cause interference to radio
communications.
• The monitor, equipped with a wireless network interface, intentionally receives RF electromagnetic
energy for the purpose of its operation. Therefore, other equipment may cause interference, even
if that other equipment complies with CISPR emission requirements.
In the following table, P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according
to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in meters (m). The
values given in brackets are for respiration.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the
monitor, including cables, than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation
appropriate for the frequency of the transmitter.
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, should be
less than the compliance level in each frequency range.
Immunity test IEC 60601-1-2
test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment guidance
Electrostatic discharge
(ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
Floors should be wood, concrete, or
ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relative humidity
should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast transient/
burst
IEC 61000-4-4
±2 kV for power supply lines
±1 kV for input/output lines
±2 kV for power supply lines
±1 kV for input/output lines
Mains power quality should be that of a
typical commercial and/or hospital
environment
Surge
IEC 61000-4-5
±1 kV differential mode
±2 kV common mode
±1 kV differential mode
±2 kV common mode
Mains power quality should be that of a
typical commercial and/or hospital
environment
Voltage dips, short
interruptions and voltage
variations on power supply
input lines
IEC 61000-4-11
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for
0.5 cycles
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for
0.5 cycles
Mains power quality should be that of a
typical commercial and/or hospital
environment. If the user of the monitor
requires continued operation during power
mains interruptions, it is recommended
that the monitor is equipped with an
internal battery or is powered from an
uninterruptible power supply.
40% UT (60% dip in UT) for
5cycles
40% UT (60% dip in UT) for
5 cycles
70% UT (30% dip in UT) for
25 cycles
70% UT (30% dip in UT) for
25 cycles
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for
5sec
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for
5sec
Power frequency (50/
60 Hz) magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be
a t levels characteristic of a typical location
in a typical commercial and/or hospital
environment
24 Specifications
302
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with this symbol:
1. If ECG/SpO2 signals are acquired from a telemetry device via short range radio the compliance level is 3V/m except
in the range 2.0 to 2.3 GHz where it is 1 V/m.
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular, cordless) telephones
and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be
predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF
transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the
location in which the monitor is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the monitor
should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional
measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the monitor.
These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
Immunity test IEC 60601-1-2
test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment guidance
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6
3Vrms
150 kHz to 80 MHz
3Vrms
(1 Vrms for respiration)
Recommended separation distance:
d = 1.2√P
for respiration:
d = 3.5√P
Radiated RF
IEC 61000-4-3
3V/m
80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
3V/m
(1 V/m for respiration)
For short range radio, see
note1.
Recommended separation distance:
80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 1.2√P
80 MHz to 800 MHz for respiration
d = 3.5√P
800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
d = 2.3√P
800 MHz to 2,5 GHz for respiration
d = 7.0√P
2.0 to 2,3 GHz for short range radio
d = 7.0√P
24 Specifications
303
Recommended separation distances from portable and mobile RF
communication equipment
The monitor is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. The customer or user of the monitor can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the
monitor as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
In the following table, P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according
to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in meters (m). The
values given in brackets are for respiration.
Electrosurgery Interference/Defibrillation/Electrostatic Discharge
The equipment returns to the previous operating mode within 10 seconds without loss of any stored
data. Measurement accuracy may be temporarily decreased while performing electrosurgery or
defibrillation. This does not affect patient or equipment safety. Do not expose the equipment to x-ray
or strong magnetic fields (MRI).
Fast Transients/Bursts
The equipment will return to the previous operating mode within 10 seconds without loss of any
stored data. If any user interaction is required, the monitor indicates with a technical alarm (INOP).
Restart time
After power interruption, an ECG wave will be shown on the display after 30 seconds maximum.
Frequency of
transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800MHz to 2,5GHz
Equation d = 1.2√P
for respiration:
d = 3.5√P
d = 1.2√P
for respiration:
d = 3.5√P
d = 2.3√P
for respiration:
d = 7.0√P
for short range radio in the range 2.0
to 2.3 GHz:
d = 7.0√P
Rated max. output
power of transmitter Separation distance Separation distance Separation distance
0.01 W 0.1 (0.4) m 0.1 (0.4) m 0.2 (0.7) m
0.1 W 0.4 (1.1) m 0.4 (1.1) m 0.7 (2.2) m
1 W 1.3 (3.5) m 1.3 (3.5) m 2.3 (7.0) m
10 W 3.8 (11.1) m 3.8 (11.1) m 7.3 (22.1) m
100 W 12.0 (35.0) m 12.0 (35.0) m 23.0 (70.0) m
24 Specifications
304
25
305
25Default Settings Appendix
This appendix documents the most important default settings of your monitor as it is delivered from
the factory. For a comprehensive list and explanation of default settings, see the Configuration Guide
supplied with your monitor. The monitor's default settings can be permanently changed in
Configuration Mode.
Note: If your monitor has been ordered pre-configured to your requirements, the settings at delivery
will be different from those listed here.
Country-Specific Default Settings
Certain default settings are specific to a particular country. These are listed here for all countries
alphabetically.
Country-Description Line Frequency
50/60 [Hz]
Units
Weight
kg, lb
Units
Height
in, cm
ECG Cable Color
IEC, AAMI
Afghanistan 50 kg cm AAMI
Åland Islands 50 kg cm IEC
Albania 50 kg cm IEC
Algeria 50 kg cm IEC
American Samoa 60 lb in AAMI
Andorra 60 lb in AAMI
Angola 50 kg cm IEC
Anguilla 60 lb in AAMI
Antarctica 60 lb in AAMI
Antigua and Barbuda 50 kg cm AAMI
Argentina 50 kg cm AAMI
Armenia 50 kg cm IEC
Aruba 60 kg cm AAMI
Australia 50 kg cm AAMI
Austria 50 kg cm IEC
Azerbaijan 50 kg cm IEC
25 Default Settings Appendix
306
Bahamas 60 kg cm AAMI
Bahrain 50 kg cm AAMI
Bangladesh 50 kg cm IEC
Barbados 50 kg cm AAMI
Belarus 50 kg cm IEC
Belgium 50 kg cm IEC
Belize 60 lb in AAMI
Benin 60 lb in AAMI
Bermuda 60 kg cm AAMI
Bhutan 60 lb in AAMI
Bolivia 60 kg cm AAMI
Bosnia and Herzegovina 50 kg cm IEC
Botswana 50 kg cm IEC
Bouvet Island 60 lb in AAMI
Brazil 60 kg cm AAMI
British Indian Ocean Territory 60 lb in AAMI
Brunei Darussalam 50 kg cm IEC
Bulgaria 50 kg cm IEC
Burkina Faso 50 kg cm IEC
Burundi 50 kg cm IEC
Cambodia 50 kg cm IEC
Cameroon 50 kg cm IEC
Canada 60 kg cm AAMI
Cape Verde 60 lb in AAMI
Cayman Islands 60 kg cm AAMI
Central African Republic 50 kg cm IEC
Chad 60 lb in AAMI
Chile 50 kg cm AAMI
China 50 kg cm AAMI
Christmas Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Cocos Keeling Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Colombia 60 kg cm AAMI
Comoros 60 lb in AAMI
Congo 50 kg cm IEC
Congo, The Democratic Republic
of the
50 kg cm IEC
Country-Description Line Frequency
50/60 [Hz]
Units
Weight
kg, lb
Units
Height
in, cm
ECG Cable Color
IEC, AAMI
25 Default Settings Appendix
307
Cook Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Costa Rica 60 kg cm AAMI
Côte d'Ivoire 50 kg cm IEC
Croatia 50 kg cm IEC
Cuba 60 kg cm IEC
Cyprus 50 kg cm IEC
Czech Republic 50 kg cm IEC
Denmark 50 kg cm IEC
Djibouti 50 kg cm IEC
Dominica 50 kg cm AAMI
Dominican Republic 60 kg cm AAMI
Ecuador 60 kg cm AAMI
Egypt 50 kg cm IEC
El Salvador 60 kg cm AAMI
Equatorial Guinea 50 kg cm IEC
Eritrea 50 kg cm IEC
Estonia 50 kg cm IEC
Ethiopia 50 kg cm IEC
Falkland Islands, Malvinas 60 lb in AAMI
Faroe Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Fiji 60 lb in AAMI
Finland 50 kg cm IEC
France 50 kg cm IEC
French Guiana 50 kg cm IEC
French Polynesia 60 lb in AAMI
French Southern Territories 60 lb in AAMI
Gabon 50 kg cm IEC
Gambia 50 kg cm IEC
Georgia 60 lb in AAMI
Germany 50 kg cm IEC
Ghana 50 kg cm IEC
Gibraltar 60 lb in AAMI
Greece 50 kg cm IEC
Greenland 60 lb in AAMI
Grenada 50 kg cm AAMI
Guadeloupe 50 kg cm IEC
Country-Description Line Frequency
50/60 [Hz]
Units
Weight
kg, lb
Units
Height
in, cm
ECG Cable Color
IEC, AAMI
25 Default Settings Appendix
308
Guam 60 lb in AAMI
Guatemala 60 kg cm AAMI
Guernsey 50 kg cm IEC
Guinea 60 lb in AAMI
Guinea-Bissau 60 lb in AAMI
Guyana 60 kg cm AAMI
Haiti 60 kg cm AAMI
Heard Island and McDonald
Islands
60 lb in AAMI
Holy See, Vatican City State 60 lb in AAMI
Honduras 60 kg cm AAMI
Hong Kong 50 kg cm IEC
Hungary 50 kg cm IEC
Iceland 50 kg cm IEC
India 50 kg cm IEC
Indonesia 50 kg cm IEC
Iran, Islamic Republic of 50 kg cm AAMI
Iraq 50 kg cm AAMI
Ireland 50 kg cm IEC
Isle of Man 50 kg cm IEC
Israel 50 kg cm IEC
Italy 50 kg cm IEC
Jamaica 50 kg cm AAMI
Japan 50 kg cm IEC
Jersey 50 kg cm IEC
Jordan 50 kg cm AAMI
Kazakhstan 50 kg cm IEC
Kenya 50 kg cm IEC
Kiribati 60 lb in AAMI
Korea, Democratic People's
Republic of
60 lb in AAMI
Korea, Republic of 60 kg cm AAMI
Kuwait 50 kg cm AAMI
Kyrgyzstan 60 lb in AAMI
Lao People's Democratic
Republic
50 kg cm IEC
Latvia 50 kg cm IEC
Country-Description Line Frequency
50/60 [Hz]
Units
Weight
kg, lb
Units
Height
in, cm
ECG Cable Color
IEC, AAMI
25 Default Settings Appendix
309
Lebanon 50 kg cm AAMI
Lesotho 50 kg cm IEC
Liberia 50 kg cm IEC
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya 60 lb in AAMI
Liechtenstein 60 lb in AAMI
Lithuania 50 kg cm IEC
Luxembourg 50 kg cm IEC
Macao 50 kg cm IEC
Macedonia, The former
Yugoslavian Republic of
50 kg cm IEC
Madagascar 50 kg cm IEC
Malawi 50 kg cm IEC
Malaysia 50 kg cm IEC
Maldives 60 lb in AAMI
Mali 50 kg cm IEC
Malta 50 kg cm IEC
Marshall Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Martinique 60 kg cm IEC
Mauritania 50 kg cm IEC
Mauritius 60 lb in AAMI
Mayotte 60 lb in AAMI
Mexico 60 kg cm AAMI
Micronesia, Federal States of 60 lb in AAMI
Moldova, Republic of 60 lb in AAMI
Monaco 60 lb in AAMI
Mongolia 60 lb in AAMI
Montenegro 50 kg cm IEC
Montserrat 50 kg cm AAMI
Morocco 50 kg cm IEC
Mozambique 50 kg cm IEC
Myanmar 60 lb in AAMI
Namibia 50 kg cm IEC
Nauru 60 lb in AAMI
Nepal 50 kg cm IEC
Netherlands 50 kg cm IEC
Netherlands Antilles 50 kg cm AAMI
Country-Description Line Frequency
50/60 [Hz]
Units
Weight
kg, lb
Units
Height
in, cm
ECG Cable Color
IEC, AAMI
25 Default Settings Appendix
310
New Caledonia 60 lb in AAMI
New Zealand 50 kg cm AAMI
Nicaragua 60 kg in AAMI
Niger 50 kg cm IEC
Nigeria 50 kg cm IEC
Niue 60 lb in AAMI
Norfolk Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Northern Mariana Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Norway 50 kg cm IEC
Oman 50 kg cm AAMI
Pakistan 50 kg cm IEC
Palau 60 lb in AAMI
Palestinian Territory 50 kg cm AAMI
Panama 60 lb in AAMI
Papua New Guinea 60 lb in AAMI
Paraguay 50 kg cm AAMI
Peru 60 kg cm AAMI
Philippines 60 kg cm AAMI
Pitcairn 60 lb in AAMI
Poland 50 kg cm IEC
Portugal 50 kg cm IEC
Puerto Rico 60 lb in AAMI
Qatar 50 kg cm AAMI
Reunion 60 lb in AAMI
Romania 50 kg cm IEC
Russian Federation 50 kg cm IEC
Rwanda 50 kg cm IEC
Saint Helena 60 lb in AAMI
Saint Kitts and Nevis 60 kg cm AAMI
Saint Lucia 50 kg cm AAMI
Saint Pierre and Miquelon 60 lb in AAMI
Saint Vincent & the Grenadines 50 kg cm AAMI
Samoa 60 lb in AAMI
San Marino 60 lb in AAMI
Sao Tome and Principe 60 lb in AAMI
Saudi Arabia 50 kg cm AAMI
Country-Description Line Frequency
50/60 [Hz]
Units
Weight
kg, lb
Units
Height
in, cm
ECG Cable Color
IEC, AAMI
25 Default Settings Appendix
311
Senegal 50 kg cm IEC
Serbia 50 kg cm IEC
Serbia & Montenegro 50 kg cm IEC
Seychelles 60 lb in AAMI
Sierra Leone 50 kg cm IEC
Singapore 50 kg cm IEC
Slovakia 50 kg cm IEC
Slovenia 50 kg cm IEC
Solomon Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Somalia 50 kg cm IEC
South Africa 60 lb in AAMI
South Georgia and the South
Sandwich Islands
60 lb in AAMI
Spain 50 kg cm IEC
Sri Lanka 50 kg cm IEC
Sudan 50 kg cm IEC
Suriname 60 kg cm AAMI
Svalbard and Jan Mayen 60 lb in AAMI
Swaziland 60 lb in AAMI
Sweden 50 kg cm IEC
Switzerland 50 kg cm IEC
Syrian Arab Rep 50 kg cm AAMI
Taiwan, Province of China 60 kg cm AAMI
Tajikistan 60 lb in AAMI
Tanzania, United Republic of 60 lb in AAMI
Thailand 50 kg cm AAMI
Timor-Leste 60 lb in AAMI
Togo 60 lb in AAMI
Tokelau 60 lb in AAMI
Tonga 60 lb in AAMI
Trinidad and Tobago 60 kg cm AAMI
Tunisia 50 kg cm IEC
Turkey 50 kg cm IEC
Turkmenistan 60 lb in AAMI
Turks and Caicos Islands 60 kg cm AAMI
Tuvalu 60 lb in AAMI
Country-Description Line Frequency
50/60 [Hz]
Units
Weight
kg, lb
Units
Height
in, cm
ECG Cable Color
IEC, AAMI
25 Default Settings Appendix
312
Uganda 60 lb in AAMI
Ukraine 60 lb in AAMI
United Arab Emirates 50 kg cm AAMI
United Kingdom 50 kg cm IEC
United States 60 lb in AAMI
United States Minor Outlying
Islands
60 lb in AAMI
Uruguay 50 kg cm AAMI
Uzbekistan 60 lb in AAMI
Vanuatu 60 lb in AAMI
Venezuela 60 lb in AAMI
Viet Nam 50 kg cm IEC
Virgin Islands, British 50 kg cm AAMI
Virgin Islands, United States 60 lb in AAMI
Wallis and Futuna Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Western Sahara 50 kg cm IEC
Yemen 50 kg cm AAMI
Zambia 60 lb in AAMI
Zimbabwe 60 lb in AAMI
Country-Description Line Frequency
50/60 [Hz]
Units
Weight
kg, lb
Units
Height
in, cm
ECG Cable Color
IEC, AAMI
25 Default Settings Appendix
313
Alarm and Measurement Default Settings
The default wave speed for all measurements except Respiration is 25 mm/sec. For Respiration the
default wave speed is 6.25 mm/sec.
In the following tables, settings may be entered only once per table row if they are the same for all
patient categories.
Alarm Default Settings
Alarm Settings Factory Default H10/H20/H40 H30 (deviations from H10/H20/
H40)
Alarm Volume 5
Alarms Off 2 min
Pause Al. 5Min Enabled
Pause Al. 10Min Enabled
Auto Alarms Off Off
AlarmOffReminder Off
Visual Latching Red&Yellow Red Only
Audible Latching Red&Yellow Off
Alarm Reminder On
Reminder Time 3 min
Alarm Sounds Traditional
RedAlarmInterval 10 sec
Yel.Al. Interval 20 sec
Alarm Low 42
Red Alarm Volume AlarmVol. +2
Yell.AlarmVolume AlarmVol. +0
INOP Volume AlarmVol. +0
AutoIncrease Vol 2 Steps
IncreaseVolDelay 20 sec
Keep Blinking No
Relay1 Sensitiv. R&Y&C
Relay2 Sensitiv. Red&Yellow
Relay3 Sensitiv. Red
CyanRelayLatency 5sec
Yel.RelayLatency 2sec
Alarm Text Standard
NoCentrMonMinVol On4
25 Default Settings Appendix
314
ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings
Arrhythmia Default Settings
ECG Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
High Limit 120 bpm 160 bpm 200 bpm
Low Limit 50 bpm 75 bpm 100 bpm
ECG/Arrhy Alarms On On On
Alarm Source Auto Auto Auto
ECG On On On
QRS Volume 111
Primary Lead II II II
Secondary Lead V V V
Analysis Mode Multi Lead Multi Lead Multi Lead
Lead Placement Standard Standard Standard
Mod.LeadPlacment Off Off Off
Filter Monitor Monitor Monitor
AutoFilter Off Off Off
Default ECG Size Size X1 Size X1 Size X1
Color Green Green Green
Asystole Thresh. 4.0 sec 4.0 sec 3.0 sec
Δ ExtrTachy 20 bpm 20 bpm 20 bpm
Tachy Clamp 200 bpm 220 bpm 240 bpm
Δ ExtrBrady 20 bpm 20 bpm 20 bpm
Brady Clamp 40 bpm 40 bpm 50 bpm
ECG Alm Off INOP Cyan Cyan Cyan
Fallback On On On
Alarms Off Enabled Enabled Enabled
AlarmSource Sel. Enabled Enabled Enabled
Va Lead V2 V2 V2
Vb Lead V5 V5 V5
SyncPulse Sensit Medium Medium Medium
SyncPulse Marker On On On
PulseAlarms Tele Enabled Enabled Enabled
Arrhythmia Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
Arrhythmia On On Off
Pause Threshold 2.0 sec 2.0 sec 1.5 sec
VTach HR 100 120 150
VTach Run 555
25 Default Settings Appendix
315
ST and QT Default Settings
Vent Rhythm 14 14 14
SVT HR 180 200 210
SVT Run 555
PVCs/min 10 5 5
Non-Sustain On On On
Vent Rhythm On On On
Run PVCs On On On
Pair PVCs On On On
R-On-T PVCs On On On
V.Bigeminy On On On
V.Trigeminy On On On
PVCs/min On On On
Multif.PVCs On On On
Pacer N.Cap On On On
Pacer N.Pac On On On
Pause On On On
Missed Beat On On On
SVT On On On
Afib On On On
Irregular HR On On On
HR Alarms Short Yellow Short Yellow Short Yellow
TimeOut 1st 3 min 3 min 3 min
TimeOut 2nd 10 min 10 min 10 min
ArrhyOff Message Yes Yes Yes
Some ECG Al INOP On On On
Arrhythmia Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
Lead-independent ST Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
ST Alarm Mode Single ST Single ST Single ST
Alarms On On On
ST Analysis On Off Off
ST-Index On Off Off
ISO Point -80 ms -80 ms -80 ms
J Point 48 ms 48 ms 48 ms
ST Point J+60 J+60 J+60
25 Default Settings Appendix
316
Pulse Default Settings
Lead I, II, III, V, aVR, aVL, V1-6, MCL
Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
ST Analysis On Off Off
For Alarm Mode = Single ST
ST (Label) High +2.0 mm +2.0 mm +2.0 mm
ST (Label) Low -2.0 mm -2.0 mm -2.0 mm
For Alarm Mode = Multi ST
ST (Label) High +1.0 mm +1.0 mm +1.0 mm
ST (Label) Low +1.0 mm +1.0 mm +1.0 mm
QT Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
QT Lead All All All
QTc High Limit 500 ms 480 ms 460 ms
ΔQTc High Limit 60 ms 60 ms 60 ms
QTc High Alarm On On On
ΔQTc High Alarm On On On
QT Analysis Off Off Off
QTc Formula Bazett Bazett Bazett
Pulse Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
Alarm Source Auto Auto Auto
Pulse (source label) On On On
System Pulse SpO₂SpO₂SpO₂
Alarms Off Enabled Enabled Enabled
AlarmSource Sel. Enabled Enabled Enabled
Pulse Alarm Settings
Factory defaults H10/H20/H40
Adult Pedi Neo
Pulse (SpO₂)OnOnOn
Pulse Alarms Off Off Off
High Limit 120 bpm 160 bpm 200 bpm
Low Limit 50 bpm 75 bpm 100 bpm
25 Default Settings Appendix
317
Pulse alarms use the settings of the currently selected Pulse alarm source.
Respiration Default Settings
SpO2 Default Settings
Δ ExtrBrady 20 bpm 20 bpm 20 bpm
Brady Clamp 40 bpm 40 bpm 50 bpm
Δ ExtrTachy 20 bpm 20 bpm 20 bpm
Tachy Clamp 200 bpm 220 bpm 240 bpm
Pulse Alarm Settings
Factory defaults H10/H20/H40
Adult Pedi Neo
Respiration Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
High Limit 30 rpm 30 rpm 100 rpm
Low Limit 8 rpm 8 rpm 30 rpm
Apnea Time 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec
Alarms On On On
Resp On On On
Detection Auto
(Trigger Mode)
Auto
(Trigger Mode)
Auto
(Trigger Mode)
Color Yellow Yellow Yellow
SpO2 Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
Mode Continuous Continuous Continuous
Repeat Time 15 min 15 min 15 min
Alarms On On On
QRS Volume 111
Tone Modulation Yes Yes Yes
Tone Mod. Type Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced
Perfusion OnOnOn
Average 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec
NBP Alarm Suppr. On On On
Extd. Auto OnOff Disabled Disabled Disabled
Color Cyan (light blue) Cyan (light blue) Cyan (light blue)
Average In Mon. No No No
Signal Quality OnOnOn
25 Default Settings Appendix
318
NBP Default Settings
SpO2 Alarm Default Settings
Setting Adult Pedi Neo
Desat Limit 80 80 80
Low Limit 90 90 85
High Limit 100 100 95
Desat Delay 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec
High Alarm Delay 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec
Low Alarm Delay 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec
SmartAlarmDelay (SAD) Off Off Off
High Alarm Delay (SAD) Short Short Short
Low Alarm Delay (SAD) Short Short Short
Label SpO₂SpO₂SpO₂
Pulse settings
Pulse (SpO₂) OnOnOn
For all other Pulse default settings, refer to the Pulse Default Settings table.
NBP Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
Mode Auto Auto Manual
Alarms from Sys. Sys. Sys.
High Limit 160/90 (110) 120/70 (90) 90/60 (70)
Low Limit 90/50 (60) 70/40 (50) 40/20 (24)
Alarms On On On
NBP On On On
Repeat Time 10 min 10 min 10 min
Pulse (NBP) On On On
Unit mmHg mmHg mmHg
Done Tone Off Off Off
Start Time Synchronized Synchronized Synchronized
VP Pressure 60 mmHg 40 mmHg 30 mmHg
Reference Auscultatory Auscultatory Invasive
Color Red Red Red
25 Default Settings Appendix
319
Temperature Default Settings
Invasive Pressure Default Settings
Temp Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
Low Limit 36 36 36
High Limit 39 39 39
Alarms On On On
Unit °C °C °C
Range 35...43 35...43 35...43
Color Green Green Green
ABP, ART, Ao, BAP, FAPP,PP1, P2, P3, P4,
UAP Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
Alarms from Sys. Sys. Sys.
High Limit 160/90 (110) 120/70 (90) 90/60 (70)
Low Limit 90/50 (70) 70/40 (50) 55/20 (36)
Alarms On On On
Extreme Alarms Disabled Disabled Disabled
Δ Extreme High 15 10 5
Δ Extreme Low 15 10 5
Sys. High Clamp 190/100 (125) 140/80 (100) 105/75 (75)
Sys. Low Clamp 80/45 (65) 60/35 (45) 45/15 (30)
Scale 150 100 100
Mean only No No No
Filter 12 Hz 12 Hz 12 Hz
Mercury Cal Yes Yes Yes
Artifact Suppr. 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec
Unit mmHg mmHg mmHg
Color Red Red Red
CVP, RAP, LAP, UVP Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
Alarms from Mean Mean Mean
High Limit 14/6 (10) 10/2 (4) 10/2 (4)
Low Limit 6/-4 (0) 2/-4 (0) 2/-4 (0)
Alarms On On On
Extreme Alarms Enabled Enabled Enabled
Δ Extreme High 555
25 Default Settings Appendix
320
Δ Extreme Low 555
Mean High Clamp 20/10 (15) 15/5 (10) 15/5 (10)
Mean Low Clamp 0/-5 (-5) 0/-5 (-5) 0/-5 (-5)
Scale 30 30 30
Mean only Yes Yes Yes
Filter 12 Hz 12 Hz 12 Hz
Mercury Cal Yes Yes Yes
Artifact Suppr. 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec
Unit mmHg mmHg mmHg
Color Cyan (light blue) Cyan (light blue) Cyan (light blue)
CVP, RAP, LAP, UVP Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
PAP Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
Alarms from Dia. Dia. Dia.
High Limit 34/16 (20) 60/4 (26) 60/4 (26)
Low Limit 10/0 (0) 24/-4 (12) 24/-4 (12)
Alarms On On On
Extreme Alarms Enabled Enabled Enabled
Δ Extreme High 555
Δ Extreme Low 555
Dia. High Clamp 45/20 (25) 65/5 (35) 65/5 (35)
Dia. Low Clamp 5/-5 (-5) 15/-5 (5) 15/-5 (5)
Scale 30 30 30
Mean only No No No
Filter 12 Hz 12 Hz 12 Hz
Mercury Cal Yes Yes Yes
Artifact Suppr. 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec
Unit mmHg mmHg mmHg
Color Yellow Yellow Yellow
ICP, IC1, IC2 Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
Alarms from Mean Mean Mean
High Limit 14/6 (10) 10/2 (4) 10/2 (4)
Low Limit 6/-4 (0) 2/-4 (0) 2/-4 (0)
Alarms On On On
Extreme Alarms Enabled Enabled Enabled
Δ Extreme High 10 10 10
25 Default Settings Appendix
321
CO2 Default Settings
Δ Extreme Low 10 10 10
Mean Low Clamp 20/10 (-5) 15/5 (-5) 15/5 (-5)
Mean High Clamp 0/-5 (0) 0/-5 (0) 0/-5 (0)
Scale 30 30 30
Mean only Yes Yes Yes
Filter 12 Hz 12 Hz 12 Hz
Mercury Cal Yes Yes Yes
Artifact Suppr. 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec
Unit mmHg mmHg mmHg
Color Magenta Magenta Magenta
ICP, IC1, IC2 Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
CO2 Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
etCO₂ Low 30 30 30
etCO₂ High 50 50 50
imCO₂ High 444
CO₂ Alarms On On On
Unit mmHg mmHg mmHg
Scale 40 mmHg 40 mmHg 40 mmHg
imCO₂On On On
N₂O Corr. (only M3015A/M3016A) Off Off Off
Oxygen Corr. (only M3014A) 16% 16% 16%
Gas Corr. (only M3014A) Off Off Off
Humidity Corr. BTPS BTPS BTPS
Max Hold Off Off Off
awRR On On On
awRR Alarms On On On
High Limit (awRR) 30 30 60
Low Limit (awRR) 8830
Apnea Time 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec
Color Yellow Yellow Yellow
25 Default Settings Appendix
322
323
1Index
#
10-lead placement (ECG) 116
12-lead placement (ECG) 116
3-lead placement (ECG) 115
5-lead placement (ECG) 115
A
AAMI ECG lead labels 114
abdominal breathing 160
and Resp electrode placement 160
aberrantly conducted beats 128
accessories
10-electrode cable sets 259
3-electrode cable sets 258, 260
5-electrode cable sets 258, 260
5-electrode one piece cables 261
6-electrode cable sets 259
CO2 201, 202, 203
CO2 (mainstream) 269, 270
ECG 107
NBP 177
adult cuffs 263
comfort cuffs 262
disposable cuffs 263
multi-patient comfort cuff kits 262
neonatal/infant cuffs (single
patient) 263
reusable cuffs 262
single patient, adult/pediatric soft
cuffs 263
resp 257
set combiners and organizers 259, 261
SpO2 165
trunk cables 257, 260
active alarms 51
address, Philips 274
addressograph (printer configuration
setting) 238
adjusting ST measurement points 142
adjusting wave scale (pressure) 191
adjusting wave size (CO2) 204
admitting a patient
quick admit 92
airway adapter 203
CO2, microstream accessory 203
alarm latching 62, 63, 133
alarm limits 58, 60
checking 58
narrow 60
report 216
ST 137
switching auto limits on/off 60
using automatic limits 60
wide 60
alarm source selection, disabled 157
alarms 51
active 51
alphabetical listing 65
apnea delay time (Resp) 162
arrhythmia 127
awrr limits 206
chaining 135
CO2, awRR 206
desat, SpO2 175
effect on pressure alarms during
zero 189
high priority 51
INOP 51
ISO/IEC standard 54
limit, SpO2 290
patient messages 65
physiological 65
recordings 64
red 51
selftest 63
SpO2 specific 170
ST 144
testing 63
tone configuration 53
traditional 54
yellow 51
alphabetical listing of alarms 65
analog output
ECG 107
apnea alarm delay
CO2 201, 202, 203
apnea alarm delay time (RESP) 162
apnea alarms 162
and Resp detection modes 161
arrhythmia 127
aberrantly conducted beats 128
analysis, how it works 127
atrial fibrillation and flutter 128
beat labels 130
initiating learning 132
intermittent bundle branch block 129
learning during ventricular rhythm 132
levels of analysis 123, 127
monitoring non-paced patients 127
monitoring paced patients 127
options 127
relearning 132
relearning and lead fallback 132
status messages 130
switching on/off 60
understanding the display 129
arrhythmia alarms 51, 133, 135, 137, 287
adjusting alarm limits 134
all yellow on/off 134
chaining 135
latching 62, 63
multiple 135
PVC-related alarms 137
sinus and SV rhythm ranges 290
switching on/off 60
timeout periods 134
arrhythmia monitoring 125
and defibrillation 125
arrhythmia options 123
arrhythmia relearning 122
with EASI INOP 122
arterial pressure source 194
arterial pulsation 165
artifact suppression (pressure) 191
atrial fibrillation and flutter 128
audible latching (arrhythmia alarms) 133
auto alarm limits 60
switching on/off 60
auto detection mode (Resp) 160
automatic arrhythmia relearn 132
automatic default setting 36
automatic NBP
repeat time 179
autosize 111
ECG wave 111
awRR alarm 206
limits 206
awRR alarms 206
CO2 201, 202, 203
B
baseline 148
ST map, updating 148
basic arrhythmia option 123, 127
battery 245, 248, 249, 251, 275
and display brightness 251
battery reports 248
324
charge status 248
conserving power 251
indicators 51
malfunction indicator 246
monitoring time 246
safety information 125, 162
status indicator 246
symbol 275
time to empty 247
time to full 247
battery eject symbol 275
battery performance 250
optimizing 250
beat labels 130
arrhythmia 127
blood pressure. See also NBP (non-
invasive) or PRESS (invasive) 177
C
calculating cerebral perfusion 194
calculating temperature difference 186
calibrating 183
calibration 183, 192, 193
NBP 177
pressure transducer 192
cardiac overlay 159, 161
and Resp detection modes 161
when measuring Resp 159
cardiotach alarms 123
cerebral perfusion 194
chaining 135
change screen window 34
changing ECG lead sets 113
changing Resp detection mode 160
changing Resp wave size 161
changing Resp wave speed 162
checking battery charge 248
checklist 11, 12
delivery 12
installation 11
cleaning 241
infection control 241
monitoring accessories 243
CO2 201, 202, 203
airway adapter 203
alarms, awRR 206
awRR alarm limits 206
checking transducer accuracy 201
correction, humidity 204
correction, N2O 204
corrections 204
FilterLine 203
measuring mainstream 201
measuring microstream 203
microstream accessories 203
microstream extension 203
removing exhaust gases 200, 204
transducer, using 202
wave scale, adjusting 204
CO2 (mainstream) 269, 270
configuration mode
entering 17
connecting power 13
connecting temperature probe 185
connection direction symbol 275
connectors 276
conventional 12-lead ECG 117
correcting the NBP measurement 179
CPAP (RESP) 160
cuff 179
pressure, NBP 179
selection, NBP 179
current view
ST map 145
D
damage claims 12
DC power symbol 275
default profile 36
default settings 305
checking country-specific 17
defibrillation 125
and arrhythmia monitoring 125
and ECG monitoring 125
defibrillator proof symbol 275
desat alarm, SpO2 175
detection modes (Resp) 160
disinfecting 241
infection control 241
display 129, 139, 160, 179
arrhythmia 127
ECG 107
NBP 177
Resp 160
ST 137
display brightness 251
display settings 35
dual Temp measurement 186
dyshemoglobins 166
intravascular (SpO2) 166
E
early systolic blood pressure, NBP 179
EASI 122
ECG monitoring 122
lead placement 159
EASI ECG lead labels 114
ECG 107
alarms off (Config Mode) 125
changing lead sets 113
choosing electrode sites 113
conventional 12-lead 117
external pacing electrodes 125
fusion beat pacemakers 125
intrinsic rhythm 125
modified 12-lead 117
New Lead Setup 113
pacemaker failure 125
rate adaptive pacemakers 125
wave size 111
ECG cable 125
for operating room 125
ECG cables, connecting 107
ECG connector 107
ECG electrode colors 114
ECG electrode placement 125
during electrosurgery 125
ECG gain 232
ECG lead labels 114
ECG leads monitored 113
ECG report 232, 239
lead layout 232
ECG safety information 125
ECG source tracking 104
ECG wave 111
autosize 111
calibration bar 111
ectopic status messages (arrhythmia
monitoring) 131
electrical output symbol 275
electrode placement (ECG) 107, 117
conventional 12-lead 117
modified 12-lead 117
electrode placement (Resp) 159, 160
with abdominal breathing 160
with lateral chest expansion 160
electrosurgery 125
and ECG 125
EMC interference 162
Resp 160
end case reports 233
enhanced arrhythmia option 123, 127
exclamation mark symbol 275
exhaust gases, removing 200, 204
external pacing electrodes 125
and ECG monitoring 125
extreme bradycardia alarm 124
extreme rate alarms 124
extreme tachycardia alarm 124
F
fallback (ECG) 114
325
FAST 165
Fourier artefact suppression
technology 165
FilterLine 203
CO2, microstream accessory 203
flushing invasive pressure accessories 187
functional arterial oxygen saturation 165
fusion beat pacemakers 125
and ECG monitoring 125
G
gas cylinder
empty, disposing of 255
getting started 42
global trend time 222
H
horizon trend 222
trend time 222
HR = RR (Resp) 160
HR alarms 125
when arrhythmia off 125
HR alarms off (Config Mode) 125
HR and pulse alarm source selection 157
humidity correction 204
CO2 201, 202, 203
I
IEC ECG lead labels 114
IMV (Resp) 160
indicators 51
battery malfunction 246
infection control 241
disinfecting 241
Information Center 96
central recording 227
transferring patients 96
INOPs 51
indicators 51
installation 11
checklist 11, 12
connectors 276
personnel 11
intermittent bundle branch block 129
intermittent mandatory ventilation
(Resp) 160
interruption symbol 275
intravascular dyshemoglobins (SpO2) 166
intrinsic rhythm 125
ISO point (ST) 142
J
J point (ST) 142
K
keyboard, on screen 33
keys 32
alarms 51
pop-up 32
L
latching 62, 63
alarms 51
alarms, behavior 63
latching arrhythmia alarms 133
lateral chest expansion (neonates) 160
monitoring Resp 160
lead fallback 132
and arrhythmia relearning 132
lead fallback (ECG) 114
lead labels (ECG) 114
lead placement 159
for Resp measurement 159
leads monitored (ECG) 113
Leads Off INOP (ECG) 114
levels of arrhythmia analysis 127
M
main setup 31
mains power
connecting to 13
mainstream CO2 201
measuring 201
maintenance 253
schedule 253
malfunction symbols
battery 248, 251
manual detection mode (Resp) 161, 162
and apnea alarms 162
manufacture date symbol 275
manufacturer's information 274
map 145
ST 137
Mason-Likar lead system 117
measurement points, ST 142
measurement server
ECG connector 107
measurement settings 35
measurement setup menu 30
measurements 37, 43
menu 30, 31
main setup 31
measurement setup 30
messages
INOP 51
methemoglobin (SpO2) 166
microstream CO2 203
measuring 201
modified 12-lead ECG 117
monitor defaults 305
monitor revision 42
how to find 42
monitoring
starting 42
mounting 13
power supply 13
N
N2O correction 204
CO2 201, 202, 203
narrow alarm limits 60
NBP 177
adult cuffs 263
ANSI/AAMI SP10-1992 177
calibrating 183
comfort cuff kits 262
comfort cuffs 262
cuff pressure 179
cuff, applying 179
cuff, selecting 179
cuff, tightness 179
disposable cuffs 263
how the measurement works 177
measurement correction 179
measurement limitations 178
measurement methods, auto 178
measurement methods, manual 178
measurement methods, sequence 178
measurement methods, stat 178
neonatal cuffs (disposable) 263
numerics 179
oscillometric method 177
pediatric cuffs 263
preparing to measure 179
repeat time 179
reusable cuffs 262
single patient, adult/pediatric soft
cuffs 263
site inspection 166
time of last measurement 179
units 179
venous puncture 183
neonates 160
Resp electrode placement 160
new features 45
non-invasive blood pressure. See NBP 177
non-paced patients 127
arrhythmia monitoring 125
numerics 179
explanation of NBP display 179
326
O
on-screen keyboard 33
operating room ECG cable 125
orange ECG cable 125
organizers 259, 261
oscillometric NBP measurement
method 177
overlapping screen trends 223
P
pace pulse rejection (ECG) 108, 110
about 36
switching on/off 60
paced patients 111, 125, 127
arrhythmia monitoring 125
repolarization tails 111
safety information 125, 162
setting status 125
paced status
checking 58
pacemaker failure 125
parameter scales 220
patient 177
category, NBP 177
patient alarm messages 65
patient reports 238
contents 238
performance specifications 287
performance test 299
perfusion indicator 165, 166, 175
Philips contact information 274
physiological alarms 51
pleth wave 175
pleth waveform 165
pop-up keys 32
power
connection 13
power supply 13
mounting 13
preparing skin 107
for ECG 107
pressure
alarms during zero 189
arterial source 194
calibration pressure 193
cerebral perfusion, calculating 194
performance specifications 287
wave scale 191
wave size 111
pressure artifact suppression 191
pressure of NBP cuff 179
pressure transducer 192
calibration 183, 192, 193
print job 235
suspended 235
printer 235
settings 36, 104, 305
status messages 130
unavailable 235
printing 231
ST map reports 148
probes 185
disposable temperature 185
profiles 35, 36
default profile 36
patient category 35
swapping a complete profile 36
pulse 155
alarms 51
system pulse source 155
pulse numerics for SpO2 166
PVC-related alarms 137
Q
QRS volume, changing 112
QT alarms 152
QT baseline 151
QT measurement algorithm 149
QT monitoring 149
limitations 149
QT/QTc monitoring 148
quick admit 92
R
radiated field immunity 162
Resp 160
rate adaptive pacemakers 125
and ECG monitoring 125
recording
preventing fading ink 229
recording alarms 64
relearning arrhythmia 132
repolarization tails 111
reports 231
alarm limits 58, 60
battery reports 248
contents 238
ECG 107
re-routing 235
scheduled 233
ST map 145
stopping printouts 232
re-routing reports 235
resp accessories 257
Resp alarms 162
apnea alarm delay time 162
Resp detection level 162
and apnea detection 162
Resp detection modes 160, 161
and cardiac overlay 159
Resp display 160
Resp monitoring 159
and cardiac overlay 159
Resp safety information 162
Resp wave 161, 162
changing size 161
rhythm status messages (arrhythmia
monitoring) 130
S
safety information 125, 162
batteries 252
ECG 107
Resp 160
safety test 299
safety tests 15
performance tests 15
power on test 15
system 15
visual inspection 253
scale 111, 161
ECG wave 111
Resp wave 161, 162
scales 220
for trends waveforms 220
scheduled reports 233
screen trend 222
trend time 222
selftest 63
alarms 51
sequence mode 182
set combiners 259, 261
setting up the sequence 182
settings 36, 104, 305
about 36
default 305
screen settings 36
synchronized telemetry and
monitor 104
settings blocks 35
short yellow alarms on/off 134
signal quality of SpO2 169
sinus and SV rhythm ranges 290
skin preparation 107
ECG 107
SmartKeys symbol 275
source tracking 104
ECG 107
specifications 287
arrhythmia 127
SpO2 165
327
alarms specific to SpO2 170
arterial pulsation 165
assessing suspicious reading 169
FAST technology 165
perfusion indicator 165, 166, 175
pleth wave 175
pleth waveform 165
pulse numerics 166
signal quality 169
site inspection 166
site selection 165
SpO2 desat alarm 175
ST 137
adjusting alarm limits 134
alarms 51
ensuring diagnostic quality 137
filtering 137
measurement points, adjusting 142
snippets 139
ST display 139
ST map 145
report, printing
printing 231
ST map report 148
scale, changing 148
scale 111, 161
ST map 145
task window 147
trending interval, changing 148
trending priority 147
ST maps 145
ST point 142
standard 10-lead placement 116
standard 3-lead placement 115
standard 5-lead placement (ECG) 115
standby symbol 275
status log
printing 231
status messages 130
printer 235
status messages (arrhythmia) 130, 131
ectopic 131
rhythm 130
sterilizing 241
infection control 241
stopping reports printouts 232
surgical ECG cable 125
suspicious SpO2 reading 169
symbols 275
battery 248, 251
system pulse 155
systolic blood pressure, NBP, early 179
T
Tamb 186
task window for ST map 147
Tcereb 186
telemetry alarms 103
suspending at bedside 103
telemetry device
unpairing 211
temperature
alarm settings 185
connecting probe to monitor 185
difference, calculating 186
dual Temp measurement 186
extended label set 186
first 186
making a measurement 185
probe, disposable 185
probe, selecting 185
second 186
temperature probe 185
test blocks, how to perform 15
testing alarms 63
tone configuration, alarm 53
transducer 201
CO2, accuracy 201
transferring centrally-monitored
patients 96
transport brightness setting 251
trend time 222
global 222
trend view
ST map 145
trending interval 148
ST map 145
trends
setting parameter scales 220
trends pop-up keys 216
trends priority list
ST map 145
troubleshooting
CO2 201, 202, 203
trunk cables 257, 260
Ttymp 186
Tvesic 186
U
unpacking 12
unpairing 211
V
V electrode placement (ECG) 116
venous puncture 183
visual latching (arrhythmia alarms) 133
voltage setting 13
W
wave 191, 204
scale (CO2) 204
scale (pressure) 191
size (CO2) 204
size (pressure) 191
wave size 111
Resp 160
wave size (ECG) 111
wave speed (Resp) 162
what's new 45
wide alarms limits 60
wired network connection symbol 275
Z
zero 189
effect on pressure alarms 189
zeroing
pressure transducer 192
328
329
Part Number 453564306381
Published in Germany 03/2012
*453564306381*

Navigation menu